Four-X

Strategic Planning Software for Open Pit

Mines

Reference Manual

As for print of November, 1998

1
Copyright  1996, 1997, 1999 Whittle Programming Pty Ltd. All rights reserved.

Apart from any use as permitted under the Berne Convention and the relevant Copyright Act of each
country, no part of this publication may be reproduced by any process without prior written permission
from Whittle Programming Proprietary Limited, Melbourne, Australia, A.C.N. 065 377 004.

This version of the Four-X Manual was released with revision 1.10 of Four-X.

Whittle Programming Pty Ltd

4th Floor
1013 Whitehorse Road
Box Hill Victoria 3128
AUSTRALIA

Telephone: +61 3 9899 3799

Facsimile: +61 3 9899 3755

email: [email protected]
web: www.whittle.com.au

2
High Level Table of Contents

USING THIS MANUAL _______________________________________ 11

PART 1: THE FOUR-X PACKAGE ______________________________ 15

PART 2: THE PROGRAMS ___________________________________ 29

Chapter 1: Edit Parameters Program (FXED) _______________________________________33

Chapter 2: Re-blocking Program (FXRE) ___________________________________________45

Chapter 3: Structure Arcs Program (FXST) _________________________________________83

Chapter 4: Optimization Program (FXOP) __________________________________________90

Chapter 5: Pit Visualisation Program (FXPI) ________________________________________96

Chapter 6: Mining Width Program (FXMI) ________________________________________104

Chapter 7: Analysis Program (FXAN) _____________________________________________119

Chapter 8: Utilities Program (FXUT) ______________________________________________149

PART 3: DETAILED FILE FORMATS __________________________ 175

Chapter 1: Parameters File ______________________________________________________178

Chapter 2: Model, Mining Sequence and Results Files ________________________________213

Chapter 3: Slope Profile, Profile Number and Additional Arcs Files ____________________227

Chapter 4: Pit List, Polygon and Opti-Cut Files _____________________________________234

Chapter 5: Spreadsheet Files _____________________________________________________240

Chapter 6: Auxiliary Files _______________________________________________________265

Continued on next page

3
High Level Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
High Level Table of Contents, Continued

PART 4: TECHNIQUES _____________________________________ 268

Chapter 1: General Techniques for Getting the Most out of the Package_________________269

Chapter 2: Computer Techniques _________________________________________________274

Chapter 3: Using Expressions ____________________________________________________282

Chapter 4: Calculating Costs_____________________________________________________292

Chapter 5: Mining Factors_______________________________________________________306

APPENDICES _____________________________________________ 329

Appendix A: How the Structure Arcs Program Works________________________________330

Appendix B: How Four-X Calculates a Block Value __________________________________337

Appendix C: How a Block Model is Defined ________________________________________343

Appendix D: Ore Selection Methods: by Cut-off or Cash Flow _________________________346

Appendix E: The Concepts Behind Four-X Nested Pits _______________________________377

Appendix F: How the Milawa Algorithm Works _____________________________________381

Appendix G: How the Lerchs-Grossmann Algorithm Works___________________________382

Appendix H: Four-X and Other Whittle Packages ___________________________________391

Appendix I: Four-X System Limits and Precision ____________________________________402

Appendix J: Error Messages _____________________________________________________404

Appendix K: Requests for Program Enhancement ___________________________________408

GLOSSARY ______________________________________________ 409

INDEX ___________________________________________________ 425

4
High Level Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
Detailed Table of Contents

USING THIS MANUAL _______________________________________ 11

PART 1: THE FOUR-X PACKAGE ______________________________ 15

Overview___________________________________________________________________15
Introducing Four-X ___________________________________________________________16
Program Description __________________________________________________________17
Files_______________________________________________________________________19

PART 2: THE PROGRAMS ___________________________________ 29

Overview___________________________________________________________________29

Chapter 1: Edit Parameters Program (FXED) _______________________________________33

Overview___________________________________________________________________33
Section A: Using the Edit Parameters Program________________________________________34
Menu System________________________________________________________________34
Using the Program ___________________________________________________________36
Section B: The Menus___________________________________________________________37
Menu Structure ______________________________________________________________37
Main Menu _________________________________________________________________38
Main Edit Menu Options_______________________________________________________39
Section C: Further Information ____________________________________________________44

Chapter 2: Re-blocking Program (FXRE) ___________________________________________45

Overview___________________________________________________________________45
Section A: What the Re-blocking Program Does ______________________________________47
Modes of Operation __________________________________________________________47
Options ____________________________________________________________________49
Section B: Using the Re-blocking Program __________________________________________53
Overview___________________________________________________________________53
Mode 1: Manipulating Model Files_______________________________________________54
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files ______________________________________________59
Mode 3: Converting a Results File to a Model File __________________________________66
Mode 4: Converting a Results File to a Pit List File __________________________________72
Mode 5: Converting a Model File and One or More Pit List Files to a Results File__________76
What Happens (All Modes) ____________________________________________________81
Section C: Further Information ____________________________________________________82

Chapter 3: Structure Arcs Program (FXST) _________________________________________83

Overview___________________________________________________________________83
Using the Structure Arcs Program________________________________________________86
Further Information___________________________________________________________89

Continued on next page

5
Detailed Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
Detailed Table of Contents, Continued

Chapter 4: Optimization Program (FXOP) __________________________________________90

Overview___________________________________________________________________90
Using the Optimization Program_________________________________________________92
Further Information___________________________________________________________95

Chapter 5: Pit Visualisation Program (FXPI) ________________________________________96

Overview___________________________________________________________________96
Using the Pit Visualisation Program ______________________________________________98
How the Diagrams are Displayed _______________________________________________100
Further Information__________________________________________________________103

Chapter 6: Mining Width Program (FXMI) ________________________________________104

Overview__________________________________________________________________104
How the Mining Width Program Works __________________________________________106
Using the Mining Width Program_______________________________________________114
Print File Output ____________________________________________________________117
Further Information__________________________________________________________118

Chapter 7: Analysis Program (FXAN) _____________________________________________119

Overview__________________________________________________________________119
Section A: Analysis Program Overview ____________________________________________121
Terminology _______________________________________________________________121
The Analysis _______________________________________________________________122
Mining Schedules: Worst Case, Best Case and User Specified ________________________123
Section B: Using the Analysis Program ____________________________________________126
Procedure _________________________________________________________________126
What Happens______________________________________________________________135
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests ______________________________________136
Section D: Output _____________________________________________________________145
Spreadsheet and Print File Output_______________________________________________145
Section E: Further Information ___________________________________________________148

Continued on next page

6
Detailed Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
Detailed Table of Contents, Continued

Chapter 8: Utilities Program (FXUT) ______________________________________________149

Overview__________________________________________________________________149
Section A: Summarising a Data File _______________________________________________150
Overview__________________________________________________________________150
Starting the Program and Entering Preliminary Information___________________________151
Procedure: Counts Only ______________________________________________________153
Procedure: Graphs Only ______________________________________________________155
Procedure: Counts and Graphs _________________________________________________157
What Happens and Output ____________________________________________________160
Section B: Showing Block Value Calculations _______________________________________164
Overview__________________________________________________________________164
Procedure _________________________________________________________________165
Print File Output ____________________________________________________________167
Section C: Showing Cut-off Variation with Processing CAF ____________________________168
Overview__________________________________________________________________168
Procedure _________________________________________________________________169
Print File Output ____________________________________________________________170
Section D: Showing Four-X System Limits _________________________________________171
Overview__________________________________________________________________171
Procedure _________________________________________________________________172
Print File Output ____________________________________________________________173
Section E: Further Information ___________________________________________________174

PART 3: DETAILED FILE FORMATS __________________________ 175

Overview__________________________________________________________________175

Chapter 1: Parameters File ______________________________________________________178

Overview__________________________________________________________________178
Layout ____________________________________________________________________179
Line Types ________________________________________________________________180
Information in the Parameters File ______________________________________________193
Example Parameters File______________________________________________________212

Chapter 2: Model, Mining Sequence and Results Files ________________________________213

Overview__________________________________________________________________213
Section A: Model File __________________________________________________________214
Overview__________________________________________________________________214
Layout ____________________________________________________________________218
Section B: Mining Sequence File _________________________________________________221
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________221
Section C: Results File _________________________________________________________223
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________223

Continued on next page

7
Detailed Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
Detailed Table of Contents, Continued

Chapter 3: Slope Profile, Profile Number and Additional Arcs Files ____________________227
Overview__________________________________________________________________227
Section A: Slope Profile File_____________________________________________________228
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________228
Section B: Profile Number File___________________________________________________230
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________230
Section C: Additional Arcs File __________________________________________________232
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________232

Chapter 4: Pit List, Polygon and Opti-Cut Files _____________________________________234

Overview__________________________________________________________________234
Section A: Pit List File _________________________________________________________235
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________235
Section B: Polygon File ________________________________________________________237
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________237
Section C: Opti-Cut Files _______________________________________________________239

Chapter 5: Spreadsheet Files _____________________________________________________240

Overview__________________________________________________________________240
Section A: Spreadsheet Definition File _____________________________________________241
Overview__________________________________________________________________241
Layout ____________________________________________________________________242
Codes ____________________________________________________________________243
Guidelines and Examples _____________________________________________________253
Application of Spreadsheet Codes ______________________________________________255
Section B: Spreadsheet Output File _______________________________________________263
Overview and Layout ________________________________________________________263

Chapter 6: Auxiliary Files _______________________________________________________265

Initialization, Language and Fx??.ok Files ________________________________________265

PART 4: TECHNIQUES _____________________________________ 268

Overview__________________________________________________________________268

Chapter 1: General Techniques for Getting the Most out of the Package_________________269
Section A: Iteration ____________________________________________________________269
Section B: From Optimized Outline to Design _______________________________________270
Section C: Using a Spider Diagram to Plot Data About the Sensitivity of a Project___________273

Chapter 2: Computer Techniques _________________________________________________274

Overview__________________________________________________________________274
Section A: Using Log Files ______________________________________________________275
What are Log Files? _________________________________________________________275
Logging Commands _________________________________________________________277
Section B: Running the Programs in Batch Files _____________________________________280

Continued on next page

8
Detailed Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
Detailed Table of Contents, Continued

Chapter 3: Using Expressions ____________________________________________________282

Types of Expressions ________________________________________________________282
The Form of Expressions _____________________________________________________284

Chapter 4: Calculating Costs_____________________________________________________292

Overview__________________________________________________________________292
Section A: Calculating Costs for Pit Optimization ____________________________________293
Costs - General _____________________________________________________________293
Costs - Specific _____________________________________________________________296
The Application of Costs _____________________________________________________299
Example of Cost Calculation___________________________________________________303
Section B: Time Cost Handling During Analysis _____________________________________305

Chapter 5: Mining Factors_______________________________________________________306

Overview__________________________________________________________________306
Section A: Techniques with Blocks _______________________________________________307
Block Sizes ________________________________________________________________307
Re-blocking and Bias ________________________________________________________310
Restricting the Number of Parcels in a Block ______________________________________312
Section B: Pit Shape Techniques _________________________________________________313
Minimum Mining Width ______________________________________________________313
Dealing with Pits that Hit the Side of the Model Framework __________________________316
Dealing with Obstructions and Immovable Objects _________________________________318
Extending the Ore Body ______________________________________________________319
Section C: Complex Processing Methods ___________________________________________321
Section D: Handling Slopes that Vary with Rock-type _________________________________324
Section E: Allowing for Underground Mining _______________________________________326

APPENDICES _____________________________________________ 329

Overview__________________________________________________________________329

Appendix A: How the Structure Arcs Program Works________________________________330

Overview__________________________________________________________________330
How the Structure Arcs Program Handles Slopes___________________________________331
How Possible Arcs are Generated for a Block _____________________________________334
How the Structure Arcs File is Generated_________________________________________336

Appendix B: How Four-X Calculates a Block Value __________________________________337

Values Used from the Model File and Parameters File_______________________________337
The Calculation_____________________________________________________________340

Appendix C: How a Block Model is Defined ________________________________________343

Block Model _______________________________________________________________343
Sub-regions ________________________________________________________________344

Continued on next page

9
Detailed Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
Detailed Table of Contents, Continued

Appendix D: Ore Selection Methods: by Cut-off or Cash Flow _________________________346

Overview__________________________________________________________________346
Section A: Cut-offs ____________________________________________________________348
Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off Calculation___________________________________348
The Derivation of the Formula for a Marginal Cut-off _______________________________354
The Formula for a Cut-over ___________________________________________________359
Multiple Processing Methods __________________________________________________360
Cut-offs with Multiple Elements ________________________________________________361
Ranked Cut-offs ____________________________________________________________363
Display of Cut-offs and Cut-overs and Cut-off Scaling ______________________________366
Section B: Cash Flow __________________________________________________________367
Ore Selection by Cash Flow ___________________________________________________367
Section C: How Cut-offs and Cash Flows are Affected by Minima and Maxima _____________370
Overview__________________________________________________________________370
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Cut-offs ___________________________________371
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Parcel Grades ______________________________375

Appendix E: The Concepts Behind Four-X Nested Pits _______________________________377

Appendix F: How the Milawa Algorithm Works _____________________________________381

Appendix G: How the Lerchs-Grossmann Algorithm Works___________________________382

Overview__________________________________________________________________382
Demonstration______________________________________________________________383

Appendix H: Four-X and Other Whittle Packages ___________________________________391

Interfacing with Opti-Cut _____________________________________________________391
Differences Between Four-X and Four-D _________________________________________394
Merging Elements from Different Four-D Model Files ______________________________399

Appendix I: Four-X System Limits and Precision ____________________________________402

Appendix J: Error Messages _____________________________________________________404

Overview__________________________________________________________________404
Data Checks _______________________________________________________________405
Problem Traps______________________________________________________________406
System Error Messages _______________________________________________________407

Appendix K: Requests for Program Enhancement ___________________________________408

GLOSSARY ______________________________________________ 409

INDEX ___________________________________________________ 425

10
Detailed Table of Contents
5 July, 1999
Using this Manual

Introduction Four-X is a powerful and complex package and this Reference Manual has been
created to help you find what you need to know about the package as quickly
and easily as possible.
There are single and multi-element versions of the package but, since the only
difference between them lies in the number of elements allowed, this Reference
Manual applies to both versions. There are separate Getting Started Manuals
for the two versions.
Conventions used in this Manual
There are a number of conventions that have been set up to help you learn
about Four-X. This topic details these conventions.

↵”
Enter symbol “↵ In this Manual, the symbol “↵” is used to indicate that you need to press the
“Enter” (or Return) key.
Here is an example.

↵
In response to the question, “Please enter a name for the print file”, type: tut1↵

In the preceding example, the “↵” indicates that you need to press the Enter key
after typing “tut1”.

Square brackets
“[ ]” Whenever a default response to a question asked by the Four-X program is
shown, that response is enclosed in square brackets: “[ ]”.
Here is an example.

Price to be obtained for the GOLD

[400] :

In the preceding example, “400” is the default price for GOLD given by
Four-X.
The default response will be used by the program if the user presses the Enter
key (↵) without typing in any information.

Continued on next page

11
Using this Manual
5 July, 1999
Using this Manual, Continued

Angle brackets Throughout the Manual, angle brackets “< >” are used to indicate that the
“< >” appropriate codes or values should be inserted where the brackets appear,
replacing the brackets and any information enclosed by them.
Here is an example.

<method>.<element>

Italics Italics are used to highlight references to related topics or documentation.

Here is an example.

For more information, see Using this Manual, starting on page 11.

Bold type Bold type is used in this Manual:

• To show the user’s response to a question asked by Four-X
Here is an example.

Print file name Call the print file tut1.pra

• To emphasise important words or to highlight filenames

Here is an example.

The language file is always called fx.lng no matter what language is involved.

Continued on next page

12
Using this Manual
5 July, 1999
Using this Manual, Continued

Underlining In this Manual, underlining is used in:

• Program names
To indicate the letters from the Program name that make up the Command
Line name.
See below for more information about Command Line names and Program
names.
• File types
To indicate the letters that make up the file extensions for those file types.
See page 19 for more information about file types and extensions.
Underlining is only used where it will be helpful to the user to determine
Command Line names or file extensions.

Program names As the user has two means of accessing the Four-X programs, that is via the
and Command Menu or from the Command Line, each of the Four-X programs has two names:
Line names
• A Program name
• A Command Line name
In this Manual, Program names have been used in preference to Command Line
names.
The following table lists Four-X Program names and their corresponding
Command Line names.

Program name Command Line name

Edit Parameters FXED
Re-blocking FXRE
Structure Arcs FXST
Optimization FXOP
Pit Visualisation FXPI
Mining Width FXMI
Analysis FXAN
Utilities FXUT

For more information, see page 29.

Continued on next page

13
Using this Manual
5 July, 1999
Using this Manual, Continued

Terminology There are a number of special terms used in this Manual. These are explained
in the body of the text and in the Glossary at the back of the Manual.

Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in this Manual.

Abbreviation Term
CAF Cost Adjustment Factor
G&A costs General and Administration costs
GMP Generalised Mining Package
IRR Internal rate of return
k thousand(s)
m million(s)
NPV Net Present Value
PC Personal Computer

14
Using this Manual
5 July, 1999
 Part 1: The Four-X Package

Overview

In this part This part contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

Introducing Four-X 16
Program Description 17
Files 19

15
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Introducing Four-X

Background Four-X analyses and forecasts the optimal pit for long term projects†. There is
a single element version and a multi-element version.
Using the information assembled during exploration and all possible economic
scenarios, Four-X can provide a nested set of 40-100 optimal pit outlines‡ ,
each with a range of possible economic projections. It can give detailed
analyses of quantities, grades, stripping ratios, cash flows and discounted cash
flows.
In a multi-element situation, Four-X allows the user to consider the elements
individually, without having to create equivalent metal formulations.
Four-X is similar in usage to Whittle Four-D (which only handles one element),
but has a number of significant facilities that Four-D does not. For more
information, refer to Differences Between Four-X and Four-D, on page 394.
Four-X can be used for project scoping, for feasibility studies, for sensitivity
work, for risk analysis, for scheduling, and for deciding where to drill. Some
idea as to the breadth of its scope can be gleaned from the list of papers which
can be found on the Whittle Web site on http://www.whittle.com.au. Copies of
many of these papers are obtainable from Whittle Programming free of charge.

How Four-X Four-X operates on a regular block model of the ore body.
operates
Typically, the blocks in the block model contain:
• Material containing product
Depending on the potential revenue from the product it contains, the material
may or may not be worth processing.
• Material containing no product
This material is always mined as waste.
• Air
This distinguishes blocks above the topography from those below it.
By applying different factors to the revenue and re-optimizing for each factor,
Four-X produces a set of nested pits which are used to guide the mining
sequence during simulation of the operation of the mine.
The mining sequence is translated into a long-term production schedule, with
cash flows and discounted cash flows. This allows the user to select the pit
which is most suitable for the user’s aims.

†Long term projects are those that will run for more than 2-3 years.
‡Four-X uses a computer implementation of the Lerchs-Grossmann method. See H. Lerchs & I. F.
Grossmann, “Optimum Design of Open-Pit Mines”, Joint C.O.R.S. and O.R.S.A. Conference, Montreal, May
27-29, 1964, in Transactions, C.I.M., 1965, pp.17-24.

16
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Program Description

Introduction The Four-X package consists of eight separate programs. These programs are
described below.

The Edit The Edit Parameters Program allows you to:

Parameters
Program (FXED) • Create a Parameters File
• Edit an existing Parameters File
• Check the validity of:
- the values that you change in the Parameters File
- the whole Parameters File

The Re-blocking The Re-blocking Program allows you to modify Model and Results Files and to
Program (FXRE) create new Model, Results or Pit List Files.
The Re-blocking Program can operate in five different modes and depending on
the mode used, it can:
• Extend and truncate model frameworks, in any direction
• Merge element data from multiple single element models into one
multi-element model
• Combine blocks into bigger blocks and/or split blocks into smaller blocks,
along each of the three axes independently
• Mine out/strip off some of the pits found in a Results File
• Calculate positional mining and processing CAFs
• Limit the output blocks to those whose centres lie within a polygon specified
by the user
• Create a modified Parameters File that reflects changes to the model
framework.

The Structure Arcs The Structure Arcs Program prepares a file of “structure arcs” that describes the
Program (FXST) slopes you require in a form that is suitable for use in the pit optimization.

The Optimization The Optimization Program carries out the pit optimizations, and produces a
Program (FXOP) Results File containing the different pit outlines.

Continued on next page

17
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Program Description, Continued

The Pit The Pit Visualisation Program creates a print file containing diagrams in the
Visualisation form of plans and sections of the pits or of the different push-backs.
Program (FXPI)

The Mining Width The Mining Width Program modifies a set of push-back outlines and a final pit
Program (FXMI) based on specified pit numbers. It adjusts the shapes of the outlines, so as to
produce practical push-backs that satisfy mining width conditions.

The Analysis The Analysis Program allows you to simulate the operation of the mine over its
Program (FXAN) lifetime, under a wide range of throughputs and economic circumstances.
This allows you to select the best pit outline and the best way of operating the
mine long-term, according to almost any criteria.
In addition, if required, the Analysis Program can produce:
• A Mining Sequence File
• Opti-Cut Sequence and Economic Text Files
• Spreadsheet output.

The Utilities The Utilities Program can:

Program (FXUT)
• Summarise a Model File, Results File or Mining Sequence File
• Show block value calculations
• Show cut-off variation with processing CAF
• Display Four-X system limits

For more For more information about the programs in the Four-X package, see Part 2:
information The Programs, on page 29.

18
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files

Introduction Four-X uses a wide range of files. Some are created by your GMP or by
Four-X itself and others are supplied with the package.
This section contains a description of each of the files that you will use.

Additional Arcs Default extension .add

File
Description A text file that contains details of extra structure arcs
that you wish to add to those generated by Structure
Arcs Program for the slopes.
Created by The user, with a text editor or a word processor in
pure text mode or with a simple computer program.
Used by The Structure Arcs Program.
Further information See page 232.

Mining Sequence Default extension .msq

File
Description A text file that describes:
• Which blocks, and how much of each block is
mined in each period of a mining sequence,
simulated by the Analysis Program
• The method, if any, used to process each parcel
Created by The Analysis Program.
Used by • The Pit Visualisation Program
• The Utilities Program
Further information See page 221.

Model File Default extension .mod

Description A text file that provides details of the block contents.

Created by • A GMP
• The Re-blocking Program
Used by • The Re-blocking Program
• The Optimization Program
• The Pit Visualisation Program
• The Utilities Program
Further information See page 214.

Continued on next page

19
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Opti-Cut Default extension .etx

Economics Text
File Description A text file that contains detailed information about an
economic scenario and how the Opti-Cut cut-off
optimization is to be done.
Created by The Analysis Program.
Used by Whittle Opti-Cut cut-off optimization software.
Further information Refer to the Opti-Cut User Manual.

Opti-Cut Sequence Default extension .stx

Text File
Description A text file that describes the physical resource and the
proposed mining sequence.
Created by The Analysis Program.
Used by Whittle Opti-Cut cut-off optimization software.
Further information Refer to the Opti-Cut User Manual.

Parameters File Default extension .par

Description A text file which contains information about:

• The model layout
• The dimensions
• The element prices and costs
• The slopes
• The materials
• The processing methods
Created by • The Edit Parameters Program
• The user, with a text editor or a word processor in
pure text mode
• The Re-blocking Program
Used by All of the Four-X programs.
Further information See page 178.

Continued on next page

20
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Pit List File Default extension .pil

Description A text file that contains a list of block co-ordinates,

each with a pit number.
Created by • The Re-blocking Program
• The Mining Width Program
• User software
Used by • The Mining Width Program
• The Re-blocking Program
Further information See page 235.

Polygon File Default extension .pol

Description A text file containing a sequence of X,Y co-ordinates

that define the vertices of a polygon, in the order in
which they occur, as the edge of the polygon is
traversed.
Created by The user, with a text editor or a word processor in
pure text mode.
Used by The Re-blocking Program.
Further information See page 237.

Profile Number Default extension .pnu

File
Description A text file containing the slope profile number to use
for each block.
Created by A GMP or other user software.
Used by The Structure Arcs Program..
Further information See page 230.

Continued on next page

21
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Results File Default extension .res

Description A text file that contains details of the pit shells and all
of the blocks within the optimized pit for an infinite
Revenue Factor.
Created by • The Optimization Program
• The Re-blocking Program
Used by • The Re-blocking Program
• The Pit Visualisation Program
• The Mining Width Program
• The Analysis Program
• The Utilities Program
Further information See page 223.

Slope Profile File Default extension .slp

Description A text file that describes the slopes to be used in

different areas of the pit.
Created by The user, with a text editor or a word processor in
pure text mode.
Used by The Structure Arcs Program.
Further information See page 228.

Spreadsheet Default extension .ssd

Definition File
Description A text file that controls the data that the Analysis
Program outputs to the Spreadsheet Output File.
Created by The user, with a text editor or a word processor in
pure text mode.
Used by The Analysis Program.
Further information See page 241.

Continued on next page

22
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Spreadsheet Default extension .sso

Output File
Description A text file that contains output from the Analysis or
Utilities Program, in a form suitable to import into a
spreadsheet program.
Created by • The Analysis Program
• The Utilities Program
Used by The customer, for use with a spreadsheet program.
Further information See page 263.

Structure Arcs File Default extension .stu

Description A binary file containing the structure arcs necessary

to ensure that the required slopes are obeyed during
optimization.
The arcs are calculated from the block proportions
and the slope specifications. These specifications can
come from the slope profile for each sub-region and
the sub-region limits, or from a Slope Profile File and
a Model File zone number or a Profile Number File.
Structure Arcs Files may also contain arcs defined in
an Additional Arcs File.
Created by The Structure Arcs Program.
Used by • The Optimization Program
• The Mining Width Program
Note:
Unless you create the Structure Arcs File from a Slope Profile File and a Model
File zone number or a Profile Number File, then, if you optimize with an active
blocks indicator of:
• 1, you must create the Structure Arcs File with an active blocks indicator
of 1.
• 2 or 3, you must ensure that the sub-regions you use when creating the
Structure Arcs File include the whole of your region of interest.
If not, some part of the region you wish to optimize will not have slope
constraints, and the Optimization Program may mine mineralised blocks
without taking out the waste above them.
Structure Arcs Files are created and used only by Four-X. You should never
attempt to alter them in any way.

Continued on next page

23
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Work File Default extension .wrk

Description A binary file containing the information generated

during optimization, and details recorded during the
last restart dump.
Created by The Optimization Program.
Used by The Optimization Program during the run and to
restart an optimization run that was terminated by
power failure or hardware malfunction.
Note: Work Files are created and used only by Four-X. You should never
attempt to alter them in any way.

Print files Print files are files in which the programs store the results of their runs.
All programs, except for Edit Parameters Program, create print files and Four-X
has a different print file extension for each of the programs. Here is a list of
print file extensions.

File type Default extension

Print files for the:

Re-blocking Program .prr
Structure Arcs Program .prs
Optimization Program .pro
Pit Visualisation Program .prp
Mining Width Program .prm
Analysis Program .pra
Utilities Program .pru

Continued on next page

24
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Print files (continued)

To view or print a print file

You can view or print out a print file:
• Using a word processor or text editor
• From the Command Line
The following table describes how to view or print out a print file from the
Command Line.

On a PC On UNIX
To view a print file, type: To view a print file, type:
EDIT <filename and more <filename and
extension>↵ extension>↵
- or - - or -
TYPE <filename and pg <filename and
extension> | MORE↵ extension>↵
To print a print file, type: To print a print file, type:
print <filename and lp <filename and
extension>↵ extension>↵

Continued on next page

25
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Log files Log files are files that contain abbreviated prompts and answers. They can be
used to re-run a program using the previously logged set of prompts and
answers.
Four-X has a different log file extension for each of the main programs.

Here is a list of default log file extensions.

File type Default extension

Log files for the:

Edit Parameters Program .loe
Re-blocking Program .lor
Structure Arcs Program .los
Optimization Program .loo
Pit Visualisation Program .lop
Mining Width Program .lom
Analysis Program .loa
Utilities Program .lou

For more information about using log files, see page 275.

Continued on next page

26
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Filenames and Four-X has special facilities for handling filenames and extensions to minimize
extensions data entry.
As programs are run, the filenames and the extensions used are recorded in the
initialization file, fx.ini. In a subsequent run of the same, or a different
program, these recorded filenames will be offered as defaults.
Note: If you type in a filename without an extension, Four-X will add the
default extension for a file of that type.
If Four-X adds an extension to a filename, it will match the case of the
extension to the case of the last alphabetic character in the name.
Using your own file extension
To use your own file extension instead of the default extension, type in an
extension after the filename.
If you want to make sure the filename has no extension, you should end it with
a full stop (.).
Note: As a general rule, it is not advisable to do use a different file extension
from the default file extensions. This is because the different default extensions
have been designed to distinguish the different types of files.

Continued on next page

27
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
Files, Continued

Naming files As you control the names of the files that come from your GMP and are created
by Four-X, the following may be useful when choosing names for those files.
Use a project name or code and series number
Four-X has been set up so that it is possible to run all of the programs using the
same name part, and letting the program add the appropriate default extension.
Because of this, the use of a project name or code, and a series number may be
the easiest way of maintaining filename consistency for a project.

Filename limitations
• In Four-X, for both PCs and UNIX, there is an overall limit of 50 characters
for the filename and any directory path name.
• Under DOS, file and directory names are limited to a name part of 1 to 8
characters and an extension of up to 3 characters.
• As mentioned above, Four-X uses filename extensions to distinguish the
different types of files.

Filenames containing upper and lower case letters

Four-X can handle filenames containing upper and lower case letters.
• On a PC, the case of your responses is irrelevant. Nonetheless, it is advisable
to be consistent. This enables Four-X to check that you do not accidentally
use the same filename for different files in the same run.
• On UNIX systems, where it is usual to use lower case filenames, the case is
important.

28
Part 1: The Four-X Package
5 July, 1999
 Part 2: The Programs

Overview

Introduction This part describes the programs in detail.

In this part This part contains the following chapters.

Chapter See Page

Chapter 1: Edit Parameters Program (FXED) 33
Chapter 2: Re-blocking Program (FXRE) 45
Chapter 3: Structure Arcs Program (FXST) 83
Chapter 4: Optimization Program (FXOP) 90
Chapter 5: Pit Visualisation Program (FXPI) 96
Chapter 6: Mining Width Program (FXMI) 104
Chapter 7: Analysis Program (FXAN) 119
Chapter 8: Utilities Program (FXUT) 149

Approaches to Before looking at the programs in detail, consider the following approaches to
using Four-X using Four-X.

Approach 1: The following table sets out the minimum required to do a detailed pit design.
minimum required
Step Description
1. Export a Model File from your GMP.
2. Work out the expected costs and prices.
3. Decide on your slope requirements, allowing for the location of the
haul roads.
4. Use the Structure Arcs Program to pre-calculate the slopes and to
create a Structure Arcs File.
5. Use the Optimization Program to create a Results File containing
nested pits.
6. Use the Analysis Program to analyse the Results File and to decide
which pit to use.
7. Import the pit outline from the Results File back into the GMP and
do the detailed pit design, using the outline as a guide.

Continued on next page

29
Part 2: The Programs
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Approach 2: The tables below detail a two-stage approach, using two different block sizes.
recommended
approach This approach will give you a good understanding of the economic and slope
sensitivity of the pit, and should lead to a design that is stable in the face of
change.
There are many possible variations of this approach, which you will develop
with experience.

Stage one:
sensitivity work
Step Description
1. Export a Model File from your GMP.
In addition, we recommend that you:
• Use the Pit Visualisation Program to prepare plans and sections
of the file. This will enable you to check that the exporting
procedure has placed the blocks where you expect them to be.
• Use the Utilities Program to check quantities, rock-types, and so
forth.
2. If the model is too big for sensitivity work (see Block Sizes on page
307 for more information), use the Re-blocking Program to
re-block it. (Note: You should keep the original file for later use).
3. Work out the expected costs and prices
4. Decide on your slope requirements, allowing for the effect of the
haul roads.
5. Use the Structure Arcs Program to prepare a Structure Arcs File.
6. Use the Optimization Program to produce a Results File
containing nested pits.
7. Use the Analysis Program to do some preliminary analysis runs for
different pit sizes, and then select the best pit for your purposes.

Continued on next page

30
Part 2: The Programs
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Stage one: sensitivity work (continued)

Step Description
8. Use the Pit Visualisation Program to prepare plans and sections of
the pit that you selected in step 7.
Check that:
• The pit is roughly the shape and size that you expected
Are your assumptions about the scale of the project still correct?
• The pit contains no unexpected “craters” due to bad values in the
Model File
You may have to fix the Model File in your GMP and start again.
• The pit does not hit the side of the model framework
You may have to extend the model either in your GMP or with
the Re-blocking Program.
• The haul roads will fit where you have laid back the slopes to
allow for them
You may have to adjust the slopes and re-create the Structure
File.
If there is anything wrong, make the necessary corrections and
repeat the processing as required.
9. Use the Analysis Program to do more extensive analysis runs to
explore all of the economic and throughput sensitivities of the
project.
If you are using multiple push-backs, use the
Mining Width Program to tidy up the outlines, and make use of
the Milawa Algorithm in the Analysis Program to optimize the
mining schedule.
If the scale of the operation is radically different from what you had
expected, re-calculate the costs and go back to step 6.
10. If you want to explore the sensitivity of the project in relation to the
pit slopes, go back to step 5.
11. Consider using a cut-off grade optimizer to see if the project can
benefit from varying the cut-offs with time.

Continued on next page

31
Part 2: The Programs
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Stage two: design

work
Step Description
1. If the model that you exported from your GMP is too big for design
work, use the Re-blocking Program to re-block it.
2. Use the Structure Arcs Program to pre-calculate the slopes and to
prepare the corresponding Structure Arcs File.
3. Use the Optimization Program to do the optimization. Depending
on the computer you are using, this may take some time.
4. If you are using multiple push-backs, use the
Mining Width Program to tidy up the outlines.
5. Use the Analysis Program and repeat the final analysis runs on this
larger Results File to check that there are no significant changes.
6. Import the pit outline into your GMP and undertake the detailed
design using the outline as a guide.
7. Compare the ore and waste tonnages of the outline with the detailed
design.
If they differ by more than 2-3% and this is not due to deliberate
deviations from the outline, you probably did not lay the slopes back
correctly. If this is the case, adjust them and go back to step 2.

Note: It will be easier to keep track of the files created by the programs if you
are very systematic in your use of filenames, and if you keep notes on what you
do. Refer to page 28 for guidelines on the naming of files.
Note also: You will require several versions of the Parameters File, which can
be prepared with the Edit Parameters Program. To simplify the explanation
above, they are not discussed here. For information about Parameters Files, see
page 178.

Acknowledgement The clip art included in this part of the Manual is provided by permission of
CorelDraw Corporation, © 1996. All rights reserved.

32
Part 2: The Programs
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 1: Edit Parameters Program (FXED)

Overview

Purpose The Edit Parameters Program allows you to:

• Create a Parameters File
• Edit an existing Parameters File
• Check the validity of the whole Parameters File
This check is identical to that done when any of the other programs reads a
Parameters File.

Files Files used Files created

• Parameters File • Modified Parameters File

Input Program Output

Edit Parameters
Modified
Parameters
File (.par) FXED Parameters
File (.par)

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Using the Edit Parameters Program 34
Menu System 34
Using the Program 36
Section B: The Menus 37
Menu Structure 37
Main Menu 38
Main Edit Menu Options 39
Section C: Further Information 44

33
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Using the Edit Parameters Program

Menu System

Edit Parameters The Edit Parameters Program uses a series of Menus.

Program Menu
system These follow the structure of the data in the Parameters File.

Example Menu This is an example of the type of Menu that you will be using in the Edit
Parameters Program.

Whittle Four-X EDIT PARAMETERS

The <Menu Name>

-
¬
O. <Option 1>
P. <oPtion 2>
®
. <opTion 3>
. <optIon 4>
N. <OptioN 5> . . .

¯ X. eXit

° Your choice [X]:

The items in the example Menu are discussed in the table below.

Item Description
¬ This line identifies the program as the Edit Parameters Program.
- This line identifies title of the Menu.
® These lines specify the options available in this Menu.
¯ This line identifies the eXit option.
This option always gets you out of the Menu back to a higher level,
except in “The Main Menu”, where it terminates the program.
° There is a prompt for you to type in your choice from the options,
above. The default choice is always [X], the exit option.

Continued on next page

34
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Menu System, Continued

Selecting an option In the Edit Parameters Menu system, some of the options have a single letter to
the left of them. This means that those options are currently available.
To select an option, type the letter to the left of the option and then press the
Enter key (↵).
For example, in the example Menu above, if you typed the letter “O”, you
would select <Option 1>.
Note:
• You can use either upper or lower case letters.
• The letter to the left of the option is always capitalised in the option itself.
If an option does not have a letter to the left of it, it means that the option is not
currently available, and you cannot choose it.
Most options cause the program to prompt you for more information.
Where the option is followed by an ellipsis (. . .), as in <optioN 5> above, this
indicates that the option leads to another Menu, possibly after prompting you
for some information.
The Menus are described in detail in Section B: The Menus, on page 37.

35
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Program

Starting the Start the Edit Parameters Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Edit Parameters Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXED and then press the Enter key (↵)

You will see the following screen.

Whittle Four-X EDIT PARAMETERS

Multi-element Rev 1.10
Licensed for use by -Your Company name will appear here-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Press "Enter" to continue...

(Depending on the version, the second line may read “Single element”.)

Press the Enter key (↵) and the Edit Parameters Main Menu will be displayed.
From this Menu, you can:
• Open an old file for editing
• Create a new file
• Change to a new file name
• Validate the data
• Save the data
For more information, see page 38 .

Operation The normal sequence of operation is as follows.

Stage Description
1. • Open the Parameters File you want to change
• Create a new Parameters File
If you are creating a new file, the Edit Parameters Program asks
you if you want to use an existing file as a starting point.
2. Edit the data in the file
3. Validate the data, and correct it by further editing if necessary
4. Save the data
5. Exit the program

36
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
 Section B: The Menus

Menu Structure

Menu structure The diagram below shows the Edit Parameters Program Menu structure.

Main Menu - see page 38.

Use this Menu to open an old Parameters File, create a new Parameters File, change to a new
file name, access the Main Edit Menu, validate the data, save the data, exit the program.
Main Edit Menu - see page 39.
Use this Menu to edit the data in a Parameters File.
Header Comment Edit Menu - see page 40.
Use this Menu to edit the comment lines at the start of the Parameters File.
Dimension Edit Menu - see page 40.
Use this Menu to edit the dimensions of a block, model framework size, co-ordinates of
the framework origin.
Global Value Edit Menu - see page 40.
Use this Menu to edit the active blocks indicator, restart interval, air flags, reference
mining cost, mining dilution and recovery factors, general default block tonnage.
Formats Edit Menu - see page 41.
Use this Menu to edit the number of decimal places, currency symbol.
Control Flags Edit Menu - see page 40.
Use this Menu to edit the air flags, positional mining factor flag, positional
processing factor flag, print unprocessed mineralisation flag.
The Revenue Factor Edit Menu - see page 41.
Use this Menu to add, delete or edit a value/range.
Sub-region Select Menu - see page 41.
Sub-region Edit Menu - see page 41.
Use this Menu to add, delete or edit a sub-region.
Bearings and Slopes Edit Menu - see page 41.
Use this Menu to edit the bearings and slopes for a sub-region.
Element Edit Menu - see page 42.
Use this Menu to add, delete or edit an element.
Expression Edit Menu - see page 42.
Use this Menu to add, delete or edit a user defined expression.
Rock-type Edit Menu - see page 42.
Use this Menu to add, delete or edit a rock-type.
Processing-Method/Rock-type Select Menu - see page 43.
Processing-Method/Rock-type Edit Menu - see page 43.
Use this Menu to add, delete or edit a processing-method/rock-type combination.
Processing Method Group Menu - see page 43.
Use this Menu to add, delete or edit a processing method group.
Trailer Comment Edit Menu - see page 43.
Use this Menu to edit the comments at the end of the Parameters File.

37
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Main Menu

Introduction This topic discusses the various options available from the Edit Parameters
Program Main Menu.

Main Menu options The Main Menu looks like this.

Whittle Four-X EDIT PARAMETERS

The Main Menu

O. Open an old file for editing

C. Create a new file
. cHange to a new file name

. Edit the data . . .

. Validate the data

. Save the data

X. eXit the program

Your choice [X] : _

The options available from the Main Menu are discussed below.

Option Select this option if you want to…

Open an old file Open an existing Parameters File so that you can edit
for editing
it.
Create a new file Create a new Parameters File.
The new Parameters File can be based on an existing
Parameters File or can be created from scratch.
Change to a new Change the name of the Parameters File you are
file name
working on, so as to be able to save it as a different
file.
Edit the data… Edit or add data to a Parameters File.
The “edit the data” option leads to the Main Edit
Menu, discussed on page 39.
Validate the data Check the Parameters File as a whole.
Save the data Save any changes that you have made to a Parameters
File.
Exit the program Exit the Edit Parameters Program and go back to the
Four-X Menu or the Command Line prompt.

38
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Main Edit Menu Options

Main Edit Menu If you choose the “Edit the data” option from the Main Menu, the Edit
Parameters Program will display the Main Edit Menu. It looks like this.

Whittle Four-X EDIT PARAMETERS

The Main Edit Menu
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Current Parameters File: fxtut.par |
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+

H. edit the Header comments . . .

D. edit the Dimensions . . .

G. edit the Global values . . .
S. edit the Sub-regions . . .
E. edit the Elements . . .
F. edit the expression Formulae . . .
R. edit the Rock types . . .
P. edit the Processing-method/rock-type combinations . . .
M. edit the processing Method groups . . .

T. edit the Trailer comments . . .

X. eXit to the main menu

Your choice [X] : _

Main Edit Menu The table below sets out the Main Edit Menu options.
options
Option leads to … See page
edit Header comments… Header Comment Edit Menu 40
edit the Dimensions… Dimensions Edit Menu 40
edit the Global values… Global Values Edit Menu 40
edit the Sub-regions… Sub-region Select Menu 41
edit the Elements… Element Edit Menu 42
edit the expression Expression Edit Menu 42
Formulae…
edit the Rock-types… Rock-type Edit Menu 42
edit the Processing-Method/Rock-type 43
Processing-method/
rock-type combinations… Combination Select Menu
edit the processing Processing Method Group Menu 43
Method groups…
edit the Trailer Trailer Comment Edit Menu 43
comments…
exit to the main menu… Main Menu 38

Continued on next page

39
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Main Edit Menu Options, Continued

Header Comment In this Menu you can add, delete or edit comment lines at the start of the
Edit Menu Parameters File.
Note: The Edit Parameters Program does not support comments embedded in
the Parameters File. If it finds such comments in an input file, it moves them to
the end.
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.
When comment lines are typed into the Edit Parameters Program, all leading
and multiple spaces are usually removed. If you need leading or multiple
spaces in a comment, use the tilde character (~) in place of the required spaces.
The tildes will be changed to spaces.

Dimensions Edit In this Menu you can edit:

Menu
• The dimensions of a block
• The model framework size
• The co-ordinates of the framework origin.

Global Values Edit In this Menu you can edit:

Menu
• The formats via the Formats Edit Menu (see below)
• The Active Blocks Indicator
• The Restart Interval
• The Reference Mining Cost
• The Mining Dilution and Recovery Factors
• The General Default Block Tonnage
• The Ore Selection Mode, either by cut-off or by value
• The Air Flags via the Control Flags Edit Menu (see below)
• The Revenue Factors via the Revenue Factor Range Edit Menu (see
below)
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.

Continued on next page

40
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Main Edit Menu Options, Continued

Global Values Edit Menu (continued)

The Formats Edit Menu

The Formats Edit Menu allows you to determine:
• The numbers of decimal places to use when displaying various items
• The currency symbol

The Control Flags Edit Menu

The Control Flags Edit Menu allows you to edit:
• Air flag A
• Air flag B
• The positional mining factor flag
• The positional processing factor flag
• The print unprocessed mineralisation flag

The Revenue Factor Range Edit Menu

The Revenue Factor Range Edit Menu allows you to add, delete or edit a
Revenue Factor value or range.

Sub-region Select In this Menu you can:

Menu
• Add a sub-region via the Sub-region Edit Menu (see below)
• Delete a sub-region
• Edit:
- A sub-region via the Sub-region Edit Menu (see below)
- Bearings and slopes via the Bearings and Slopes Edit Menu, reached
through the Sub-region Edit Menu
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.

Continued on next page

41
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Main Edit Menu Options, Continued

Sub-region Select Menu (continued)

The Sub-region Edit Menu

The Sub-region Edit Menu allows you to edit:
• The sub-region limits
• The number of benches for arc generation, and/or,
• The bearings and slopes via the Bearings and Slopes Edit Menu (see
below)

The Bearings and Slopes Edit Menu

The Bearings and Slopes Edit Menu, reached through the Sub-region Edit
Menu, allows you to:
• Add a bearing and slope
• Delete a bearing and slope
• Edit the slope for an existing bearing

Element Edit Menu In this Menu you can:

• Add an element and its associated values (via a series of prompts)
• Delete an element
• Edit an element (via a series of prompts)
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.

Expression Edit In this Menu you can:

Menu
• Add an expression (via a series of prompts)
• Delete an expression
• Edit an expression (via a series of prompts)
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.

Rock-type Edit In this Menu you can:

Menu
• Add a rock-type and its associated values (via a series of prompts)
• Delete a rock-type
• Edit a rock-type (via a series of prompts)
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.

Continued on next page

42
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
Main Edit Menu Options, Continued

Processing-Method In this Menu you can:

/Rock-type
Combination Select • Add a processing-method/rock-type combination via the
Menu Processing-Method/Rock-type Combination Edit Menu (see below)
• Delete a processing-method/rock-type combination
• Edit a processing-method/rock-type and its associated values via the
Processing-Method/Rock-type Combination Edit Menu (see below)
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.

Processing-Method/Rock-type Combination Edit Menu

The Processing-Method/Rock-type Combination Edit Menu allows you to:
• Edit:
- The processing method/type
- The processing cost
- An element
• Add a processing method/rock-type combination
• Delete a processing method/rock-type combination

Processing Method In this Menu you can add, delete or edit a processing method group.
Group Menu
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.

Trailer Comment In this Menu you can add, delete or edit comment lines at the end of the
Edit Menu Parameters File.
Note: The Edit Parameters Program does not support comments embedded in
the file, although they are allowed by the other programs. If it finds such
comments in an input file, it moves them to the end.
It also allows you to scroll the display if there is too much data to be displayed
on the screen at the one time.
When comment lines are typed into the Edit Parameters Program, all leading
and multiple spaces are usually removed. If you need leading or multiple
spaces in a comment, use the tilde character (~) in place of the required spaces.
The tildes will be changed to spaces.

43
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
Parameters File information 178
Using the Four-X package 15

44
Part 2: Edit Parameters Program
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 2: Re-blocking Program (FXRE)

Overview

Purpose The Re-blocking Program allows you to modify Model and Results Files to
create a new Model File, Results File or Pit List File.

Terminology Model
In relation to the Re-blocking Program, “model” denotes a rectangular
co-ordinate framework containing a collection of blocks.
A model is defined by a Parameters File together with a Model File, a Results
File or a Pit List File.
Framework
The framework is the space into which block values are loaded and one or more
files can be loaded into it in any position.
Primary model
The first model to be read into the Re-blocking Program is called the “primary”
model.
Primary model framework
The primary model framework is based on the primary model and is the
framework into which other models will be read if the framework has not been
defined.
Position of the model
The position of the model within the framework is defined by the offset of the
model origin from the framework origin. When the two origins coincide, the
offset is zero.

Continued on next page

45
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Terminology (continued)

Secondary models
Any subsequent models that are read into the Re-blocking Program are merely
“pasted” over this initial arrangement. These models are referred to as
“secondary” models.
The term primary model is used for the first model, even when there are no
secondary models.
If a block is already occupied when a secondary model is loaded, then the
secondary model block replaces the previous block. This secondary model
block can, in turn, be replaced by a subsequent secondary model block in the
same position.
Note: The exception to overwriting occurs when Four-D model files are
merged into one multi-element Four-X model file. See Merging Elements from
Different Four-D Model Files on page 399.

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: What the Re-blocking Program Does 47
Modes of Operation 47
Options 49
Section B: Using the Re-blocking Program 53
Overview 53
Mode 1: 54
Mode 2: 59
Mode 3: 66
Mode 4: 72
Mode 5: 76
What Happens (All Modes) 81
Section C: Further Information 82

46
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
 Section A: What the Re-blocking Program Does

Modes of Operation

Introduction The Re-blocking Program has five different modes of operation. They are as
follows.

Mode The Re-blocking Program reads one or then creates…

more Parameters File and…
1 One or more Model Files A new Model File
(normal/default
case)
2 One or more Results Files A new Results File
3 A single Results File A Model File
4 A single Results File A Pit List File
5 A Model File and one or more Pit List Files A Results File

Input Program Output

Re-blocking
Print File
(. prr)
Parameters
File(s) (.par) New
Parameters

And... FXRE File( . par)

And...
Model
Modes 1 and 5 File(s)
Model File Modes 1 and 3
(.mod)
( .mod)

Modes 2, 3 New Modes 2 and 5

Results
and 4 File(s) ( .res) Results File
( .res)

Mode 4
Pit List Pit List
Mode 5 File(s)( .pil) File ( .pil)

Polygon
File (.pol)

Continued on next page

47
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Modes of Operation, Continued

What the What the Re-blocking Program can do differs depending on the mode being
Re-blocking used. The table below provides a list of the different options available in each
Program can do of the modes.

Available options

Merge element ü
data
Change model ü ü ü ü ü
framework size
Load models from ü ü ü ü ü
the input file(s)
into the framework
in any position(s)
Mine out/strip off ü ü ü
pits
Combine blocks ü ü
Split blocks ü ü ü ü ü
Calculate CAFs ü ü ü ü
Trim output with ü ü ü ü ü
polygon
Write new ü ü ü ü ü
Parameters File

Note:
• You can only mine out, or trim off pits when a Results File is input.
• Only blocks without pit numbers can be combined.
• CAFs can only be stored in Model and Results Files.
• Only Model Files are optimized, and so require all blocks to be present if a
mining CAF is included.

48
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Options

Merging element This option allows you to merge Model Files with different element orders and
data different element names.
Applicable to When merging models, if two blocks have the same co-ordinates, but the
mode 1 where models contain different element information, the elements are merged,
more than one otherwise the second overrides the first.
Model File used
In other words, all of the different elements from the different models will
appear in the new model.
Note:
• The total number of elements cannot exceed the system limit. For
information about how to check the system limits, see Chapter 8: Utilities
Program (FXUT), Section D: Showing Four-X System Limits, on page 171.
• As each Parameters File stipulates the order of the element data, if there are
different numbers of elements, then a new Parameters File must be output by
the Re-blocking Program to update the names and location information.
The merge facility may be particularly useful where, for example, your GMP
has the facility for outputting Four-D Model Files but not Four-X Model Files.
See page 399 for more information about how to do this.

Changing the size Extension and truncation

and/or position of
the model The Re-blocking Program allows you to extend and truncate the framework
relative to the primary model framework.
All modes
Truncation
With truncation, blocks are removed and sub-regions are reduced in size or
even deleted.
Extension
On the other hand, with extension, the Re-blocking Program does the
following:
• First, the sub-regions are extended as required. The new blocks are assigned
the default block tonnage of the sub-region that they are now in, and any
upwards extension is filled with air blocks.
• After the blocks of the primary Model or Results File have been loaded into
the primary model framework, any block on the side or bottom of that
framework is replicated into the nearest blocks in any adjacent extension.
Any element content of these replicated blocks is removed but the rock-type
and the tonnage of the parcels is retained. One effect of this replication is to
extend any topographic surface horizontally outwards to the limits of the
input model framework.

Continued on next page

49
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Options, Continued

Changing the size and/or position of the model (continued)

The diagram below shows, in section, a primary model framework that has been
extended both sideways and vertically.

Original Model Limits

New
framework
Air extensions limits

Surface

Offset from original framework Sub-region boundaries

Continued on next page

50
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Options, Continued

Combining and/or Combining blocks

splitting blocks
When blocks are combined, the resultant block is given a tonnage equal to the
sum of the tonnages of the component blocks.
If the number of parcels of any rock-type is greater than the limit you have
specified when running the program, the pair of parcels with the element grades
having the smallest sum of squares of grade differences is combined into one
parcel, by summing the tonnage and element contents.
If necessary, this combining process is repeated until the number of parcels of
each rock-type complies with your limit.
A reasonable limit to set for the number of parcels for a particular rock-type is
discussed in Restricting the Number of Parcels in a Block, on page 312.
When blocks are combined along a particular direction, it may be that the
combining factor does not divide evenly into the number of blocks along the
corresponding axis of the framework. In this case, the framework is (further)
extended until it does divide evenly. The rules for extension are just the same
as those described in Changing the size and/or position of the model, on page
49. This extension is, in fact, carried out at the same time.
Note: The framework is not affected by splitting factors.

Splitting blocks
When blocks are split, the tonnage and element content is shared equally
between the output blocks. The number of parcels in each output block is the
same as in the original block.
The usual reason for splitting blocks is to improve the slope modelling when
blocks are wide, in relation to the depth of the pit. The Optimization Program†
can only mine whole blocks, so that wide blocks sometimes make it difficult to
model the slopes accurately.

Writing out blocks

When the Re-blocking Program writes out a new file, it writes out every block
that contains one or more blocks read from an input file, plus any extension air
blocks.
Where a new block is incomplete, it uses the appropriate default block tonnage
to fill in the gaps.

Continued on next page

† The Optimization Program utilises the Lerchs-Grossmann algorithm which can only mine whole blocks.

51
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Options, Continued

Combining and/or splitting blocks (continued)

Example
If you are re-blocking by a factor of 2 in all three directions, and it finds an
output block into which only 5 sub-blocks have been read rather than 8, it adds
three times the default block tonnage for that sub-region.
If the output block straddles two sub-regions, the appropriate default block
tonnages are used for each sub-block.

Example When the Re-blocking Program asks you for the combining/splitting factor for
combining/splitting a particular direction, you can answer with an integer, for example 3. In this
factors case, the blocks are combined by that factor in that direction.
Alternatively you can answer with a fraction such as “1/2”. In this case the
blocks are split by that factor. Note that an integer fraction must be used. The
value 0.5 cannot be used in place of the fraction “1/2”.
It is even possible to answer with, say, “3/2”. In this case the blocks are
combined in threes and then split in two.

Using more than Note:

one input Results,
Model or Pit List • In modes 1 and 2, if a block is positioned in the same place as a block read
File from a previous file, then the new block information replaces whatever was
there before. This will not occur in mode 1 if the merge option is selected.
Modes 1, 2 and 5
• Similarly, in mode 5 where pit numbers from the Pit List File(s) are attached
to the blocks in the framework, if there is more than one Pit List File and
more than one pit number is read for a particular block, then the last pit
number read is the one that is retained.
• Where there is more than one input model, the dimensions of a block must be
the same in each model.
• Blocks should not be repeated within a particular file. If they are, the
program detects the fact, warns you, and rejects the second version.

• When reading multiple files into different positions, it may be helpful to draw
a sketch with the block positions of each of the model frameworks on it
before you run the Re-blocking Program. You can also add a dummy waste
block with a recognisable tonnage (e.g. 10001, 10002) to each file in block
position 1,1,1, and then check that the special blocks are correctly placed in
the output file.

52
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Using the Re-blocking Program

Overview

In this section The Re-blocking Program requests a substantial amount of information which
differs according to the mode being used. As a result we have provided
separate procedures for each of the five modes.
However, as a general guide, the following information is requested by the
program:
1. Preliminary information:
• Print file name
• Mode number
• Number of input Model, Results or Pit List Files you want to use
(modes 1, 2 and 5)
• Whether you want to merge element data during input (mode 1)
• Input Parameters File name
2. Whether you want to change the size and/or position of the model
3. Whether you want to mine out or strip off any pits (modes 2, 3 and 4)
4. Whether you want to split and/or combine blocks
5. The maximum number of parcels of each rock-type to be output for a block
(modes 1, 2, 3 and 5)
6. Whether you want to calculate mining and/or processing CAFs
(modes 1, 2, 3 and 5)
7. Other information:
• Whether you want to limit the output with a polygon
• The name of the new file
• Whether you want the program to create a new Parameters File

53
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 1: Manipulating Model Files

Starting the Start the Re-blocking Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Re-blocking Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXRE and press the Enter key (↵)

Entering The program will now ask for certain information. Follow the steps in the table
preliminary below.
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Press Enter to accept the default mode [1]
3. Type in the number of Model Files that you want to use (up to
10), or press Enter to select the default [1]†
4. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you are using… then…
One Model File Continue with step 5
More than one Model Type: Y to merge element data, or press
File Enter to accept the default [N]
Continue with step 5

5. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
6. Continue with the procedure titled Changing the size and/or
position of the model, on page 55

Continued on next page

† Note: If more than one Model File is to be used, then the primary Parameters File must have an active
blocks indicator of 1. That is, the sub-region(s) must fill the primary model framework space, otherwise
there may be no default block tonnage available where the program needs it.

54
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 1: Manipulating Model Files, Continued

Changing the size You will be asked if you want to change the size or position of the model
and/or position of during input.
the model
To keep the existing size and position of the model, follow the steps in the
table below.

Step Action
1. Press Enter to accept the default [N]
2. Type in the name of the primary input Model File and press Enter
3. Continue with the procedure titled Combining and/or splitting
blocks, on page 56

To change the size or position of the model, follow the steps in the table
below.

Step Action
1. Type: Y↵
2. Framework size: type in the desired X, Y and Z co-ordinates at
the prompts to change the framework size, or press Enter to
accept the default co-ordinates
3. Type in the name of the primary input Model File and press Enter
4. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z
co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position, or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
5. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you are using… then…
One Model File Continue with the procedure titled
Combining and/or splitting blocks, on
page 56
More than one Model Continue with step 6
File

6. Type in the name of the secondary input Parameters File and

press Enter
7. Type in the name of the secondary input Model File and press
Enter

Continued on next page

55
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 1: Manipulating Model Files, Continued

Changing the size and/or position of the model (continued)

Step Action
8. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z
co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position, or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
The program will repeat steps 6-8 until you have entered all of the
information according to the number of files that you have elected
to use
9. Continue with the procedure Combining and/or splitting blocks
below

Combining and/or Follow the steps below.

splitting blocks
Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to combine Type: Y↵
and/or split the
Type in the X, Y and Z combining/splitting
blocks
factors at the prompts, or press Enter to
accept the default combining/ splitting
factor of [1/1] (i.e. the blocks will not be
combined/split in that direction)
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
combine and/or split
the blocks

2. Continue with the procedure titled Maximum number of parcels

below

Maximum number Follow the steps below.

of parcels
Step Action
1. Type in the desired maximum number of parcels of each
rock-type to be output for a block or press Enter to accept the
default value
2. Continue with the procedure titled Calculating CAFs below

Continued on next page

56
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 1: Manipulating Model Files, Continued

Calculating CAFs Follow the steps below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
mining CAFs
Type in the adjustment formula†
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the mining
CAFs

2. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
processing CAFs †
Type in the adjustment formula
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the
processing CAFs

3. Continue with the procedure titled Other information below

Other information Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to limit the output Type in the name of the Polygon File
with a polygon that you want to use and press Enter
Do not want to limit the Press Enter to accept the default [N]
with a polygon

2. Type in the name of the new Model File and press Enter

Continued on next page

† See Chapter 3: Using Expressions starting on page 282 for more information about expressions.

57
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 1: Manipulating Model Files, Continued

Other information (continued)

Step Action
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to write a new Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
Parameters File Type in a name for the new Parameters
File and press Enter
Do not want to write a Type: N↵
new Parameters File
Note: If you have selected to merge Model Files and there are
different numbers of elements, then a new Parameters File must
be written to update the names and location information.
4. Refer to What Happens (All Modes), on page 81

58
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files

Starting the Start the Re-blocking Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Re-blocking Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXRE and press the Enter key (↵)

Entering The program will now ask for certain information. Follow the steps in the table
preliminary below.
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file press Enter
2. Type 2↵ to select mode 2
3. Type in the number of files that you want to use (up 10 Results
Files) or press Enter to select the default [1]†
4. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
5. Continue with the procedure titled Changing the size and/or
position of the model below

Continued on next page

† Note: If more than one Results File is to be used, then the primary Parameters File must have an active
blocks indicator of 1. That is, the sub-region(s) must fill the primary model framework space, otherwise
there may be no default block tonnage available where the program needs it.

59
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files, Continued

Changing the size You will be asked if you want to change the size or position of the model
and/or position of during input.
the model
To keep the existing size and position of the model, follow the steps in the
table below.

Step Action
1. Press Enter to accept the default [N]
2. Type in the name of the primary input Results File and press
Enter
3. Mining out pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to mine out Type: Y↵
pits
Type in the number of the pit that you
want to mine out and press Enter
Do not want to mine Press Enter to accept the default [N]
out pits

4. Stripping off pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to strip off any of the Type: Y↵
outer pits
Type in the number of the biggest
pit you want to keep and press
Enter
Do not want to strip off any Press Enter to accept the default
of the outer pits [N]

5. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you are using… then…
One Results File Continue with the procedure titled
Splitting blocks, on page 63
More than one Results Continue with step 6
File

6. Type in the name of the secondary input Parameters File and

press Enter

Continued on next page

60
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files, Continued

Changing the size and/or position of the model (continued)

Step Action
7. Type in the name of the secondary input Results File and press
Enter
8. You will now be asked if you want to mine out or strip off any
pits. Follow steps 3 and 4, above, then continue with the
procedure titled Splitting blocks, on page 63

To change the size or position of the model, follow the steps in the table
below.

Step Action
1. Type: Y↵
2. Framework size: type in the desired X, Y and Z co-ordinates at
the prompts to change the framework size, or press Enter to
accept the default co-ordinates
3. Type in the name of the primary input Results File and press
Enter
4. Mining out pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to mine out Type: Y↵
pits
Type in the number of the pit that you want
to mine out and press Enter
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
mine out pits

5. Stripping off pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to strip off any of the Type: Y↵
outer pits
Type in the number of the biggest pit
you want to keep and press Enter
Do not want to strip off Press Enter to accept the default [N]
any of the outer pits

Continued on next page

61
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files, Continued

Changing the size and/or position of the model (continued)

Step Action
6. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z
co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
7. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you are using… then…
One Results File Continue with the procedure titled
Splitting blocks, on page 63
More than one Results Continue with step 8
File

8. Type in the name of the secondary input Parameters File and

press Enter
9. Type in the name of the secondary input Results File and press
Enter
10. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z
co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position, or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
The program will repeat steps 8-10 until you have entered all of
the information according to the number of files that you have
elected to use
11. Continue with the procedure Splitting blocks below

Continued on next page

62
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files, Continued

Splitting blocks Follow the steps below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to split Type Y↵
the blocks
Type in the desired X, Y and Z splitting factors
at the prompts, or press Enter to accept the
default splitting factor [1/1] (i.e. the blocks will
not be split in that direction)
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
split the blocks

2. Continue with the procedure titled Maximum number of parcels

below

Maximum number Follow the steps below.

of parcels
Step Action
1. Type in the desired maximum number of parcels of each
rock-type to be output for a block, or press Enter to accept the
default value
2. Continue with the procedure titled Calculating CAFs below

Continued on next page

63
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files, Continued

Calculating CAFs Follow the steps below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
mining CAFs
Type in the adjustment formula†
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the mining
CAFs

2. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
processing CAFs †
Type in the adjustment formula
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the
processing CAFs

3. Continue with the procedure titled Other information below

Continued on next page

† See Chapter 3: Using Expressions starting on page 282 for more information about expressions.

64
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 2: Manipulating Results Files, Continued

Other information Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to limit the output Type in the name of the Polygon File
with a polygon that you want to use and press Enter
Do not want to limit the Press Enter to accept the default [N]
output with a polygon

2. Type in the name of the new Results File and press Enter
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to write a new Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
Parameters File Type in a name for the new Parameters
File and press Enter
Do not want to write a Type: N↵
new Parameters File

4. Refer to What Happens (All Modes), on page 81

65
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 3: Converting a Results File to a Model File

Starting the Start the Re-blocking Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Re-blocking Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXRE and press the Enter key (↵)

Entering The program will now ask for certain information. Follow the steps below.
preliminary
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file press Enter
2. Type: 3↵ to select mode 3
3. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
4. Continue with the procedure titled Changing the size and/or
position of the model below

Continued on next page

66
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 3: Converting a Results File to a Model File, Continued

Changing the size You will be asked if you want to change the size or position of the model
and/or position of during input.
the model
To keep the existing size and position of the model, follow the steps in the
table below.

Step Action
1. Press Enter to accept the default [N]
2. Type in the name of the primary input Results File and press
Enter
3. Mining out pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to mine out Type: Y↵
pits
Type in the number of the pit that you
want to mine out and press Enter
Do not want to mine Press Enter to accept the default [N]
out pits

4. Stripping off pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to strip off any of the Type: Y↵
outer pits
Type in the number of the biggest
pit you want to keep and press
Enter
Do not want to strip off any Press Enter to accept the default
of the outer pits [N]

5. Continue with the procedure titled Combining and/or splitting

blocks, on page 69

Continued on next page

67
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 3: Converting a Results File to a Model File, Continued

Changing the size and/or position of the model (continued)

To change the size or position of the model, follow the steps in the table
below.

Step Action
1. Type: Y↵
2. Framework size: type in the desired X, Y and Z co-ordinates at
the prompts, or press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
3. Type in the name of the primary input Results File and press
Enter
4. Mining out pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to mine out Type: Y↵
pits
Type in the number of the pit that you
want to mine out and press Enter
Do not want to mine Press Enter to accept the default [N]
out pits

5. Stripping off pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to strip off any of the Type: Y↵
outer pits
Type in the number of the biggest
pit you want to keep and press
Enter
Do not want to strip off any Press Enter to accept the default
of the outer pits [N]

6. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z

co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position, or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
7. Continue with the procedure Combining and/or splitting blocks
below

Continued on next page

68
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 3: Converting a Results File to a Model File, Continued

Combining and/or Follow the steps in the table below.

splitting blocks
Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to combine Type: Y↵
and/or split the
Type in the X, Y and Z combining/splitting
blocks
factors at the prompts or press Enter to
accept the default combining/ splitting factor
of [1/1] (i.e. the blocks will not be
combined/split in that direction)
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
combine and/or
split the blocks

2. Continue with the procedure titled entering Maximum number of

parcels below

Maximum number Follow the steps below.

of parcels
Step Action
1. Type in the desired maximum number of parcels of each
rock-type to be output for a block, or press Enter to accept the
default value
2. Continue with the procedure titled Calculating CAFs below

Continued on next page

69
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 3: Converting a Results File to a Model File, Continued

Calculating CAFs Follow the steps below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
mining CAFs
Type in the adjustment formula†
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the mining
CAFs

2. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
processing CAFs †
Type in the adjustment formula
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the
processing CAFs

3. Continue with the procedure titled Other information below

Continued on next page

† See Chapter 3: Using Expressions starting on page 282 for more information about expressions.

70
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 3: Converting a Results File to a Model File, Continued

Other information Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to limit the output Type in the name of the Polygon File
with a polygon that you want to use and press Enter
Do not want to limit the Press Enter to accept the default [N]
with a polygon

2. Type in the name of the new Model File and press Enter
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to write a new Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
Parameters File Type in a name for the new Parameters
File and press Enter
Do not want to write a Type: N↵
new Parameters File

4. Refer to What Happens (All Modes), on page 81

71
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 4: Converting a Results File to a Pit List File

Starting the Start the Re-blocking Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Re-blocking Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXRE and press the Enter key (↵)

Entering The program will now ask for certain information. Follow the steps in the table
preliminary below.
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Type: 4↵ to select mode 4
3. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
4. Continue with the procedure titled Changing the size and/or
position of the model below

Continued on next page

72
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 4: Converting a Results File to a Pit List File, Continued

Changing the size You will be asked if you want to change the size or position of the model
and/or position of during input.
the model
To keep the existing size and position of the model, follow the steps in the
table below.

Step Action
1. Press Enter to accept the default [N]
2. Type in the name of the primary input Results File and press
Enter
3. Mining out pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to mine out Type: Y↵
pits
Type in the number of the pit that you
want to mine out and press Enter
Do not want to mine Press Enter to accept the default [N]
out pits

4. Stripping off pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to strip off any of the Type: Y↵
outer pits
Type in the number of the biggest
pit you want to keep and press
Enter
Do not want to strip off any Press Enter to accept the default
of the outer pits [N]

5. Continue with the procedure titled Splitting blocks, on page 75

Continued on next page

73
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 4: Converting a Results File to a Pit List File, Continued

Changing the size and/or position of the model (continued)

To change the size or position of the model, follow the steps in the table
below.

Step Action
1. Type: Y↵
2. Framework size: type in the desired X, Y and Z co-ordinates at
the prompts or press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
3. Type in the name of the primary input Results File and press
Enter
4. Mining out pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to mine out Type: Y↵
pits
Type in the number of the pit that you
want to mine out and press Enter
Do not want to mine Press Enter to accept the default [N]
out pits

5. Stripping off pits: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to strip off any of the Type: Y↵
outer pits
Type in the number of the biggest
pit you want to keep and press
Enter
Do not want to strip off any Press Enter to accept the default
of the outer pits [N]

6. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z

co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position, or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
7. Continue with the procedure titled Splitting blocks below

Continued on next page

74
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 4: Converting a Results File to a Pit List File, Continued

Splitting blocks Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to split Type Y↵
the blocks
Type in the desired X, Y and Z splitting factors
at the prompts, or press Enter to accept the
default splitting factor [1/1] (i.e. the blocks will
not be split in that direction)
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
split the blocks

2. Continue with the procedure titled Other information below

Other information Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to limit the output Type in the name of the Polygon File
with a polygon that you want to use and press Enter
Do not want to limit the Press Enter to accept the default [N]
output with a polygon

2. Type in the name of the new Pit List File and press Enter
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to write a new Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
Parameters File Type in a name for the new Parameters
File and press Enter
Do not want to write a Type: N↵
new Parameters File

4. Refer to What Happens (All Modes), on page 81

75
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 5: Converting a Model File and One or More Pit List Files to
a Results File

Starting the Start the Re-blocking Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Re-blocking Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXRE and press the Enter key (↵)

Entering The program will now ask for certain information. Follow the steps in the table
preliminary below.
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Type: 5↵ to select mode 5
3. Type in the number of Pit List Files that you want to use
(up to 9), or press Enter to select the default [1]
4. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
5. Continue with the procedure titled Changing the size and/or
position of the model below

Changing the size You will be asked if you want to change the size or position of the model
and/or position of during input.
the model
To keep the existing size and position of the model, follow the steps in the
table below.

Step Action
1. Press Enter to accept the default [N]
2. Type in the name of the primary input and press Enter
3. Continue with the procedure titled Splitting blocks, on page 78

Continued on next page

76
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 5: Converting a Model File and One or More Pit List Files to
a Results File, Continued

Changing the size and/or position of the model (continued)

To change the size or position of the model, follow the steps in the table
below.

Step Action
1. Type: Y↵
2. Framework size: type in the desired X, Y and Z co-ordinates at
the prompts to change the framework size, or press Enter to
accept the default co-ordinates
3. Type in the name of the primary input Model File and press Enter
4. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z
co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position, or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
5. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you are using… then…
One Pit List File Continue with the procedure titled
Splitting blocks, on page 78
More than one Pit List Continue with step 6
File

6. Type in the name of the secondary input Parameters File and

press Enter
7. Type in the name of the secondary input Model File and press
Enter
8. Framework position: type in the desired X, Y and Z
co-ordinates at the prompts to change the framework position, or
press Enter to accept the default co-ordinates
The program will repeat steps 6-8 until you have entered all of the
information according to the number of files that you have elected
to use.
9. Continue with the procedure Splitting blocks below

Continued on next page

77
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 5: Converting a Model File and One or More Pit List Files to
a Results File, Continued

Splitting blocks Follow the steps below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to split Type Y↵
the blocks
Type in the desired X, Y and Z splitting factors
at the prompts, or press Enter to accept the
default splitting factor [1/1] (i.e. the blocks will
not be split in that direction)
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
split the blocks

2. Continue with the procedure titled Maximum number of parcels

below

Maximum number Follow the steps below.

of parcels
Step Action
1. Type in the desired maximum number of parcels of each
rock-type to be output for a block, or press Enter to accept the
default value
2. Continue with the procedure titled Calculating CAFs below

Continued on next page

78
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 5: Converting a Model File and One or More Pit List Files to
a Results File, Continued

Calculating CAFs Follow the steps below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
mining CAFs
Type in the adjustment formula†
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the mining
CAFs

2. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you… then…
Want to calculate the Type: Y↵
processing CAFs †
Type in the adjustment formula
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
calculate the
processing CAFs

3. Continue with the procedure titled Other information below

Continued on next page

† See Chapter 3: Using Expressions starting on page 282 for more information about expressions.

79
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
Mode 5: Converting a Model File and One or More Pit List Files to
a Results File, Continued

Other information Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to limit the output Type in the name of the Polygon File
with a polygon that you want to use and press Enter
Do not want to limit the Press Enter to accept the default [N]
with a polygon

2. Type in the name of the new Results File and press Enter
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to write a new Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
Parameters File Type in a name for the new Parameters
File and press Enter
Do not want to write a Type: N↵
new Parameters File

4. Refer to What Happens (All Modes) on page 81

80
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
What Happens (All Modes)

Process The program will:

• Create a new Parameters File, if you have requested it
• Set up its data structures
• Read in the primary model
• Carry out any block extensions if the model framework has been extended
• Read in any secondary models and store the blocks in the appropriate
positions
- and then -
• Create a new file, carrying out any re-blocking and CAF calculations as it
does so.

81
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
Model Files 214
Parameters File information 178
Pit List Files 235
Polygon Files 237
Print files 24
Results Files 223
Techniques with blocks 307
Using the Four-X package 15

Tutorials and For practice in using the Re-blocking Program and re-blocking techniques,
exercises refer to the following tutorials and exercises in your Getting Started Manual:
• Tutorial 4 - Re-arranging a Model
• Exercise 4 - Adding Positional Mining CAFs
• Tutorial 5 - Dealing with an Obstruction

82
Part 2: Re-blocking Program
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 3: Structure Arcs Program (FXST)

Overview

Purpose The Structure Arcs Program creates a file of “structure arcs” that describes the
required slopes in a form that is suitable for use in a pit optimization.

What are structure Each structure arc defines the mining relationship between two blocks.
arcs?
Taken together, structure arcs define which blocks must be removed to give
access to other blocks.
Visually, structure arcs can be represented by arrows pointing from one block
to another.
Example

Block B Block C Block D

Structure arcs

Block A

In the above example, the structure arc from Block A to Block B indicates that,
if Block A is to be mined, Block B must be mined first to uncover it.

Continued on next page

83
Part 2: Structure Arcs Program
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Operation of the In generating these structure arcs, the Structure Arcs Program takes into
Structure Arcs account the dimensions of the blocks and the required pit slopes.
Program
It has two ways of producing the arcs:
• It can get the slope profiles from the sub-regions in the Parameters File. It
then applies them to the blocks within each sub-region. This means that the
regions that the slope profiles apply to are strictly rectangular.
• It can get the slope profiles from a Slope Profiles File, and a profile number
for each block from either a Model File zone number or a Profile Number
File. With this approach, the regions that the slope profiles apply to can be
any shape at all. You would generally design these shapes in your GMP.
Note that it takes significantly longer to produce the arcs by this method, but
has no effect on optimization time.
If you provide it with a normal Parameters File containing one or more
sub-regions, it produces arcs by the first method. If you provide it with a
Parameters File with no sub-regions, the second method is used.
In either case, the Structure Arcs Program can also incorporate additional arcs
in the Structure Arcs File, as specified by the user in an Additional Arcs File.
Note: Even when using the first method, the arcs produced by this program are
slightly different from those produced by versions of the Four-X Structure Arcs
Program prior to revision 1.10, which were the same as Four-D. The
differences are caused by the fact that the arcs which join adjacent slope
regions are now calculated more accurately than before, and changes of slope
are more accurately modelled. Optimizations done with the new Structure Files
will produce slightly different pits than with the old Structure Files, but the
differences will usually only be a small number of blocks here and there.

Continued on next page

84
Part 2: Structure Arcs Program
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Files Files used Files created

• Parameters File • Print file
• Slope Profile File, if you are using one • Structure Arcs File
• Profile Number File, if you are using one
• Model File, if you are using one
• Additional Arcs File, if you are using one

Input Program Output

Parameters
File (.par) Structure Arcs

FXST Structure
Slope Arcs File
Profile (.stu)
File (.slp)

Profile
Number Print File
File (.pnu) (.prs)

or

Model
File (.mod)
Additional
Arcs File
(.add)

In this chapter This chapter contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

Using the Structure Arcs Program 86
Further Information 89

85
Part 2: Structure Arcs Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Structure Arcs Program

Starting the Start the Structure Arcs Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Structure Arcs Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXST and then press the Enter key (↵)

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
If the Parameters File contains one or more sub-regions, the program will
skip to step 6.
3. Type in the name of the Slope Profile File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
If the Slope Profile File contains only one profile, the program will
skip to step 6.
4. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Wish to provide the slope Type: P↵
profile numbers for the
Type in the name of the Profile
blocks via a Profile Number
Number File that you want to use and
File
press Enter
Wish to provide the slope Type: M↵
profile numbers for the
Type in the name of the Model File
blocks via the zone numbers
that you want to use and press Enter
in a Model File

Continued on next page

86
Part 2: Structure Arcs Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Structure Arcs Program, Continued

Procedure (continued)

Step Action
5. Use the table below to determine your next step
If… then…
That file contains a profile Type: Y↵
number for every block in
the model framework
That file does not contain a Type: N↵
profile number for every
Type in the slope profile number to
block in the model
use for other blocks and press Enter
framework

6. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you… then…
Have an Additional Arcs Type: Y↵
File that you want to
Type in the name of the Additional
incorporate into the
Arcs File that you want to use and
Structure Arcs File
press Enter
Do not want to add an Press Enter to accept the default [N]
Additional Arcs File to the
Structure Arcs File

7. Type in a name for the Structure Arcs File and press Enter

Continued on next page

87
Part 2: Structure Arcs Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Structure Arcs Program, Continued

What happens The program will:

• Read the Parameters File
• Possibly read a Slope Profile File, and a Model File or Profile Number
File
• Possibly read an Additional arcs file
• Generate a generic set of arcs suitable for blocks in each slope profile
• Report on:
- The number of arcs
- The slope errors at each bearing specified
- The minimum, average, and maximum, slope error
• Create a print file containing the above information, and a plan of the
blocks to be mined to expose a one-block ore body
Note: Examine this information carefully to make sure that the accuracy is
sufficient for your purposes.
• Generate the actual arcs for each block
• Create the Structure Arcs File containing the actual arcs for each block
If an Additional Arcs File was supplied, the arcs from it are included at the
end of the Structure Arcs File.

88
Part 2: Structure Arcs Program
5 July, 1999
Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Additional Arcs Files 232
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
How the Structure Arcs File handles slopes, generates arcs 330
and creates the Structure Arcs File
Model Files 214
Parameters File information 178
Print files 24
Profile Number Files 230
Slope Profile Files 228
Structure Arcs Files 23
Using the Four-X package 15

Tutorials and For practice in using the Structure Arcs Program, refer to Tutorial 1 - The
exercises Basics in your Getting Started Manual.

89
Part 2: Structure Arcs Program
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 4: Optimization Program (FXOP)

Overview

Purpose The Optimization Program carries out the pit optimizations. It produces a
Results File containing the different pit outlines and details of the blocks within
those outlines.

Files Initial run

Files used Files created
• Parameters File • Results File
• Model File • Work File
• Structure Arcs File • Print file

Input Program Output

Optimization - initial run

Parameters FXOP Results File

File (.par)
(.res)

Model File Work File

(.mod) (.wrk)

Structure
Arcs File Print File
(.stu) (.pro)

Restart run
Restart runs are used where an Optimization Program run has been terminated
because of power failure or hardware malfunction. When the Optimization
Program is used, it automatically creates a Work File which contains all of the
intermediate information generated during a pit optimization and this
information is used in a restart run.
Continued on next page

90
Part 2: Optimization Program
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Files (continued)

Files used Files created

• Work File • Results File
• New Work File
• Print file

Input Program Output

Optimization - restart run

FXOP Results File

(.res)
Work File
(.wrk)

Work File
(.wrk)

Print File
(.pro)

In this chapter This chapter contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

Using the Optimization Program 92
Further Information 95

91
Part 2: Optimization Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Optimization Program

Starting the Start the Optimization Program

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Optimization Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXOP and then press the Enter key (↵)

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Use the table below to determine your next step
If this is… then…
Not a restart run Press Enter to accept the default [N]
A restart run Type: Y↵
Type the name of the Work File that you want
to use as input and press Enter
Continue with step 7

3. Type the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as input
and press Enter
4. Type the name of the Model File that you want to use as input and
press Enter
5. Type the name of the Structure Arcs File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
6. Type in a name for the output Work File and press Enter
7. Type in a name for the output Results File and press Enter

Continued on next page

92
Part 2: Optimization Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Optimization Program, Continued

What happens - Stage 1

normal run
The program:
• Reads in the Parameters File
• Sets up the initial data structures
• Reads in the Model File
Stage 2
If the active blocks indicator is set to 1 or 2, the program:
• Scans the Structure Arcs File to identify those blocks that would be mined
if every block containing any product were mined
This is equivalent to setting the Revenue Factor to infinity. These blocks,
usually only 20-30 percent of the blocks in the model framework, are the
only blocks of interest because they are the only ones that could possibly
be mined in an optimal pit.
Stage 3
The program:
• Reads the Structure Arcs File
• Discards the arcs that do not begin and end on a block that is to be
considered
• Stores the remaining arcs in the Work File
At this point, the Work File is completed. Only after this can restart dumps
take place.
Stage 4
• The program carries out an optimization for each value of Revenue Factor
that you have defined in the Parameters File
The order in which the Revenue Factor values are dealt with is such that
the number of blocks to be considered in each optimization is less each
time. Therefore, the time taken for each optimization falls rapidly after
the first three or four have been done.
• During each optimization, the program repeatedly carries out a pass
through the blocks, during which it adds structure arcs to create links
between blocks
Generally, the number of arcs added at each pass is less than for the
previous pass. When a pass takes place in which no arcs are added, the
optimization is complete.
The number of passes required for an optimization depends on the details
of the block values.
If the blocks under consideration during this stage will not fit into physical
memory, the program uses its virtual memory system, and optimization is
much slower.

Continued on next page

93
Part 2: Optimization Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Optimization Program, Continued

What happens - normal run (continued)

Stage 5
The program creates:
• A Results File containing details of the optimizations that were done, and
all of the blocks within the optimized pit for an infinite Revenue Factor
• A print file containing the pit details
Note: If you have included fake blocks with large tonnages to represent
immovable objects, you should always exclude the pit for an infinite
Revenue Factor from any analysis you do. The Pit Visualisation Program
will only display this pit if the highest Revenue Factor you specify mines all
possible ore.

What happens - If you restart a previous run, the new run will recommence with the first pass
restart run after the last restart dump was done.
On a restart run, the program:
• Reads the Work File and checks that a valid restart dump was done
• Continues the optimization to completion
• Creates a Results File and a print file.
If the run is terminated again after further restart dumps, it can be restarted
again from the latest dump. Note that the run-time shown at the end of a
restarted run is the time that the whole run would have taken if done without
restarts.

94
Part 2: Optimization Program
5 July, 1999
Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Calculating costs for pit optimization 293
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
Model Files 214
Parameters File information 178
Pit Visualisation Program 96
Print files 24
Results Files 223
Structure Arcs Files 23
Techniques with blocks 307
Using the Four-X package 15
Work Files 24

Tutorials and For practice in using the Optimization Program, refer to the following tutorials
exercises and exercises in your Getting Started Manual:
• Tutorial 1 - The Basics
• Tutorial 4 - Re-arranging a Model
• Tutorial 5 - Dealing with an Obstruction

95
Part 2: Optimization Program
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 5: Pit Visualisation Program (FXPI)

Overview

Purpose The Pit Visualisation Program creates a print file containing diagrams in the
form of plans and sections of the pits at the various different push-backs.
To produce the diagrams, the Pit Visualisation Program uses information from
a Results File, Model File, or Mining Sequence File.
The plans and sections show each block as a single character that can indicate:
• The pit number or the mineralisation if you are using a Results File
• The zone number or the mineralisation if you are using a Model File
- or -
• The period if you are using a Mining Sequence File
Alternatively, the character can show whether the block contains one or more
elements, is entirely waste, or is air.

Files Files used Files created

• Parameters File • Print file
• Results File, Model File, or Mining
Sequence File

Input Program Output

Parameters
File (.par) Pit Visualisation

AND... Print File

FXPI (.prp)

Results File
(.res)

OR
Model File
(.mod)

OR Mining
Sequence
File (.msq)

Continued on next page

96
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

In this chapter This chapter contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

Using the Pit Visualisation Program 98
How the Diagrams are Displayed 100
Further Information 103

97
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Pit Visualisation Program

Starting the Start the Pit Visualisation Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Pit Visualisation Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXPI and then press the Enter key (↵)

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you want to use a… then…
Results File as input Press Enter to accept the
default [1]
Model File as input Type: 2↵
Mining Sequence File as input Type: 3↵

4. Type in the name of the Results, Model or Mining Sequence File

that you have chosen to use and press Enter
5.
If you are using… then…
• A Results File or a Model File Continue with step 6

• A Mining Sequence File Continue with step 7

6. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you want the diagrams to display… then…
• Pit numbers (Results Files) Press ↵ to accept the
default [1]
• Zone numbers (Model Files)
• Period numbers (Mining Sequence Files)
Value signs (this is not available if you are Type: 2↵
using a Mining Sequence File)
Continue with step 8

Continued on next page

98
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Pit Visualisation Program, Continued

Procedure (continued)

Step Action
7. Use the table to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to emphasise a particular pit Press Enter to accept the
default [Y]
Do not want to emphasise a Type: N↵
particular pit

8. Use the table to determine your next step

If you… then…
Want to have the element specified Press Enter to accept the
displayed in the diagrams default [Y]
Do not want to have the element Type: N↵
specified displayed
This question will be repeated by the program until answers are
received for all elements listed in the Parameters File.
9. Use the table to determine your next step
If you want the program to display… then…
XY planes Type: 1↵
XZ planes Type: 2↵
YZ planes Type: 3↵
XY, XZ, YZ planes Type: 1 2 3↵

What happens The Pit Visualisation Program will:

• Read the Parameters File
• Set up some data structures
• Read in a Results File Model File, or Mining Sequence File, and then,
• Create a print file containing the required plans and/or sections, using one
character for each block.

99
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
How the Diagrams are Displayed

Blocks The Pit Visualisation Program creates a print file which contains the output
plans and/or sections.
In the output plans and/or sections in the print file, the different types of blocks
are displayed in the following ways:
• Air blocks, defined as having exactly zero tonnage, are always represented by
a “.” symbol
• Other blocks are represented, according to the choice you made when
running the program, either as:
- Their pit, zone, or period
- or -
- Using value signs (+mineral, − waste)

Displaying When the option to display:

pit, zone, period
numbers • Pit numbers (Results File)
• Zone numbers (Model File)
- or -
• Period numbers (Mining Sequence File)
is used, then for numbers higher than 9, the characters A-Z and then a-z are
used, as shown below.

Pit, zone, period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

Pit, zone, period 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

character B C D E F G H I J K

Pit, zone, period 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

character L M N O P Q R S T U

Pit, zone, period 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

character V W X Y Z a b c d e
… etc.

When the program gets to the end of the lower case alphabet, it starts again
with upper case letters, then back to lower case letters, and so forth.

Example
The following is an example of a plan showing pit numbers.

Continued on next page

100
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
How the Diagrams are Displayed, Continued

pit, zone, period numbers (continued)

XY plane for Z = 21 facing in the direction of -ve Z

Symbols: "." is air, "1-9,A-Z,a-z" denote pits
**********|*********|*********|****
* *
* *
* *
* Eb *
- EEEb -
* 9999Eb *
* bC999999L *
* bC99999999M *
* MGGC99999999BBU *
* KDBBB99994999ADKU *
* KDBBB999999799ADDKU*
* KKDBBBA999999999ADDDK*
* JHHDBBB9999999999ADDDD *
* UHDDCBBB9999999999AADDDPh*
- UGDCCCBB9999999599AAADDFP -
* UGDCCCBBB9999995999AAAAFFS *
* UGDCCCB999999999999AAAACFIOS*
* UGDCCCC999999999999AAAABCFINS*
* WGDCCCC9999992999999AAABBCFIIP*
* bGGCCCC9999939999999AAABBCCFIIO*
* kWGECCC99999999699999AABBBCFFHIO*
* bGGDCC99999999666999BBBBBCCFFIIO*
* bGDDCC9999997996999ABBBBBCCFFIIO*
*kWGDDCC9999999999999BBBBBCCDFFIIO*
-bHGDDCC999999999999ABBBBBCCDFFIIO-
*bGGDDCCB9999999999ABBBBBCCCDFFIIO*
*bGEDCCCBB99999999ABBBBBBCCDDFIIOY*
*HGDDCCCBBB999999ABBBBBBBCDDFFIIOZ*
*GGDDCCCBBBB9AAAABBBBBBBCCDDFHIOO *
*GEDDCCCBBBBBAABBBBBBBBBCDDFFIIOO *
*GEDDCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCDDFFHINOY *
EEDDDCCCBBBBBBBBBBBBBCDDEFGINOY *
YEEDDDCCCCBBBBBBBBBBBCDDEFFHNOY *
EEDDDDCCCCBBBBBBBBCCDDEFFGMOY *
-GEEDDDCCCCCBBBCCCCCDDEEFGGMW -
*GEEEDDDCCCCCCCCCCCDDEEFGGIMY *
*GGEEEDDDCCCCCCCCCDDEEFGGGIU *
*JGGEEEDDDDCCCCCCDDEEFGGGGNa *
*JIGFEEEDDDDDDEEEEEEFGGGGGN *
*JJGGFEEEDDDEEEEEEEFFGGGGIN *
*SJIGGFEEEEEEEEEEEFFGGGGINO *
*SJJIGGFFEEEEEEEEFFGGGGIIN *
*mSJJIGGFFFEEEEFFGGGGGIILO *
*mTMJIIGGGGGGGGGGGGGGIILOO *
- TSMJIIGGGGGGGGGGGGIIJNOf -
* TSMJIIGGGGGGGGGGIIJNOf *
* TTSMJJIGGGGGGGGIIJNOT *
* TTSMJJIIGGGGGIJJNOTk *
* TTSNJJJIIIJJJNNOTk *
* TTSNNJJJJJNNOOTk *
* TTSNNNNNNNOOTk *
* lTTSSSOOOSSTk *
* lTTTTTTTTkk *
* lkkkkkkkk *
- lllll -
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
**********|***** X *|*********|****

Note that the proportions are incorrect because the characters used to represent
each block are not the same shape as a block.

Continued on next page

101
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
How the Diagrams are Displayed, Continued

Displaying value When the option to display value signs is used, then:
signs
• The “+” sign indicates the presence of ore.
- and -
• The “−” sign indicates the presence of waste.

Example
The following is an example of a section showing ore and waste.

XZ plane for Y = 29 facing in the direction of +ve Y

Symbols: "." is air, "+" could be processed, "-" is waste

Elements selected: GOLD

**********|*********|*********|****
*...........................------*
*.............--------------------*
*---------------------------------*
-----------------------------------
*---------------------- *
* *
* *
* +++ *
* +++ *
* +++++ *
++++++ *
Z +++++++ *
+++++++++ *
- ++++++++ -
* ++++++++ *
* +++++++++ *
* +++++++++ *
* ++++++++ *
* +++++++ *
* ++++ *
* *
* *
* *
**********|***** X *|*********|****

In this example, the “−” sign is used to indicate the presence of weathered
waste which is the only waste included in the Model File. All other waste
blocks are undefined blocks and automatically assume the default block
tonnage.

102
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
Mining Sequence Files 221
Model Files 214
Parameters File information 178
Print files 24
Results Files 223
Using the Four-X package 15

Tutorials and For practice in using the Pit Visualisation Program, refer to the following
exercises tutorials and exercises in your Getting Started Manual:
• Tutorial 1 - The Basics
• Tutorial 5 - Dealing with an Obstruction

103
Part 2: Pit Visualisation Program
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 6: Mining Width Program (FXMI)

Overview

Purpose The Mining Width Program modifies a set of push-back outlines and a final pit,
based on specified pit numbers. It adjusts the shapes of the outlines, so as to
produce practical push-backs that satisfy mining width conditions.
Input is usually provided in the form of a Results File, and the corresponding
Parameters and Structure Arcs Files. The user specifies which pit numbers to
use as push-back outlines and for the final pit outline, and a set of mining width
conditions and control options. The output is a new Results File with the
push-back numbers in place of pit numbers, and a print file showing the
push-backs after modification.
A Pit List File can be used in place of the input Results File. In this case, a new
Pit List File is output and the Re-blocking Program can then be used to merge it
with a Model File to produce a Results File.

Files Files used Files created

• Parameters File • Print file
• Structure Arcs File • If you used:
• Results File or Pit List File - A Results File as input, a
modified Results File
- A Pit List File as input, a
modified Pit List File

Files used/created using a Results File as input

Input Program Output

Parameters
File (.par) Mining Width
Print File
FXMI (.prm)
Structure
Arcs File
(.stu)

AND... Results File

(.res)

Results File
(.res)

Continued on next page

104
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Files (continued)

Note: If you are using a Results File as input, that file must contain all of the air
blocks. The program can then correctly handle sloping terrain and the
application of structure arcs, without generating erroneous waste blocks.
This means that when the Results File is produced with the Optimization
Program:
• The active blocks indicator should be set to 1 or 3.
• Air flag B must be set to 3.
The Mining Width Program checks air flag B in the Parameters File, and, if it
is not set to 3, then the run terminates with an error message.
• The Parameters File you use should be the same Parameters File used to
produce the Results File.

Files used/created using a Pit List File as input

Input Program Output

Parameters
File (.par) Mining Width
Print File
FXMI (.prm)
Structure
Arcs File
(.stu)

AND... Pit List

File (.pil)

Pit List
File (.pil)

In this chapter This chapter contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

How the Mining Width Program Works 106
Using the Mining Width Program 114
Print File Output 117
Further Information 118

105
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works

Introduction The Optimization Program takes no account of mining width in the generation
of pits. Consequently, an optimized pit which is used as a starting point for the
design of a final pit can have a floor that is too narrow, or irregularities in the
pit wall that cannot be followed easily in practice.
Optimized pits that are used as the starting points for the designs of push-backs
can have the same problems as the final pit. Other mining width problems can
arise if the wall of a push-back is too close to that of a subsequent push-back or
the final pit.
The Mining Width Program starts from a series of pits that the user has selected
as push-back walls and the final pit wall. It then checks for certain conditions
and makes adjustments to each bench in turn, from the bottom of the pit to the
top.
Adjustments can result in four types of change:
• Blocks at the bottom of the pit can be excluded from the pit
• Blocks at the bottom of a push-back can be included in a later push-back
• Blocks can be included in an earlier push-back
• Blocks can extend the final pit
After each bench is adjusted, blocks in higher benches are also adjusted to
allow for slope constraints.
The possible conditions and adjustments are described below.

Continued on next page

106
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works, Continued

Mining width “Mining width” is the minimum width necessary for the extraction of the ore
regardless of the actual width of ore-bearing rock†.
Mining width is represented in the Mining Width Program by a template. The
template is a rectangle defined by numbers of blocks in the X and Y directions.
Blocks in a particular push-back, which cannot be covered by the template
without part of the template lying outside the push-back are regarded as
inaccessible and requiring correction.
To cater for practical mining situations, a tolerance can be specified to control
precisely how strictly the template must be applied. If the tolerance is set by
the user to zero, then the complete template must be able to cover every block
in every push-back without extending outside the push-back. If the tolerance is
set to one, then it is permissible for one block to lie outside the push-back, and
so forth.
We recommend that you set the mining tolerance to one less than the largest
template dimension in blocks (i.e. a 3 × 3 template would have a tolerance of
2), although ultimately the most appropriate setting will vary from case to case.

Example
For example, if the template was three blocks by three blocks and the tolerance
was zero, then the highlighted blocks in push-back 2 below would be regarded
as inaccessible. If, on the other hand, the tolerance was 2, then all of the blocks
in push-back 2 would be regarded as accessible.

22222
2222222222222
2222222222222222222
222222111111112222222
2222211111111112222222
222221111111111112222222
222221111111111112222222
222221111111111112222222
222221111111111112222222

Inaccessible blocks are dealt with either by extending the push-back that they
belong to, or by extending an earlier push-back to cover them.

Continued on next page

† United States Department of the Interior, Dictionary of Mining, Mineral and Related Terms, P. W. Thrush
et al (eds) Bureau of Mines, Chicago, 1968.

107
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works, Continued

Small drop cuts The floor of the final pit or of push-backs can be smoothed by eliminating small
drop cuts. A drop cut is eliminated by reassigning those blocks within it to a
later push-back, or, in the case of the final pit, by removing the blocks from the
design.
Drop cuts are defined in the Mining Width Program as regions of contiguous
blocks, within a push-back, that are surrounded by blocks of later push-backs or
by the final pit limit. Contiguous blocks are defined as blocks that share a
common boundary.
Example 1
Diagram A below shows a group of 4 contiguous blocks while Diagram B
shows two blocks which are not contiguous

The user specifies the minimum number of blocks that must be in a drop cut for
it to remain. If the Mining Width Program finds a drop cut which has less than
the minimum number, then the drop cut will be eliminated.
There are two cases to consider:
• Drop cuts at the final pit floor
At the final pit floor, blocks in drop cuts that are eliminated are excluded
from the pit and they are no longer available for mining.
• Drop cuts elsewhere
Elsewhere, the blocks within small drop cuts are reassigned to the next
push-back. In other words, access to the blocks is delayed.
The user may set these values while using the program in the push-back control
values screen.

Intermediate
drop cuts

Drop cuts at
floor of pit

Continued on next page

108
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works, Continued

Small drop cuts (continued)

Example 2: pit floor drop cuts

If the user-specified value for final pit floor drop cuts is 4, then in the final pit,
any drop cut that contains 3 or less contiguous blocks will be excluded from the
pit design.
The user will be informed of the position and value of any blocks removed.
Any blocks that are removed will be flagged in the diagrams in the print file
with a #.
Example 3
Look at the following example which is in plan view.

Original push-back Modified push-back

Single
11 1 11 #
11 1 11 #
3 contiguous
11 ##

This group of blocks will be changed

because it consists of a single block and
a group of 3 continguous blocks

In this diagram, the original push-back will be modified, as shown, as it consists

of a single block and a group of 3 contiguous blocks.

Example 4: drop cuts elsewhere

If the user-specified value for drop cuts elsewhere is 4, then any area with 3 or
less contiguous blocks will be affected.

Original push-back Modified push-back

2222222222222222222222222 2222222222222222222222222
2222212222222222221222222 2222222222222222222222222
2222212221111222222122222 2222222221111222222222222
2222222221111222221122222 2222222221111222222222222
2222222222222222222222222 2222222222222222222222222

The small drop cuts to the left and right would be changed, while the centre
drop cut would remain.

Continued on next page

109
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works, Continued

Small walls Small walls are defined as small groups of contiguous blocks that are
surrounded by blocks belonging to both earlier and later push-backs, or by
earlier push-backs and by the edge of the final pit.
If the number of contiguous blocks is less than a minimum specified by the user
in the push-back control values screen, then the blocks will be included in the
earlier push-back.
The small walls may occur at the edge of the final pit, as shown in the diagram
below.

Original push-back Modified push-back

33 11
3333 1111
211133 111111
2111113 1111111
1111111111 1111111111

In this diagram, original push-backs 2 and 3 have been re-assigned to push-back

1 (modified push-back diagram).

Alternatively, they may occur within the pit, as shown in the diagram below.

Original push-back Modified push-back

3333333333333333333333333 3333333333333333333333333
3333333333333332223333333 3333333333333331113333333
3333333333333222222221111 3333333333333111111111111
1111111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111111
1111111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111111

In this diagram, original push-back 2 has been reassigned to push-back 1

(modified push-back diagram).

Continued on next page

110
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works, Continued

Small stumps A “stump” is a row of blocks belonging to a later push-back sticking out of an
otherwise straight wall of blocks. It may be inconvenient to work around these
blocks and easier to mine as a straight wall.
A stump is small if its length is less than or equal to the template width or
template height along the wall. You can specify that you want small stumps
removed during a run of the Mining Width Program in the push-back control
values screen. Stumps are removed by including them in the earlier push-back.
The following plan illustrates a stump 3 blocks long.

Original push-back Modified push-back

1111111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111111
1111111122211111111111111 1111111111111111111111111
2222222222222222222222222 2222222222222222222222222

In the case above, if the template was four or more blocks wide, the blocks
within the stump would be reassigned to push-back 1, as is shown.

Small holes A “hole” is a row of blocks belonging to an earlier push-back sticking into an
otherwise straight wall of blocks. It may be easier to mine as a straight wall.
A hole is small if its length is less than or equal to the template width or
template height as appropriate. You can specify that you want small holes
removed in the push-back control values screen.
Small holes are removed by assigning the blocks within them to a later
push-back. However, since the Mining Width Program works by extending
earlier push-backs into later ones, the removal of small holes can only take
place if a previous adjustment to the bench has extended the first push-back
into the area.
The following plan illustrates a hole 3 blocks long.

Original push-back Modified push-back

2222222222222222222222222 2222222222222222222222222
2222222211122222222222222 2222222222222222222222222
1111111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111111

In this case, the blocks within the hole may be reassigned to push-back 2.

Continued on next page

111
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works, Continued

Sharp corners Sharp corners can be difficult to deal with, and it may be easier to work with
rounded corners.
This option can be turned on or off by the user during a run of the Mining
Width Program in the push-back control values screen.

Original push-back Modified push-back

1111111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111111
1111111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111111
2222222222221111111111111 2222222222211111111111111
2222222222221111111111111 2222222222221111111111111
2222222222221111111111111 2222222222221111111111111

The corner block will be included in the earlier push-back. The final pit outline
will not be modified.
Similarly, a corner where an earlier push-back protrudes into a later one may be
trimmed. However, since the Mining Width Program works by extending
earlier push-backs into later ones, such trimming can only take place if a
previous adjustment to the bench has extended the first push-back.

Slopes The final pit and push-backs contained in the input Results File all comply to
the required pit slope constraints.
In order to ensure that the modified pit and push-backs produced by the Mining
Width Program continue to comply with pit slope constraints, the program
refers to the input Structure Arcs File throughout processing.
In other words, if a block is reassigned to an earlier push-back, then all the
blocks in higher benches that need to be removed to gain access to this block
will also be reassigned to the earlier push-back.

Additional arcs If the Structure Arcs File contains additional arcs from an Additional Arcs File,
then these arcs will be obeyed in almost all cases. In general, additional arcs
either point to a block on the same bench or a block on a higher bench.
However, it is possible to include a downward pointing arc in an Additional
Arcs File. The program cannot guarantee to obey the dependencies defined by
downward pointing arcs, however the Mining Width Program issues a warning
if this type of arc is found.
If you don’t want the additional arcs to be applied during push-back
adjustment, then create another Structure Arcs File without the additional arcs.

Continued on next page

112
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
How the Mining Width Program Works, Continued

Using the Analysis The Analysis Program can be used on the Results File modified by the Mining
Program after the Width Program, however references to pit numbers will now be to push-back
Mining Width numbers, and “specified case” with the push-back numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. will be
Program your specified push-backs case.
It is therefore easy to measure any changes in NPV caused by the modifications
made by the Mining Width Program to the push-backs and access the impact of
the control parameters.

Air blocks in the The input Results File must contain all of the air blocks. Specifically, this
input Results File means that when the Results File was produced with the Optimization Program,
the active blocks indicator should have been set to 1 or 3 and air flag B should
have been set to 3.
When air is included in the Results File, the program can correctly handle
sloping terrain and the application of structure arcs without generating
erroneous waste blocks.
The Parameters File you use with the Mining Width Program should be the
same Parameters File that you used to produce the Results File. The Mining
Width Program checks air flag B in the Parameters File, and if it is not set to 3
the run terminates with an error message.
Regardless of the setting of air flag A in the Parameters File, the Mining Width
Program considers all air blocks when working out the slopes.
In effect, it temporarily sets air flag A to 1.
If the optimization has been done with the flag set to 2, and some part of the
topography is steeper than the specified slopes, the Mining Width Program may
be forced to add extra blocks to the pit. In this case, if the user has requested
that there be no pit expansion, the blocks are still added, but a warning is issued
at the end of the run.

113
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Mining Width Program

Starting the Start the Mining Width Program

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Mining Width Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXMI and then press the Enter key (↵).

Entering Follow the steps in the table below.

preliminary
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Type the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as input
and press Enter
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you want to use… then…
Results File as input Press Enter to accept the default [1]
Pit List File as input Type: 2↵

4. Type the name of the Results File or Pit List File that you want to
use as input and press Enter
5. Type the name of the Structure Arcs File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
6. Type in a name for the output Results File or Pit List File (as
appropriate) and press Enter
7. Type in the number of the largest pit that you want to use for the
final pit outline and press Enter
8. Enter the pit numbers you want to use to identify the intermediate
push-backs and the final pit by typing in:
• The exact pit numbers that you want to use
• A single pit number
The program will assume that you want to use multiples of that
number as push-backs.
• Two or more pit numbers
The program will extrapolate from the last two numbers given,
and list a series of pit numbers of the same distance apart.

Continued on next page

114
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Mining Width Program, Continued

Entering preliminary information (continued)

Step Action
9. Use the table below to determine your next step
If the pit numbers listed for the then…
push-backs are…
Correct Type: Y↵
Not correct Type: N↵
Go back to step 8

10. Type in the mining width that you want to use and press Enter or
press Enter to accept the default mining width
11. The program will list a series of push-back control values. Use the
table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to modify Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
any of these The program will display a numbered list of
values these values. Choose the number of the item you
want to change and press Enter
You are now given the option of changing the
values or turning on/off additional smoothing
options. Make the desired changes and press
Enter
Continue this process until you have completed
all of the necessary changes, then type: 99↵ to
exit.
Do not want to Type: N↵
modify any of
these values

Continued on next page

115
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
Using the Mining Width Program, Continued

What happens
Stage 1
The Mining Width Program reads in the:
• Parameters File
• Structure Arcs File
• Results File or Pit List File
It then converts the pit numbers to push-back numbers (i.e. 1, 2, 3).
Stage 2
Working from the bottom up, it applies a series of tests and adjustments to
each bench, in turn.
• If the user has specified a value for small drop cuts, the program will
check to see if any blocks need to be reallocated.
• It looks at the pit outline to ensure that all blocks are accessible (within
tolerance).
• If pit expansion is allowed, it will expand the pit to make the blocks
accessible in such a way as to minimize the number of blocks affected.
Stage 3
The program then deals with each push-back in turn, starting from the
outside. In each case it:
• Checks that all blocks can be accessed within the specified tolerance. If
necessary it allows the previous push-back to extend into the current
push-back in such a way as to minimize the number of blocks affected.
• Removes:
- Small walls
- Small stumps
- Small holes
- Sharp corners
Stage 4
The program then creates:
• A modified Results File or Pit List File
• A print file containing detailed information about modified push-backs
and the final pit

116
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
Print File Output

Contents of the In the case where a Results File is used as input, the print file contains details
print file of:
• Blocks read, accepted and rejected on input and those written to the new file
• Any material added to or omitted from the final pit
• The push-backs, including push-back tonnage
If a Pit List File is used as input, then the print file reports on blocks rather than
tonnages.

Resultant push-backs
In the print file, the resultant push-backs are:
• Displayed bench by bench
• Labelled a to z to enable blocks that have been moved to a new push-back to
be highlighted with capital A to Z
Pit expansion/block removal
There are two symbols used to highlight, where the final pit has been expanded
to accommodate mining width:
• The “+” symbol is used to show where a block has been added to the final pit
for which a record exists in the input Results File.
• The “*” symbol is used where no record exists in the Results File. In the
latter case the block is assumed to be waste.
If blocks are removed from the final pit, they are shown as “#”.

Initial push-backs
If you want details of the push-backs without any other modifications, use the
Mining Width Program with a mining width of zero (or a template of one block
by one block) and no other changes.
This will just change the pit numbers to push-back numbers and output the
push-backs in the print file, bench by bench.

117
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Additional Arcs Files 232
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
Model Files 214
Parameters File information 178
Pit List Files 235
Pit size techniques 313
Print files 24
Results Files 223
Structure Arcs Files 23
Using the Four-X package 15

Tutorials and For practice in using the Mining Width Program, refer to the following tutorials
exercises and exercises in your Getting Started Manual:
• Tutorial 6 - The Basics of Mining Width Control
• Exercise 6 - Further Tidying Up

118
Part 2: Mining Width Program
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 7: Analysis Program (FXAN)

Overview

Purpose The Analysis Program allows you to analyse the contents of a Results File by
simulating the operation of the mine over its lifetime, using a wide range of
throughputs and economic circumstances. This allows you to select the best pit
outline and the best way of operating the mine long-term, according to almost
any criteria.
Most of your time will be spent in running the Analysis Program and studying
its output.

Files Files used Files created

• Parameters File • Print file
• Results File • Spreadsheet Output File, if
• Spreadsheet Definition File, if spreadsheet output is requested
spreadsheet output is required • If the user enters/requests only one
analysis and schedule:
- Opti-Cut Economics Text File
and Sequence Text File, if
requested
- Mining Sequence File, if
requested

Input Program Output

Parameters
File (.par) Analysis
Print File
(.pra)
Results File FXAN
(.res)
Spreadsheet
Output File
(.sso)
t
Sp rea dshee e
Fil
De finition
(.ssd )
Opti-Cut Opti-Cut
Economics
Text File (.etx) + Sequence
Text File (.stx)

Mining
Sequence
File (.msq)

Continued on next page

119
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Analysis Program Overview 121
Terminology 121
The Analysis 122
Mining Schedules: Worst Case, Best Case and 123
User Specified
Section B: Using the Analysis Program 126
Procedure 126
What Happens 135
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests 136
Section D: Output 145
Section E: Further Information 148

120
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Analysis Program Overview

Terminology

Analysis In Four-X, the term analysis refers to carrying out runs of the Analysis Program
and considering its output.
The runs simulate the operation of the mine with different pit sizes, throughput
limits and economic circumstances.

Analysis request An analysis request is the information that you provide to the program for it to
do an analysis.

Economic scenario An economic scenario is set of economic values and process definitions which
may change over time, and which constitutes one possible economic
environment for this project.

Mining sequence A mining sequence is the order in which mining is to occur.

Mining schedule A mining schedule is a mining sequence divided into time slots.

Scenario In relation to the Analysis Program, a scenario is the economic scenario

together with the mining schedule.

121
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
The Analysis

Introduction The Analysis Program analyses the Results File according to the analysis
requests input by the user.

Analysis requests The program allows you to input a number of analysis requests.
Each analysis request details one or more economic scenarios. For each
scenario, the Analysis Program simulates the mining of the pit in various
sequences, and stores details of the mining schedules with tonnages, grades and
cash flow figures in the print file.
You specify:
• The final pit
• The prices
• The costs and recoveries
• The discount rate
• The throughput limits

What happens Each simulation covers the operation of the mine, through to the end of
production. The program outputs the following information for each period (if
a full print is requested) and, for the life of the mine:
• Period-by-period mining and processing tonnages
• Grades
• Cash flows
• Discounted cash flows
This information is located in the Analysis Program print file (.pra).
The prices, costs, and throughput limits for mining, processing and production
may vary from period to period.
An unlimited number of different simulations can be carried out in one run.
If requested, selected values can be stored in a Spreadsheet Output File for
further manipulation or graphing by a spreadsheet program.

122
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Mining Schedules: Worst Case, Best Case and User Specified

Introduction One to three different mining schedules can be used during each simulation.
The mining schedules used by the Analysis Program consist of two extreme
schedules supplied by the program, namely:
• “Worst case”
- and -
• “Best case” .
In addition, there is the user specified schedule.
The best case and user specified schedules make use of the pit outlines that lie
inside the one being studied.
The intersections between the various pit outlines and the benches divide the
benches into nested mining units, and it is the sequence of these units that is
controlled.
When these schedules are combined with careful economic forecasting, they
allow you to make informed strategic decisions that will minimize corporate
exposure to economic changes, whilst maximizing the likely return.

Worst case The worst case schedule consists of mining each bench completely before
starting on the next bench.
This schedule, or something very close to it, is usually feasible. It also sets a
lower limit to the Net Present Value.
Unless you mine waste to the exclusion of ore, it is difficult to achieve a lower
NPV.

Best case The best case schedule consists of mining out pit 1, the smallest pit, and then
mining out each subsequent pit shell from the top down, before starting the next
pit shell.
In other words, there are as many intermediate mining push-backs as there are
pit outlines within the one we are mining.
This schedule is seldom feasible because the push-backs are usually much too
narrow. Its usefulness lies in setting an upper limit to the achievable Net
Present Value.
If, as is sometimes the case, worst case and best case Net Present Values differ
by only a percent or two, then you know that, for that pit, mining sequence is
unimportant from an economic point of view.

Continued on next page

123
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Mining Schedules: Worst Case, Best Case and User Specified,
Continued

User specified If, as is more common, the difference between worst and best case is
significant, you can approximate a more realistic mining schedule, between the
two extremes, by specifying the sequence of pit outlines to push back to.
The exact order in which the push-back benches are mined depends on whether
you choose to mine push-backs:
• With a constant lag
• To improve NPV, using the Milawa Algorithm
- or -
• To improve throughput balance, using the Milawa Algorithm

Constant lag
With the constant lag option, you specify a number of benches by which the
mining of each push-back is to lag behind the previous one.
If, for example, you choose a lag of 4, mining would commence on the first
push-back and proceed until four benches were mined. Mining would then
commence on the second push-back and would also continue on the first
push-back. Work commences on the third push-back when the fourth bench of
the second push-back has been completed, etc.
This is the method used in previous versions of Four-X.

Milawa Algorithm
The Milawa Algorithm is a strategic scheduling tool which differs from most
other schedulers in that it is designed specifically for long term scheduling. It
operates in two modes:
• NPV mode
Use this mode to specify that you want the system to find a schedule with
improved NPV. The order in which the benches of push-backs are mined is
determined by the Milawa Algorithm as it seeks to maximize NPV.
• Balancing mode
Use this mode to specify that you want the system to find a schedule with
improved throughput balance. In this mode, the Milawa Algorithm seeks to
maximize the usage of production facilities early in the life of the mine
instead of maximizing NPV. This option will only be of use if you specify at
least two of the possible mining, processing or selling limits.
In both modes, you can limit the number of benches of a push-back mined in a
period, and control the lead of one push-back over the following push-back.

Continued on next page

124
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Mining Schedules: Worst Case, Best Case and User Specified,
Continued

User specified (continued)

Note: In order for the Analysis Program to use the Milawa Algorithm, the
initialization file must contain a line which reads Milawa=Yes in the
[System] section.
To enable the Analysis Program to use the Milawa Algorithm, follow the steps
in the table below.

Step Action
1. Open and view the Four-X initialization file, fx.ini, using a text
editor or a word processor in pure text mode
2. Under the [System] section header, find the line beginning with:
Milawa=
3. Edit the line to read:
Milawa=Yes
4. Save the file and exit from the text editor or word processor

For information about how the Milawa Algorithm works, see page 381.

125
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Using the Analysis Program

Procedure

Starting the Start the Analysis Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Analysis Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXAN and then press the Enter key (↵).

Entering Follow the steps below

preliminary
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and press Enter
2. Type in the name of Parameters File that you want to use as input
and press Enter
3. Type in the name of Results File that you want to use as input and
press Enter
4. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you … then…
Want output data for Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
spreadsheet use Type in:
• The name of the Spreadsheet
Definition File that you want to use
and press Enter
• A name for the Spreadsheet Output
File and press Enter
Do not want output data Type: N↵
for spreadsheet use

5. Type in a description of the run and press Enter

Continued on next page

126
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Entering preliminary information (continued)

Step Action
6. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to enter Type: Y↵
time/replacement
Continue with the procedure titled Entering
costs explicitly
time/replacement costs below
Do not want to enter Press Enter to accept the default [N]
time/replacement
Continue with the procedure titled Entering
costs explicitly
the economic scenario on page 128

Entering The Analysis Program will ask you to enter an analysis request. Follow the
time/replacement steps in the table below.
costs
Step Action
1. Type in a value for the initial capital expenditure and press Enter, or
press Enter to accept the default value
2. Type in a value for time costs and press Enter, or press Enter to
accept the default value
3. Type in a value for the replacement capital expenditure and press
Enter, or press Enter to accept the default value
4. Type in a value for the reference mining cost and press Enter, or
press Enter to accept the default value
5. Type in a value for the time/replacement costs factored into the cost
of mining and press Enter, or press Enter to accept the default value
6. Type in a value for the method/type specified and press Enter, or
press Enter to accept the default value
This step will be repeated for each method/type
7. Type in the time replacement costs factored into the particular
element selling cost or press Enter to accept the default [0]
8. Continue from step 3 of the procedure titled Entering the economic
scenario below

Continued on next page

127
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Entering the The Analysis Program will ask you to enter an analysis request. Follow the
economic scenario steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Type in a value for the initial capital expenditure, or press Enter to
accept the default value
2. Type in a value for the reference mining cost, or press Enter to
accept the default value
3. Type in a value for the prices to be obtained for the element
specified, or press Enter to accept the default value
This step will be repeated for each element
4. Type in a pit number and press Enter
5. Type in a value for the discount percentage per period, or press
Enter to accept the default value
6. Type in a value for the maximum† tonnes of rock per period, or
press Enter to accept the default value
†
7. Type in a value for the maximum tonnes per period for the
processing method specified, or press Enter to accept the default
value
This step will be repeated for each processing method
†
8. If processing groups exist, then type in a value for the maximum
tonnes per period for each processing method group, or press Enter
to accept the default value
This step will be repeated for each processing method group
†
9. Type in a value for the maximum units of each element per period,
or press Enter to accept the default value
This step will be repeated for each element

Continued on next page

† Note that with these maxima, 0 (zero) is the equivalent of infinity.

128
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Entering the economic scenario (continued)

Step Action
10. The program then asks if you want to modify the other Parameters
File values. Use the table below to determine your next step.
If you… then…
Want to Type: Y↵
modify any of
The program will display a numbered list of these
the values
values
Choose the number of the item you want to change
and press Enter
You will then get the option to change the values
Make the desired changes and press Enter
Continue this process until you have completed all
of the necessary changes, then type: 99↵ to exit
Do not want to Press Enter to accept the default [N]
modify these
values

11. Continue with the procedure titled Entering schedule variables

below

Continued on next page

129
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Entering schedule Follow the steps in the table below.

variables
Step Action
1. Specified schedule: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to produce a Type: Y↵
specified schedule
Continue with step 2
Do not want to produce a Press Enter to accept the default [N]
specified schedule Continue with step 4

2. Type in a list of pit numbers that you want to push back to, and
press Enter
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you want to mine the then…
push-backs…
With a constant lag Press Enter to accept the default [1]
Type in the number of benches by which
each push-back must lead to the next (i.e.
the lag) and press Enter
With improved NPV Type: 2↵
With improved Type: 3↵
throughput balance
If you choose either improved NPV or throughput balance, you will
be asked if you want to specify maximum bench mining or bench
lead constraints. If you answer in the affirmative, you will be shown
a Menu which will allow you to set constraints which apply to all
push-backs, or to set constraints individually for each push-back.
Note that, as for throughput limits, a value of zero indicates that
there is no constraint.
4. Worst case schedule: use the table below to determine your next
step
If you… then…
Want to produce a worst Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
case schedule
Do not want to produce a Type: N↵
worst case schedule

Continued on next page

130
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Entering schedule variables (continued)

Step Action
5. Best case schedule: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to produce a best case Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
schedule
Do not want to produce a Type: N↵
best case schedule

6. Continue with the procedure titled Other information below

For more information about mining schedules, see page 123.

Other information Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. The program will ask whether the values for this request are correct.
Use the table below to determine your next step
If the values are… then…
Correct Type: Y↵
Wrong Type: N↵
You will be prompted to re-enter all
time/replacement cost information,
economic variables and schedule
information, as appropriate. However,
the values you have just entered are
given as defaults, so that you only have
to type in the changes.

2. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you… then…
Want to enter another Type: Y↵
analysis request You will be prompted to re-enter all
time/replacement cost information,
economic variables and schedule
information, as appropriate
Do not want to enter another Type: N↵
analysis request

Continued on next page

131
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Other information (continued)

Step Action
3. You will be asked whether you want a full print†. Use the table
below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want a full print Type: Y↵
Do not want a full print Type: N↵

4. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you have requested then…
Only one analysis and only Continue with step 5
one schedule for that
analysis
More than one analysis The program will start its run. Refer
and/or schedule to What Happens on page 135

5. Opti-Cut files: use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…

Want Opti-Cut files‡ Type: Y↵

Type in a name for the Sequence
Text File or press Enter to accept the
default
Type in a name for the Economics
Text File or press Enter to accept the
default
Do not want Opti-Cut files Press Enter to accept the default
[N]

Continued on next page

† A full print consists of all of the information for each analysis per period and per schedule.
‡ Note: If you have not entered explicit time costs you will receive a warning that the Economics Text File
(ETX file) will need to be modified before Opti-Cut is run.

132
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Other information (continued)

Step Action
6. Mining Sequence File: use the table below to determine your next
step
If you… then…
Want a Mining Sequence Type: Y↵
File
Type in a name for the Mining
Sequence File and press Enter
Do no want a Mining Press Enter to accept the default
Sequence File [N]

7. The program starts its run. Refer to What Happens on page 135

Error correction Using the caret symbol (^)

When entering an analysis request, if you make a mistake you can go back to
the previous question by typing the caret symbol (^) at the prompt and then
pressing the Enter key (↵).
Example

Initial capital expenditure

[0]: ↵
Reference mining cost
[1.25]: 1.36
Price to be obtained for the GOLD
[400]: ^↵

In the example above, by typing ^ and pressing the Enter key (↵) the program
would repeat the “Reference mining cost” prompt, showing the response you
have just entered as the default response (in this case, 1.36).
You are then able re-type or edit the Reference mining cost information.

Default answers If you go through the analysis request questions more than once, either to make
a correction or to enter another request, the default values will be the ones you
entered previously.
It is therefore easy to input multiple requests with small changes for each
request. You merely have to press Enter for most of the questions.

Continued on next page

133
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Large values Numeric values can immediately be followed by:

• A “k”, indicating thousands
- or -
• An “m” indicating millions
Example: 1200, 1.2k and 0.0012M all express the same value.

134
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
What Happens

What happens The Analysis Program:

• Requests information regarding the:
- Final pit
- Prices
- Costs
- Discount rate
- Throughput limits
• Reads the:
- Parameters File
- Results File
- Spreadsheet Definition File, if spreadsheet output is required
• Simulates the life of the mine
• Creates a print file containing the results that can be read by the user
• Produces, if required:
- A Mining Sequence File
- Opti-Cut Sequence and Economic Text Files
- A Spreadsheet Output File

135
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests

Introduction If you want to enter a number of analysis requests in which only certain
numbers are changed in each, consider the following techniques.

Changing one or If you want to change one or more values in an ascending series from request to
more values in an request, instead of typing in a single number, you can enter a range in the form
ascending series of:
LOW-STEP-HIGH

Entering a range in the form of LOW-STEP-HIGH has the effect of generating

a series of numbers:
• Starting with LOW
• Followed by LOW+STEP
• Then LOW+2xSTEP, etc.
• Until a value higher than HIGH is obtained (this last value is not used)
A series of analysis requests is then generated, using each of these values, and
leaving all other values in the request constant.
Note: The hyphens ( - ) connecting the numbers together are required.
Underscores ( _ ) will not work.

Example 1
If you enter 20-2-30 for the pit number it is as though you entered analysis
requests for pit numbers 20, 22, 24, 26, 28 and 30. You are then able to carry
out the same analysis on this range of pit sizes.
Example 2
If you enter 300-25-400 for the price, and single values for everything else, it is
as though you had entered analysis requests for 300, 325, 350, 375 and 400.

Continued on next page

136
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Entering ranges for If you enter a range for more than one value, then each range is expanded
more than one within each value of the preceding range.
value
Example
If you enter:
• Price as 300-50-400
- and -
• pit number as 35-2-41
…then the requests for the following cases will be generated in the order shown
below, with all other values being constant.

Price 300 300 300 300 350 350 350 350 400 400 400 400
Pit 35 37 39 41 35 37 39 41 35 37 39 41

Limitations of The following limitations apply to ranges:

value ranges
• Ranges cannot be used with push-back pit numbers, when setting up
specified push-backs.
• Ranges cannot be used if you want two values to change together.

Non-example, where ranges will not work:

If you want to vary the price of gold and silver, in step, and you enter:

Other questions…
Price to be obtained for the GOLD
[400.00] : 350-10-450
Price to be obtained for the SLVR
[5.00] : 4.5-0.1-5.5
Other questions…

In the above example, the output would contain the data that you require.
However the program would generate 121 scenarios and the data that you
require would be buried in a lot of data that you do not want.

Continued on next page

137
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Where you want Where you want two values to change together, you have to enter each pair of
two values to values separately.
change together

Example

Other questions…
Price to be obtained for the GOLD
[400.00] : 350
Price to be obtained for the SLVR
[5.00] : 4.5
Other questions…
Enter another analysis request (Y/N) ? Y

Other questions… press Enter to repeat the previous values

Price to be obtained for the GOLD
[400.00] : 360
Price to be obtained for the SLVR
[5.00] : 4.6
Other questions… press Enter to repeat the previous values
Enter another analysis request (Y/N) ? Y

Other questions… press Enter to repeat the previous values

Price to be obtained for the GOLD
[400.00] : 370
Price to be obtained for the SLVR
[5.00] : 4.7
Other questions… press Enter to repeat the previous values
Enter another analysis request (Y/N) ? Y

… and so on.

Values that change When entering values in an analysis request, use the following construct to
with time indicate values that change with time:
p<n>/value
Where:
• p represents period.
• <n> represents a period number.
• value represents a value.

Continued on next page

138
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Values that change with time (continued)

Example
If you currently operate a processing mill with a maximum throughput of 200k
tonnes per period, but are constructing a second mill with a throughput of 150k,
which you expect to bring into production after 2 periods, you can enter the
throughput limit of the mill as:
200k p3/350k
Where k indicates thousands.
During the simulation of the life of the mine, the Analysis Program will use a
limit of 200k for the first two periods, and will then use 350k for the remainder
of the life of the mine.

P<n>/<value> can be used repeatedly for the same entry.

If you wish to enter more than will fit on one line type: & and then press the
Enter key (↵) to continue on the next line.

Rules and limitations

The following rules and limitations apply:
• Period indicators cannot be used when specifying initial capital expenditure,
pit numbers, or lags between specified push-backs. In these cases they would
be meaningless.
• P1/ should never be used. This is because period 1 is assumed for the first
value.
• Period indicators must be in ascending order.
• With the exception of values entered for replacement capital expenditure,
values remain the same until the end of scheduling, or until the next period
indicator is reached.
• Amounts entered for replacement capital expenditure apply only to the
specified period, or to period 1 if no period is specified.
• The values in the headings are always for period 1. Changes to values, and
any consequent changes to cut-offs, are announced between periods in the
listing.
• All currency amounts should be in today’s currency, even when they come
into effect at a future date. You should never use inflated dollars when
working with Four-X.

Continued on next page

139
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Values that change with time (continued)

• If ranges are used with period changes, then all of the ranges for a particular
entry must have the same number of steps, or have a single step (i.e. one
value). An example of this is given below.
• Ranges within an entry do not multiply with each other.
Example 1
20-1-25 p7/30-1-35
… will produce 6 requests (not 36). It is the equivalent of entering:
- 20 p7/30 the first time
- 21 p7/31 the second time
- 22 p7/32 … etc.
Example 2
20 P5/30-1-32
… is the equivalent of entering:
- 20 P5/30
- 20 P5/31
- 20 P5/32

Period length In Four-X, the period length is defined implicitly by:

• The discount rate
• The throughput limits
- and -
• The time costs
… that you specify, rather than explicitly as a number of, say, months.
Since these values can change with period number, the period length can
change. It is entirely under your control.
Note however that when the Analysis Program calculates the Internal Rate of
Return, it assumes that all periods are of one year.

Continued on next page

140
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Period length (continued)

Discount percentage
Any discount percentage that you set should be for the length of period you
have decided on. Thus, if a period is three months, the discount percentage will
be less than if the period is a year. If the period length varies, then the discount
percentages should vary as well.
How Four-X calculates discounted cash flows
The fraction by which cash flows for a period are multiplied to produce
discounted cash flows is worked out by multiplying the factor for the previous
period (or 1.0 if this is the first period) by either:

• Method A Where D represents discount percentage.

 100 − D  Method A is the default used by Four-X because it was the

  method originally used in earlier versions of the software. It
 100  is consistent with the common understanding of the term
“discount”.

• Method B Where D represents discount percentage.

1 Method B is now known by Whittle to be the conventional
way to calculate NPV and is consistent with the “generalised
 100 + D 
  cost of capital model”†.
 100 

Continued on next page

†See, for example, D. W. Gentry & T. J. O’Neil, “Mine Feasibility Studies”, in H. L. Hartman et al (eds),
SME Mining Engineering Handbook, 2nd edn, Society for Mining, Metallurgy and Exploration, Littleton,
Colorado, 1992, pp. 393-404.

141
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Period length (continued)

You can change the type of discounting you use through the fx.ini file.
Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Open and view the Four-X initialization file, fx.ini, using a text
editor or a word processor in pure text mode
2. Under the [System] section header, find the line beginning with:
Discount=
3. Edit the line to read:
• Discount=MethodA
- or -
• Discount=MethodB
… as required
4. Save the file and exit from the text editor or word processor

Throughput limits
Throughput limits for mining, processing and product, all work on the
principle: if a positive value is supplied, that value is taken as the limit and is
honoured absolutely.
That is, during a simulation, if any limit is reached, then the current period is
terminated, and a new period is started. Thus, for example, there is no
provision for balancing ore and waste mining.
Any throughput limit that you set should be for the length of period that you
have decided on. Therefore, if the period is a quarter, its throughput limits will
be less than if the period is a year.
If the throughput limit is set to zero then it is ignored, and has no effect on
scheduling.
Note: At least one limit should be non-zero, otherwise scheduling cannot take
place, and everything is mined in the first period.

Continued on next page

142
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Period length (continued)

Varying the period length

You may want the period lengths at the start of a simulation to be different from
those at the end.
For example, you may be interested in scheduling four quarters and then yearly
periods. To do this, set the discount rate and the production limits to reflect the
period lengths.
Example

Discount rate: 2.5 p5/10

Mill throughput: 250k p5/1m

Note that, when calculating Internal Rate of Return, the Analysis Program
assumes that the period cash flows are for periods of one year, regardless of the
discount rate and throughput settings. Thus, if you do vary the period length,
any Internal Rate of Return will be incorrect.

Continued on next page

143
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Entering Value Ranges in Analysis Requests, Continued

Schedules with Specifying push-backs

specified
push-backs If you wish to specify your own mining schedule, then you need to provide a
list of the pit numbers that you wish to push back to, in ascending order,
separated by spaces. These are best chosen after examination of the shapes of
the pits, shown by a run of the Pit Visualisation Program.
Where the list of pits goes beyond the final pit
If the list goes beyond the final pit, it will be truncated.
For example: If the final pit is 40, “15 25 42” becomes “15 25 40”.
Where the list of pits does not reach the final pit
If the list does not reach the final pit, the last change of pit number is repeated,
as required.
For example: If the final pit is 40, “15 25” becomes “15 25 35 40”.
Specifying lag
If you choose the option to specify lag you must also provide the number of
benches by which each push-back is to “lag” behind the previous one.
Example
If the lag is 3, bench (n+3) of the second push-back will be mined at the same
time as bench (n) of the first push-back, etc.
If the lag is set to zero, each push-back is completed before the next is started.

144
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
 Section D: Output

Spreadsheet and Print File Output

Introduction The Analysis Program produces output in the form of a print file. In addition, it
can provide the user with:
• A Spreadsheet Output File
• A Mining Sequence File
• Opti-Cut Sequence and Economics Text Files
This topic discusses spreadsheet and print file output.

Spreadsheet output The Analysis Program can generate a large quantity of information very quickly
and users frequently want to manipulate the data further, or plot graphs from it.
Manipulation and/or plotting can most easily be done by using a spreadsheet
program.
The Analysis Program offers a facility that allows you to output selected values
to a text file, which can then be read into a spreadsheet (or any other) program.
When you use this facility, you need to create a Spreadsheet Definition File that
lists the items that you want to output for spreadsheet use (see page 241 for
more information about Spreadsheet Definition Files). The Analysis Program
then outputs the values you have indicated in a Spreadsheet Output File.

Continued on next page

145
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Spreadsheet and Print File Output, Continued

Example An example of part of a small Spreadsheet Output File is shown below.

Multi-element tutorial 2

Grand totals:

GOLD Pit Rock Mill OPVALUE

/Price /FI /tpw /tiw /DTW

300.00 10 2094480 559920 2573027

300.00 11 4309680 1097440 4225424
300.00 12 6658000 1624480 5090110
300.00 13 8791360 2086400 5534342
300.00 14 10276800 2362560 5565635
300.00 15 11647440 2587200 5304338
300.00 16 14420160 2976000 4727464
300.00 17 14770560 3021360 4628440

See page 263 for more information about Spreadsheet Output Files.

Print file output The Analysis Program outputs the results of its run in the print file (file
extension “.pra”).

Continued on next page

146
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
Spreadsheet and Print File Output, Continued

Example The following is an example of print file output from the Analysis Program.

Whittle Four-X ANALYSIS Page 4

Multi-element 16:57
Rev 1.10 09-OCT-98
Licensed for use by -Your Company name will appear here-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Multi-element tutorial 1

Reference mining cost ($/TONNE) : 1.00

GOLD price ($/UNIT) : 380.00
SLVR price ($/UNIT) : 5.10
Pit number : 19 (J)
Discount rate (MethodA) (% per period) : 10.00
Calculation based on selection by : Cut-off
Maximum mining per period (TONNES) : 4000000
Maximum MILL per period (TONNES) : 1000000
Results File : tut1.res

Rock Proc Meth Proc T/R Recov Threshold Minimum Maximum Cut-off
Type Element Cost adj Ratio Grade cut-off cut-off /over

OXID MILL 21.25

GOLD 0.950 0.0589
SLVR 0.800 5.2083
SULF MILL 18.75
GOLD 0.900 0.0548
SLVR 0.800 4.5956
==============================================================================

BEST CASE SCHEDULE : with inner pits always mined out first

Category Element Process Strip Costs and Costs and

Method/rock Units Tonnes /Feed Income Income
Period Element Limit Input Input Grade Cash Flow Discounted
==============================================================================

1 Rock Rock 4000000 3.40 -4000000 -3600000

MILL OXID 276000 -5865000 -5278500
GOLD 18605 0.0674 6716405 6044764
SLVR 308665 1.1184 1259352 1133417
MILL SULF 633717 -11882202 -10693982
GOLD 26710 0.0421 9134799 8221319
SLVR 2301156 3.6312 9388718 8449846
Rejected 625067
GOLD 19958 0.0319
SLVR 635584 1.0168
---------- ----------
Pit 1 at bench 22 to pit 11 at bench 16 ( 7%) 4752072 4276865

An explanation of many of the values in print file output is given in the Getting
Started Manual.

147
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
 Section E: Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
Mining Sequence Files 221
Model Files 214
Opti-Cut Sequence and Economics Text Files 239
Optimization Program 90
Parameters File information 178
Pit Visualisation Program 96
Print files 24
Results Files 223
Spreadsheet Definition Files 241
Spreadsheet Output Files 263
Time cost handling during analysis 305
Using the Four-X package 15

Tutorials and For practice in using the Analysis Program, refer to the following tutorials and
exercises exercises in your Getting Started Manual:
• Tutorial 1 - The Basics
• Exercise 1 - Using Different Pit Sizes
• Tutorial 2 - Further Analysis of the Results File
• Exercise 2 - Varying Silver Prices
• Tutorial 3 - Improving the Value by Using Contract Mining
• Exercise 3 - Improving the Value by Using Two Push-backs
• Tutorial 4 - Re-arranging a Model
• Exercise 5 - Should the Mill be Moved
• Tutorial 6 - The Basics of Mining Width Control
• Exercise 6 - Further Tidying Up
• Tutorial 7 - Optimizing the mining sequence
• Exercise 7 - Limiting the push-back lead

148
Part 2: Analysis Program
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 8: Utilities Program (FXUT)

Overview

Purpose The Utilities Program can:

• Summarise a data file
• Show block value calculations
• Show cut-off variation with processing CAF
• Display Four-X system limits

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Summarising a Data File 150
Overview 150
Starting the Program and Entering Preliminary 151
Information
Procedure: Counts Only 153
Procedure: Graphs Only 155
Procedure: Counts and Graphs 157
What Happens and Output 160
Section B: Showing Block Value Calculations 164
Overview 164
Procedure 165
Print File Output 167
Section C: Showing Cut-off Variation with Processing CAF 168
Overview 168
Procedure 169
Print File Output 170
Section D: Showing Four-X System Limits 171
Overview 171
Procedure 172
Print File Output 173
Section E: Further Information 174

149
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Summarising a Data File

Overview

Purpose In this mode, the Utilities Program can:

• Summarise a:
- Model File
- Results File
or
- Mining Sequence File
• Provide counts and/or distribution graphs
• If requested, provide spreadsheet output

Files Files used Files created

• Parameters File (optional) • Print file
• Model File, Results File or Mining • Spreadsheet Output File
Sequence File

Input Program Output

(Optional) Parameters
Utilities - summarise data file
File (.par)

Print File

Model File FXUT (.pru)

(.mod)

OR
Results File
(.res) Spreadsheet
Output File
OR (.sso)
Mining
Sequence
File (.msq)

150
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Starting the Program and Entering Preliminary Information

Starting the Start the Utilities Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Utilities Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXUT and then press the Enter key (↵).

Entering Follow the steps in the table below.

preliminary
information
Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and then press Enter
2. Type 1↵ to select the “summarise a data file” option
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to use a Press Enter to accept the default [Y]
Parameters File as input Type in the name of Parameters File, or
press Enter to accept the default filename
Do not want to use a Type: N↵
Parameters File as input
Type in the number of elements and press
Enter

4. Use the table below to determine your next step

If you want to use a… then…
Model File as input Type: 1↵
Type in the name of the Model File and
press Enter
Results File as input Type: 2↵
Type in the name of the Results File and
press Enter
Mining Sequence File as Type: 3↵
input
Type in the name of the Mining Sequence
File and press Enter

Continued on next page

151
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Starting the Program and Entering Preliminary Information,
Continued

Entering preliminary information (continued)

Step Action
5. Type of summary: use the table below to determine your next step
If you want the then…
program to output…
Counts only Type: 1↵
Continue with the procedure titled
Procedure: Counts Only, on page 153
Distribution graphs only Type: 2↵
Continue with the procedure titled
Procedure: Graphs Only, on page 155
Both counts and graphs Type: 3↵
Continue with the procedure titled
Procedure: Counts and Graphs, on page
157

152
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure: Counts Only

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step If you… then…

1. Are using a Results File as input Continue with step 2
Are using a Model File or Continue with step 4
Mining Sequence File as input
2. Want to produced detailed Press Enter to accept the default
bench counts for each shell [Y]
Do not want to produce detailed Type: N↵
bench counts for each shell
3. Want to produce detailed bench Press Enter to accept the default
counts for a specific pit [Y]
Type in number of the pit and
press Enter
Do not want to produce detailed Type: N↵
bench counts for a specific pit
4. Are using a Parameters File as Continue with step 5
input
Are not using a Parameters File Continue with step 6
as input
5. Want to exclude any ore Type Y↵
Type: 1↵ to exclude ore by
grade selection. Then type in
the desired grade per element
below which parcels will be
ignored, and press Enter
- or -
Type: 2↵ to exclude ore by
cut-off selection. Then type in
the desired Revenue Factor
value for ore selection and press
Enter
Do not want to exclude any ore Press Enter to accept the default
[N]

Continued on next page

153
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure: Counts Only, Continued

Procedure (continued)

Step If you… then…

6. Want spreadsheet data produced Press Enter to accept the default
[Y]
Type in a name for the
Spreadsheet Output File and
press Enter
Do not want spreadsheet data Type: N↵
produced
7. The program will now start its run. Refer to What Happens and
Output on page 160 for more information

154
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure: Graphs Only

Procedure Follow the procedure in the table below.

Step If you… then…

1. Want to graph the element Press Enter to accept the default
specified in the prompt [Y]
Do not want to graph the Type: N↵
element specified
This step is repeated for all elements
2. Want to produce distributions Press Enter to accept the
by each: defaults [Y]
• Rock-type (all input files)
• Bench (Model and Results
Files)
• Shell (Results File)
• Period (Mining Sequence
File)
• Pit (all input files)
Do not want to produce Type: N↵
distributions by the above
3. Want to use constant histogram Type: Y↵
scaling†
Do not want to use constant Type: N↵
histogram scaling
4. Want to exclude specific Type in the rock-type code(s)
rock-types and then press Enter
Do not want to exclude specific Press Enter
rock-types
5. Are using a Parameters File as Continue with step 6
input
Are not using a Parameters File The program will start its run.
as input Refer to What Happens and
Output on page 160

Continued on next page

†With constant histogram scaling, the information is displayed so that the areas are proportional to the values
or ranges.

155
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure: Graphs Only, Continued

Procedure (continued)

Step If you… then…

6. Want to exclude any ore Type Y↵
Type: 1↵ to exclude ore by
grade selection. Then type in
the desired grade per element
below which parcels will be
ignored, and press Enter
- or -
Type: 2↵ to exclude ore by
cut-off selection. Then type in
the desired Revenue Factor
value for ore selection and press
Enter
Do not want to exclude any ore Press ↵ to accept the default
[N]
7. The program will now start its run. Refer to What Happens and
Output on page 160 for more information

156
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure: Counts and Graphs

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step If you… then…

1. Are using a Results File as input Continue with step 2
Model File or Mining Sequence Continue with step 4
File as input
2. Want to produce detailed bench Press Enter to accept the default
counts for each shell [Y]
Do not want to produce detailed Type: N↵
bench counts for each shell
3. Want to produce detailed bench Press Enter to accept the default
counts for a specific pit [Y]
Type in the number of the pit
and press Enter
Do not want to produce detailed Type: N↵
bench counts for a specific pit
4. Want to graph the element Press Enter to accept the default
specified in the prompt [Y]
Do not want to graph the Type: N↵
element specified
This step is repeated for all elements
5. Want to produce distributions Press Enter to accept the
by each: defaults [Y]
• Rock-type (all input files)
• Bench (Model and Results
Files)
• Shell (Results File)
• Period (Mining Sequence
File)
• Pit (all input files)
Do not want to produce Type: N↵
distributions by the above

Continued on next page

157
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure: Counts and Graphs, Continued

Procedure (continued)

Step If you… then…

6. Want to use constant histogram† Type: Y↵
scaling
Do not want to use constant Type: N↵
histogram scaling
7. Want to exclude specific Type in the rock-type code(s)
rock-types and then press Enter
Do not want to exclude specific Press Enter
rock-types
8. Are using a Parameters File as Continue with step 9
input
Are not using a Parameters File Continue with step 10
as input
9. Want to exclude any ore Type Y↵
Type: 1↵ to exclude ore by
grade selection. Then type in
the desired grade per element
below which parcels will be
ignored, and press Enter
- or -
Type: 2↵ to exclude ore by
cut-off selection. Then type in
the desired Revenue Factor
value for ore selection and press
Enter
Do not want to exclude any ore Press Enter to accept the default
[N]

Continued on next page

†With constant histogram scaling, the information is displayed so that the areas are proportional to the values
or ranges.

158
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure: Counts and Graphs, Continued

Procedure (continued)

Step If you… then…

10. Want spreadsheet data produced Press Enter to accept the default
[Y]
Type in a name for the
Spreadsheet Output File and
press Enter
Do not want spreadsheet data Type: N↵
produced
11. The program will now start its run. Refer to What Happens and
Output on page 160 for more information

159
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
What Happens and Output

What happens The Utilities Program:

• Reads:
- A Parameters File, if one is used
- A Model File
- or -
- A Results File
- or -
- A Mining Sequence File
• Reads the chosen data file a second time if distribution graphs are required
• Creates:
- A print file containing the counts and/or graphs
- Spreadsheet output, if available/requested

Continued on next page

160
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
What Happens and Output, Continued

Output The Utilities Program outputs the counts and/or graphs in the print file, and also
if available/requested, in a spreadsheet output file.

Print file output Example 1

examples
This is an example of the count information contained in the print file output.

Whittle Four-X UTILITIES Page 2

Multi-element 16:56
Rev 1.10 09-OCT-98
Licensed for use by -Your Company name will appear here-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Input Model File - fxtut.mod

File count information -

12840 Blocks were read:

2587 were air (no rock)
10253 contained parcels:
10253 parcels might be processed

Active model dimensions -

X Y Z
Minimum block 1 1 1
ore 1 1 1
Maximum block 33 64 23
ore 33 64 23

Total ROCK in file 18762480 tonnes

Total GOLD in file 265244 units
Total SLVR in file 18345620 units

WASTE is calculated from ROCK minus total parcel tonnage

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Summary by rock type -

Rock No of Mine Proc Total Total ---------- Grade ----------

Type Parcels CAF CAF Tonnes Element Minimum Average Maximum

-------------- ------ ------ --------- --------- -------- -------- --------

OXID 348 1.000 1.000 640320

GOLD 32338 0.0185 0.0505 0.1144
SLVR 549736 0.1709 0.8585 2.1434
SULF 3087 1.000 1.000 6667920
GOLD 232906 0.0090 0.0349 0.1102
SLVR 17795885 0.5833 2.6689 7.5412
-------------- ------ ------ --------- --------- -------- -------- --------

TOT 3435 1.000 1.000 7308240

GOLD 265244 0.0090 0.0363 0.1144
SLVR 18345620 0.1709 2.5103 7.5412
WASTE 1.000 1.000 11454240

Continued on next page

161
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
What Happens and Output, Continued

Example 2
Below is an example of graph information contained in the print file output.

Whittle Four-X UTILITIES Page 3

Multi-element 16:56
Rev 1.10 09-OCT-98
Licensed for use by -Your Company name will appear here-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Element GOLD: Grade distribution for all parcels -

x 1000
Tonnes Tonnes of material in grade range
Grade range material 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
--------------------------|---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|
0.005 0.010 2160 |
0.010 0.015 73440 |#
0.015 0.020 449840 |#########
0.020 0.025 856800 |#################
0.025 0.030 1334880 |###########################
0.030 0.035 1307920 |##########################
0.035 0.040 902480 |##################
0.040 0.045 807280 |################
0.045 0.050 476720 |##########
0.050 0.055 382880 |########
0.055 0.060 252080 |#####
0.060 0.065 160480 |###
0.065 0.070 102560 |##
0.070 0.075 68640 |#
0.075 0.080 50160 |#
0.080 0.085 21520 |
0.085 0.090 20000 |
0.090 0.095 8000 |
0.095 0.100 13520 |
0.100 0.105 7360 |
0.105 0.110 3680 |
0.110 0.115 5840 |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7308240

Continued on next page

162
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
What Happens and Output, Continued

Spreadsheet output Each Spreadsheet Output File produced by the Summarise a Data File mode
contains standard information and is in a fixed format.
As such, the Summarise a Data File mode does not use a Spreadsheet
Definition File to produce the Spreadsheet Output File.
Below is part of a Spreadsheet Output File produced in the Summarise a Data
File mode.

Summary by rock type -

Rock No of Mine Proc Total EL1 EL1 EL1 EL1

Type Parcels CAF CAF Tonnes Element Minimum Average Maximum

-------------- ------ ------ --------- --------- -------- -------- --------

SULF 3087 1.000 1.000 6667920 17795885 0.5833 2.6689 7.5412
WTHR 6818 1.000 1.000 11454240
OXID 348 1.000 1.000 640320 549736 0.1709 0.8585 2.1434
-------------- ------ ------ --------- --------- -------- -------- --------
TOT 10253 1.000 1.000 18762480 18345620 0 0.9778 7.5412

Summary by bench by rock type -

Bench Mine Proc Total EL1 EL1 EL1 EL1

Rock CAF CAF Tonnes Element Minimum Average Maximum

-------------- ------ ------ --------- --------- -------- -------- --------

23 WTHR 1.000 1.000 697200
22 WTHR 1.000 1.000 2002560
OXID 1.000 1.000 55200 51979 0.2817 0.9417 1.9892
21 WTHR 1.000 1.000 3393600
OXID 1.000 1.000 169280 141920 0.1709 0.8384 1.8464
20 WTHR 1.000 1.000 3281040
OXID 1.000 1.000 224480 203524 0.1885 0.9066 2.1434
19 SULF 1.000 1.000 88560 268524 0.7917 3.0321 6.1864
WTHR 1.000 1.000 2068080
OXID 1.000 1.000 191360 152312 0.1793 0.7959 1.9768
18 SULF 1.000 1.000 382320 1035792 0.5833 2.7092 6.5916
WTHR 1.000 1.000 11760
17 SULF 1.000 1.000 412560 1107611 0.7639 2.6847 6.4538
16 SULF 1.000 1.000 451440 1135810 0.6597 2.5160 6.1183
15 SULF 1.000 1.000 475200 1269404 0.7361 2.6713 7.0068
14 SULF 1.000 1.000 507600 1359231 0.7431 2.6778 6.5122
13 SULF 1.000 1.000 507600 1395794 0.6250 2.7498 7.5412
12 SULF 1.000 1.000 511920 1354601 0.7569 2.6461 6.6671
11 SULF 1.000 1.000 524880 1369353 0.7262 2.6089 7.0633
10 SULF 1.000 1.000 505440 1367161 0.8172 2.7049 7.4439
9 SULF 1.000 1.000 505440 1339016 0.7569 2.6492 7.1440
8 SULF 1.000 1.000 488160 1285338 0.7153 2.6330 6.8241
7 SULF 1.000 1.000 455760 1253040 0.8750 2.7493 6.6232
6 SULF 1.000 1.000 369360 987513 0.7222 2.6736 7.0393
5 SULF 1.000 1.000 241920 663071 0.5867 2.7409 6.3751
4 SULF 1.000 1.000 153360 381442 0.8877 2.4872 5.4165
3 SULF 1.000 1.000 51840 130370 0.8125 2.5149 6.5028
2 SULF 1.000 1.000 21600 71230 1.7163 3.2977 4.6473
1 SULF 1.000 1.000 12960 21583 0.8472 1.6654 4.5268

163
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Showing Block Value Calculations

Overview

Purpose In this mode, the Utilities Program creates output containing a full explanation
of the block value calculation for each block that you have selected.

Files Files used Files created

• Print file
• Parameters File
• Model File, Results File, or Mining
Sequence File

Input Program Output

Utilities - block value calculations
Parameters
File (.par)

AND... Print File

Model File FXUT (.pru)

(.mod)

OR
Results File
(.res)

OR
Mining
Sequence
File (.msq)

164
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure

Starting the Start the Utilities Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Utilities Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXUT and then press the Enter key (↵)

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and then press Enter
2. Type: 2↵ to select the “show block value calculations” option
3. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
4. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you want to use a… then…
Model File as input Type: 1↵
Type in the name of the Model File
and press Enter
Results File as input Type: 2↵
Type in the name of the Results File
and press Enter
Mining Sequence File Type: 3↵
as input Type in the name of the Mining
Sequence File and press Enter

Continued on next page

165
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure, Continued

Procedure (continued)

Step Action
5. Type in the desired X, Y and Z co-ordinates either as a single value
or as a range and press Enter
6. Type in the desired Revenue Factor value for the calculations and
press Enter

What happens The Utilities Program reads:

• The Parameters File, and:
- A Model File
- or -
- A Results File
- or -
- A Mining Sequence File
• Requests the required:
- Block co-ordinates for the calculation of block values
- Revenue Factor value
• Creates a print file containing a full explanation of the block value
calculation for each block selected

166
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Print File Output

Introduction In the “showing block value calculations” mode, the Utilities Program creates a
print file containing a full explanation of the block value calculation for each
block selected.

Example Here is an example of print file output.

Input Model File - fxtut.mod

Calculations based on selection by cut-off

Rock Proc Proc Recov Thresh Minimum Maximum Cut-off

Type Meth Element Cost Ratio Grade cut-off cut-off /over

OXID MILL 21.25

GOLD 0.950 0.0358
SLVR 0.800 3.4000
SULF MILL 18.75
GOLD 0.900 0.0333
SLVR 0.800 3.0000
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Block value calculation for 19,36,1 1,1,2160 with REVFAC = 1.5625
Set BLOCKAG, BLOCKUG and TMPADJ to zero
=== Parcel 1 SULF,2160
Add 2160x(1-1) to TMPADJ to give 0
Set REHVAL to 2160x0 = 0
Try Method MILL
For GOLD: GRADE = 0.0368, CUT-OFF = 0.0333
--- Method MILL used to process this parcel
Set PARVAL to 2160x1x1x1x18.75 = -40500
For GOLD,79.5
Set AVAILMET to maximum of zero and 79.5-2160x0 = 79.5
Set REVENUE to 79.5x1x0.9x1.5625x400 = 44718.7
Set SELLVAL to 79.5x1x0.9x0 = 0
Set ELEMVAL to 79.5x1x0 = 0
Set PARVAL to PARVAL + REVENUE-SELLVAL-ELEMVAL = 4218.75
For SLVR,3086.77
Set AVAILMET to maximum of zero and 3086.77-2160x0 = 3086.77
Set REVENUE to 3086.77x1x0.8x1.5625x5 = 19292.3
Set SELLVAL to 3086.77x1x0.8x0 = 0
Set ELEMVAL to 3086.77x1x0 = 0
Set PARVAL to PARVAL + REVENUE-SELLVAL-ELEMVAL = 23511.1
Add PARVAL to BLOCKAG to give 23511.1
Subtract (2160+0)x1x1.25 from BLOCKAG to give 20811.1
Subtract BLOCKUG from BLOCKAG to give BLOCKVAL = 20811.1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

This can be read alongside the explanation of how Four-X calculates block
values, on page 337.

167
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Showing Cut-off Variation with Processing CAF

Overview

Purpose In this mode, the Utilities Program creates output containing theoretical
cut-offs, and any cut-offs obtained by cut-off scaling which are different from
the theoretical cut-offs, by ≥ 1 in the last digit.

Files Files used Files created

• Parameters File • Print file

Input Program Output

Utilities - cut-off variation with processing CAF

Parameters FXUT
File (.par) Print File
(.pru)

Note:
• Theoretical cut-offs are calculated using the formulae given on pages 354
and 359. These cut-offs are subject to any minima and maxima in the
Parameters File.
• For more information about cut-offs obtained by cut-off scaling, see page
366.

168
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure

Starting the Start the Utilities Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Utilities Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXUT and then press the Enter key (↵)

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and then press Enter
2. Type: 3↵ to select the “show cut-off variation with processing CAF”
option
3. Type in the name of the Parameters File that you want to use as
input and press Enter
4. Type in the range of processing CAFs that you want to use and press
Enter
5. Type in the desired Revenue Factor value for the calculations and
press Enter

What happens The Utilities Program:

• Reads the Parameters File
• Requests the required
- Processing cost adjustment factors
- Revenue Factor value
• Creates a print file containing a list of:
- Theoretical cut-offs
- Any cut-offs obtained by cut-off scaling which are different from the
theoretical cut-offs, by ≥ 1 in the last digit

169
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Print File Output

Introduction In the “showing cut-off variation with processing CAF” mode, the Utilities
Program creates a print file containing a list of:
• Theoretical cut-offs
• Any cut-offs obtained by cut-off scaling which are different from the
theoretical cut-offs, by ≥ 1 in the last digit.

Example Here is an example of print file output.

Rock Proc Proc Recov Thresh Minimum Maximum Cut-off

Type Meth Element Cost Ratio Grade cut-off cut-off /over

OXID MILL 21.25

GOLD 0.950 0.0559
SLVR 0.800 5.3125
SULF MILL 18.75
GOLD 0.900 0.0521
SLVR 0.800 4.6875

Cut-offs at the reference block with a Revenue Factor of 1.00000:

Processing Rock Process Cut-off Scaled cut-offs which

CAF Type Method Element /over are different
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

0.800 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0447

SLVR 4.2500
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0417
SLVR 3.7500

0.900 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0503

SLVR 4.7812
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0469
SLVR 4.2187

1.000 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0559

SLVR 5.3125
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0521
SLVR 4.6875

1.100 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0615

SLVR 5.8438
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0573
SLVR 5.1563

1.200 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0671

SLVR 6.3750
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0625
SLVR 5.6250

1.300 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0727

SLVR 6.9062
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0677
SLVR 6.0937

1.400 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0783

SLVR 7.4375
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0729
SLVR 6.5625

1.500 OXID MILL GOLD 0.0839

SLVR 7.9687
SULF MILL GOLD 0.0781
SLVR 7.0312

170
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
 Section D: Showing Four-X System Limits

Overview

Showing Four-X The Utilities Program:

system limits
• Displays the Four-X limits on the screen
• Creates a print file containing details of these limits
• If requested, provides details of your system files:
- config.sys (PCs only)
- autoexec.bat (PCs only)
- fx.ini

Files Files used (if details requested) Files created

• config.sys (PCs only) • Print file
• autoexec.bat (PCs only)
• fx.ini

Input Program Output

Utilities - displaying system limits
Config.sys
(Pcs only)
FXUT
Print File
Fx.ini
(.pru)

Autoexec.bat
(Pcs only)

171
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Procedure

Starting the Start the Utilities Program.

program
If you are using… then…
The Menu Select the Utilities Program from the Menu
The Command Line Type: FXUT and then press the Enter key (↵)

Procedure Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Type in a name for the print file and then press Enter
2. Type 4↵ to select “show Four-X system limits” option
3. Use the table below to determine your next step
If you… then…
Want to output details of the following files: Press Enter to
• autoexec.bat (PCs only) accept the
default [Y]
• config.sys
- and -
• fx.ini
Do not want the program to output details of Type: N↵
these files

What happens The program will display on the screen and output to the print file:
• Four-X limitations, including those relating to:
- Models
- Computer memory and filenames
- The programs
• If requested, details of the following files:
- autoexec.bat
- config.sys
- fx.ini (Four-X initialization file)

172
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
Print File Output

Introduction The program outputs to the print file details of Four-X limitations and, if
requested, details of autoexec.bat (PCs only), config.sys, and fx.ini files.

Example Here is an example of print file output for the PC version of the package.

Whittle Four-X UTILITIES Page 1

Multi-element 17:23
Rev 1.10 13-OCT-98
Licensed for use by -Your Company name will appear here-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The following maxima apply to the programs:

MODELS
Parcels in a block 99
Dimension in blocks in X,Y and Z direction 999
Sub-regions 20
Slopes within a sub-region 8
Number of elements 10
Number of expressions 99
Characters in an expression 1200
Rock types 50
Processing-method/rock-type combinations 50
Processing method groups 9
Total items in all processing method groups 50

COMPUTER MEMORY & FILE NAMES

Data buffers 8192
Characters in a buffer 2048
Blocks without using software virtual memory 1048575
Characters in a file name 50

RE-BLOCKING (FXRE)
Input files 10
Parcels in a block during re-blocking 3000
Points in a polygon definition 100

STRUCTURE ARCS (FXST)

Arcs per block 2000

OPTIMIZATION (FXOP)
Optimal pits per run 101

ANALYSIS (FXAN)
Periods in a simulation 999
Columns for spreadsheet output 50
Milawa algorithm limits
Number of phases that can be improved 9
Number of mining, processing and selling limits 10
Number of changing economics in current scenario 50
Mine life in periods 999

PIT VISUALISATION (FXPI)

Characters in a printed line 1001

Note: The actual numbers that you will see will be the limits that apply to your
particular copy of Four-X.

System files The program also offers to print your system files (config.sys, autoexec.bat (PC
systems only), and fx.ini).
This can be useful when reporting problems to Whittle Programming.

173
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
 Section E: Further Information

For more Refer to the page references below for further information about a topic.
information
Topic See Page
Auxiliary files: Config.sys, autoexec.bat, fx.ini 265
Calculating block values 337
Error messages 404
Filenames and extensions 19
Mining Sequence Files 221
Model Files 214
Ore selection methods 346
Parameters File information 178
Print files 24
Results Files 223
Spreadsheet Output Files 263
Techniques with blocks 307
Using the Four-X package 15

Tutorials and For practice in using the Utilities Program, refer to Tutorial 1 - The Basics in
exercises your Getting Started Manual.

174
Part 2: Utilities Program
5 July, 1999
 Part 3: Detailed File Formats

Overview

Introduction Four-X uses and/or creates 10 different types of text files plus 3 auxiliary files.
This part details the format of 8 of the text files. The other 2 text files are
Opti-Cut files. They are briefly described here, but for a full description refer
to the Opti-Cut User Manual.
This part also details the three auxiliary files.

Order of The information in each of the text files can appear in either:
information in the
text files • Fixed column layout
• Comma delimited format
Fixed column layout
In fixed column layout, the information in each of the text files can appear in a
certain order according to column numbers.
Example

Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
number

<value> <value> <value> <value>

The fixed column layout for each of the text files is described in detail in the
following chapters.
Comma delimited format
In comma delimited format, commas are used to separate the different items. In
this case, the width and column positions are immaterial, but every field, even
if it is blank, must appear with a comma after it.

Continued on next page

175
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Default format of By default, when Four-X writes them, the Mining Sequence, Model, Pit List,
certain files Results and Spreadsheet Files are formatted in the fixed column layout. You
can change the default format of these files which is set in the fx.ini file.
Follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Open and view the fx.ini file using a text editor or word processor.
2. Under the [System] section header, find the line that reads:
Store<filename>=Fixed
• If you want to change the format to Store<filename>=Comma,
then edit the text to read:
Store<filename>=Comma
3. Save the fx.ini file and exit from the text editor or word processor.

In addition, Spreadsheet Output Files can be formatted in quote format, that is,
where quotation marks are used to separate the items, as well as comma
delimited format.
The format of the Spreadsheet Output File can be changed to comma delimited
format or to quote format in a similar manner to that described, above.

Value types There are certain types of values that must be used in the text files. The
following table provides details of each of the allowed value types and the
abbreviation used to identify them in the following chapters.

Value type Description

Real Real values are numbers that include a decimal point. Real
values can be positioned anywhere within the range of columns
indicated.
Integer Integers are whole numbers that can be positioned anywhere
within the range of columns indicated.
Character Character values are made up of alphabetical characters and are
usually a code. Character values should be left-justified.

Some values can be either a constant or a code for a grade-dependent

expression which the user has defined. In this case, the value type is marked
“Real/Character”.

Continued on next page

176
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

In this part This part contains the following chapters.

Chapter See Page

Chapter 1: Parameters File 178
Chapter 2: Model, Mining Sequence and Results Files 213
Chapter 3: Slope Profile, Profile Number and Additional Arcs 227
Files
Chapter 4: Pit List, Polygon and Opti-Cut Files 234
Chapter 5: Spreadsheet Files 240
Chapter 6: Auxiliary Files 265

File limitations There are limits to the numbers of various types of items that can be included in
these text files.
See Appendix I: Four-X System Limits and Precision on page 402 for details of
these limits.

177
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 1: Parameters File

Overview

Description Parameters Files (file extension “.par”) are text files that contain:
• The model layout
• The dimensions
• The slopes
• The materials
• The processing methods

How the Parameters Files can be created by:

Parameters File is
created • The Edit Parameters Program
• The user, with a text editor or a word processor in pure text mode

The programs that The Parameters File is read by each of the Four-X programs, although each
use the Parameters does not use all of the information it contains.
File

In this section This chapter contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

Layout 179
Line Types 180
Information in the Parameters File 193
Example Parameters File 212

178
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Layout

Introduction The Parameters File is a text file with different types of lines identified by a line
type number.
Note: If the Edit Parameters Program is used to prepare, modify and validate
the Parameters File, then it automatically enters the line numbers.

Line Each type of line contains certain information. Each type of line is referred to
as a “line type”.
The line types in the Parameters File must appear in the following order:
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Type 3
• For each sub-region:
- Type 4
- Type 5
- For each bearing and slope in the sub-region: Type 6
• Type 12
• Type 13
• One or more Type 14
• For each element type: Type 18
• For each grade-dependent expression: Type 19
• For each element type: Type 20
• For each rock-type: Type 21
• For each method/type combination for open pit:
- Type 25
- For each element: Type 26
• For each method/type combination for underground:
- Type 30
- For each element: Type 31
• For each processing method group: Type 35

The information contained in the line types is discussed in detail below.

179
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types

Introduction The information contained in the different line types must appear in a certain
order within that line type. This information and its position is detailed below.

Line type 1 The dimensions of a block and the origin co-ordinates

Columns Contents Value type

3 “1” Integer
6-15 Block size in the “X” or East-West direction. Real
16-25 Block size in the “Y” or North-South direction. Real
26-35 Block size in the “Z” or vertical direction. Real
36-45 Model framework origin co-ordinate in the “X” or Real
East-West direction (optional).
46-55 Model framework origin co-ordinate in the “Y” or Real
North-South direction (optional).
56-65 Model framework origin co-ordinate in the “Z” or Real
vertical direction (optional).

For more information about:

• Dimensions of a block, see page 193
• Model framework origin co-ordinates, see page 193

Line type 2 The dimensions of the model framework

Columns Contents Value type

3 “2” Integer
11-15 Number of blocks in the X direction. Integer
21-25 Number of blocks in the Y direction. Integer
31-35 Number of blocks in the Z direction. Integer

For more information about the dimension of the model framework, see page
193.

Continued on next page

180
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 3 General information – see also line type 13

Columns Contents Value type

3 “3” Integer
15 The active blocks indicator: Integer
• 1 - all blocks in the model framework are 1, 2 or 3
considered
• 2 - only blocks within the defined sub-regions
are considered
• 3 - only blocks that appear in the Model File are
considered
21-25 The number of sub-regions in the model. Integer
Note that this can be zero, in which case there
should be no line types 4 or 5 . This is significant
in the Structure Arcs program - see page 84.
45 The positional mining CAF flag: Integer
• 0 - mining CAFs are not used 0 or 1
• 1 - mining CAFs are used
55 The positional processing CAF flag: Integer
• 0 - processing CAFs are not used 0 or 1
• 1 - processing CAFs are used
59 The print unprocessed mineralisation flag: Integer
• 0 - quantities of unprocessed material are not 0 or 1
printed by the Optimization Program and the
Analysis Program
• 1 - quantities of unprocessed material are
printed by Optimization Program and the
Analysis Program
66-75 The restart interval in hours. Real
2.0 is used if this is blank.

For more information about:

• Active blocks indicator, see page 194
• Sub-regions, see page 201
• Positional mining CAF flag, see page 199
• Positional processing CAF flag, see page 199
• Restart interval, see page 195
• Print unprocessed mineralisation flag, see page 200

Continued on next page

181
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 4 The sub-region block limits

Columns Contents Value type

3 “4” Integer
11-15 The lowest X co-ordinate in terms of blocks. Integer
21-25 The highest X co-ordinate in terms of blocks. Integer
31-35 The lowest Y co-ordinate in terms of blocks. Integer
41-45 The highest Y co-ordinate in terms of blocks. Integer
51-55 The lowest Z co-ordinate in terms of blocks. Integer
61-65 The highest Z co-ordinate in terms of blocks. Integer

Note: The Structure Arcs Program requires a minimum of three benches for any
sub-region which is at the top of the model framework.
For more information about sub-region block limits, see Sub-region
information, starting on page 201.

Line type 5 Slopes, benches and default block tonnage

Columns Contents Value type

3 “5” Integer
11-15 The number of slope angles for this sub-region. Integer
21-25 The number of benches to consider when Integer
generating the structure arcs (≥ 2).
26-35 The sub-region default block tonnage. Real

For more information about slopes, benches and the sub-region default block
tonnage, see Sub-region information, starting on page 201.

Continued on next page

182
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 6 Slope bearing and angle

Columns Contents Value type

3 “6” Integer
6-15 Bearing (0-360) clockwise in degrees from the Real
positive Y direction – any bearing if only one
slope. These lines must be in ascending order of
bearing.
16-25 Required pit slope (0.01-89.99) in degrees from Real
the horizontal.

The bearings and slopes for a sub-region, together with the number of benches
to consider from line type 5, constitute the definition of a slope profile.

For more information about slope, bearing and angle, see Sub-region
information, starting on page 201.

Line types 7 to 11 Line types 7 to 11 are not used.

Line type 12 General formatting requirements

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “12” Integer
Decimal places for† :
6-10 • Tonnes in a block (≤ 8) Integer
11-15 • Totals of tonnes (≤ 8) Integer
26-30 • Revenue Factor values (≤ 8). Integer
36-40 • Small amounts of currency (≤ 4) Integer
41-45 • Currency totals (≤ 8) Integer
67-70 Any character(s) in these columns, other than Character
blank(s), will become the currency character(s) in
the Analysis Program printouts.
Blank implies “$”.

Continued on next page

† Note: A negative number will scale the output by that power of ten. Example: -3 for thousands.

183
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 13 General information – see also line type 3

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “13” Integer
6-15 The general default block tonnage. Real
16-25 The mining dilution factor. Real
26-35 The mining recovery factor. Real
36-45 Not used. Real
50 Air flag A: Integer
• 1 - air blocks are considered in the optimization 1 or 2
• 2 - air blocks are not considered in the
optimization
55 Air flag B: Integer
• 1 - air blocks are not included in the Results 1, 2 or 3
File
• 2 - those air blocks that would fall within the pit
wall if it were extended into the air, are included
in the Results File
Air flag A must be 1.
• 3 - all air blocks in the Model File are included
in the Results File
56-65 The reference mining cost. Real
70 Ore selection method flag: Integer
• 1 - by cut-off 1 or 2
• 2 - by cash flow

For more information about:

• Mining dilution factor, see page 195
• Mining recovery factor, see page 196
• Air flag A, see page 197
• Air flag B, see page 198
• Reference mining cost, see page 195
• Ore selection method flag and ore selection methods, see pages 196 and 346

Continued on next page

184
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 14 There are two different formats for line type 14:
• Single Revenue Factor value
• Revenue Factor value range
Successive line types 14 can have either format in any order, provided that the
resulting Revenue Factor values form an ascending sequence.
Four-X uses Revenue Factor as a means of varying the pit shells. With Four-X,
it is more appropriate to talk of a base case revenue, and then scale the revenue
up or down to create the inner and outer pit shells.
The factor varies, typically, from 0.25 to 2 in 40 to 100 steps.

Line type 14 – Single Revenue Factor value

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “14” Integer
6-15 Single Revenue Factor value. It must be: Real
• >0
- and -
• > any previous Revenue Factor

Line type 14 – Revenue Factor value range

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “14” Integer
6-15 The start of the Revenue Factor range. It must be: Real
• >0
- and -
• > any previous Revenue Factor
16-25 The step size of Revenue Factor range Real
It must be a positive number.
26-35 The end of Revenue Factor range Real
It must be greater than the start of the range.

The start value is stored, then repeatedly increased by the step value and stored,
until it is greater than the end value. The last value stored is less than or equal
to the end value.
For more information about Revenue Factor values, see page 200.

Continued on next page

185
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line types 15 to 17 Line types 15 to 17 are not used†.

Line type 18 Elements

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “18” Integer
6-9 The element type code. Character
This code must start with an alphabetic character.
It is case insensitive.
21-25 The position in the Model File. Integer
Decimal places for:
26-30 • Units of this element in a block (≤ 8) Integer
31-35 • Totals of units of this element (≤ 8) Integer
36-40 • Grades and cut-offs for this element (≤ 4) Integer
Note: A negative number will scale the output by that power of ten.
Example: -3 for thousands.

For more information about elements, see page 204.

Continued on next page

† Line types 15 to 17 are used, however, in Four-D Parameters Files.

186
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 19 Grade-dependent Expressions

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “19” Integer
6-9 Expression code: 1-4 characters. Character
An alphabetic code which can be used in later lines
to represent the grade expression that follows.
15 Expression usage. Use:
• M for a rock-type mining CAF
Grades† mined will be used.
• W for a rehabilitation cost
Grades† of waste will be used.
• I for a processing cost or a recovery
Grades† input to the mill will be used.
17-80 Expression text. Character

For more information about expressions, see pages 204 and 282.

Line type 20 Element prices

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “20” Integer
6-9 The element type code. This code must have Character
appeared in a line type 18.
16-25 The selling cost per unit. Real/
Character
26-35 The price per unit. Real/
Character

Note: It is not usually meaningful to use expressions for selling cost or price,
except when the ore itself is the product (e.g. for iron ore). For more
information about elements, see page 204.

Continued on next page

†Note that grades here are for individual parcels. Contrast this with expressions for positional CAFs in the
Re-blocking Program, which are average grades for the whole block.

187
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 21 Rock-types

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “21” Integer
6-9 The rock-type code. This code is case insensitive. Character
16-25 The rock-type mining CAF. Real/
Character
26-35 The rehabilitation cost per tonne. Real/
Character
36-45 The processing throughput factor. Real

For more information about rock-types, see page 205.

Line types 22 to 24 Line types 22 to 24 are not used.

Line type 25 Processing data for open pit mining

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “25” Integer
6-9 The processing method code. This code is case Character
insensitive.
11-14 The rock-type code. This code must appear in a Character
line type 21.
16-25 The processing cost per tonne. Real/
Character

Note: If more than one processing method is available for a particular rock-type
and ore selection is by cut-off, then the methods must be specified in the order
in which they are to be applied.
For example, for a mill and heap leach operation, it is important to describe the
mill first.
Four-X first checks to see if a parcel is at, or above, the cut-off(s) for the mill.
If it is, the parcel would be sent to the mill. Only if the parcel is not good
enough for the mill will it be checked against the heap leach cut-offs.
For more information about processing methods, see page 211.

Continued on next page

188
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 26 Element data for open pit mining

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “26” Integer
6-9 The element type code. This code must appear in Character
a line type 20. This code is case insensitive.
15 Cut-off control flag†: Character
• C = cut-off controlled
• N = not controlled
16-25 The element processing cost per unit. Real/
Character
26-35 The processing recovery fraction. Real/
Character
36-45 The processing recovery threshold. Real
46-55 The minimum. Real
56-65 The maximum. Real

For more information about element data for open pit mining, see page 207.

Line types 27 to 29 Line types 27 to 29 are not used.

Continued on next page

† Note: When considering any second and subsequent processing methods applicable to a particular rock-
type:
• An element cannot be controlled by a cut-off, unless it was controlled for the previous method.
• All elements which were controlled by a cut-off in the previous method must be controlled in this method,
unless the number of controlled elements is reduced to 1.
This is not relevant if ore selection is by cash flow.

189
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 30 Processing data for underground mining

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “30” Integer
6-9 The processing method code. This code is case Character
insensitive.
11-14 The rock-type code. This code must appear in a Character
line type 21.
16-25 The processing cost per tonne. Real/
Character

The codes, values and usages are identical to those for open pit mining.
For more information about element data, see Processing-method/ rock-type
information - open pit mining on page 207.
For details of when and how to allow for the effects of underground mining on
the open pit, see page 326.

Continued on next page

190
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 31 Element data for underground mining

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “31” Integer
6-9 The element type code. This code must appear in Character
a line type 20. This code is case insensitive.
15 Cut-off control flag†: Character
• C = cut-off controlled C or N
• N = not controlled
16-25 The element processing cost per unit. Real/
Character
26-35 The processing recovery fraction. Real/
Character
36-45 The processing recovery threshold. Real
46-55 The minimum. Real
56-65 The maximum. Real

The codes, values and usages are identical to those for open pit mining.
For more information about element data, see Processing-method/ rock-type
information - open pit mining on page 207.
See page 326 for details of when and how to use them to allow for the effects of
underground mining on the open pit.

Line types 32 to 34 Line types 32 to 34 are not used.

Continued on next page

† Note: When considering any second and subsequent processing methods applicable to a particular rock-
type:
• An element cannot be controlled by a cut-off, unless it was controlled for the previous method.
• All elements which were controlled by a cut-off in the previous method must be controlled in this method,
unless the number of controlled elements is reduced to 1.
This is not relevant if ore selection is by cash flow.

191
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Line Types, Continued

Line type 35 Processing method group

Columns Contents Value type

2-3 “35” Integer
6-9 Processing method or previous group code 1 Character
11-14 Processing method or previous group code 2 Character
16-19 Processing method or previous group code 3 Character
etc. up to…
76-79 Processing method or previous group code 15 Character

All codes are case insensitive, and should be left-justified within the columns
indicated.
To include a group inside another group, use a group code.
For example, “GR_1” refers to the first group defined, “GR_2” to the second,
etc.
Group codes cannot be used until after the group has been defined.

For more information about processing method groups, see page 211.

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank line
comment lines or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "

Comma delimited As an alternative to the fixed column layout given above, Parameters Files can
format be in comma delimited format, with the values on each line separated by
commas.

192
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File

Introduction This topic lists the information contained in the Parameters File.

Dimensions of a The dimensions are in the X, Y and Z directions† .

block
Note: In Four-X, every block must be the same size and shape.

Dimensions of the The model framework size is expressed as the number of blocks in the X, Y and
model framework Z directions.

Origin co-ordinates The origin of the model framework is at the outer corner of the block with
co-ordinates 1,1,1.
Note: It is not at the centre of this block.
The provision of origin co-ordinates is optional, but they can be useful when
Results Files are read back into GMPs, and when reading in a Polygon File.
They must be co-ordinates in a system which is aligned parallel to the model
framework.
The Re-blocking Program, can change the origin of a model framework and
will adjust the origin co-ordinates when it creates a new Parameters File.
If the output of the Re-blocking Program is being limited to blocks whose
centres lie within a polygon specified by the user, then the X and Y
co-ordinates of the origin are subtracted from the X and Y co-ordinates of each
of the points which define the polygon. This gives the co-ordinates within the
model framework.
If the origin co-ordinates do not appear in the Parameters File, they are
assumed to be zero.

General formatting The general formatting requirements provide the number of decimal places to
requirements be used for the input and output of various quantities, other than those
associated with elements.
Scaling by a power of ten is also possible (e.g. use -3 to show numbers in
thousands) but this only affects output.

Continued on next page

†Note: We use X, Y and Z as co-ordinates in Four-X because some models are not aligned North-South.
However, in general, the positive X direction corresponds to East, the positive Y direction corresponds to
North, and the positive Z direction corresponds to up.

193
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Active blocks The active blocks indicator specifies which blocks you want Four-X to work on
indicator when doing the optimizations. There are three possible indicators: 1, 2 and 3.

Active blocks indicator of 1: all of the blocks in the model framework are
considered for mining.
If the Parameters File has sub-regions, the sub-region(s) that you define must
fill the volume of the model framework exactly. This is because the slopes are
defined separately for each sub-region, and, if all blocks are to be considered,
then slopes must be defined for all blocks.
This is the most commonly used active blocks indicator.

Active blocks indicator of 2: only the blocks within sub-regions are

considered for mining.
The sub-regions do not need to fill the model framework. If blocks occur in the
Model File in regions not included in a sub-region, they are rejected.
Where to use an active blocks indicator of 2
An active blocks indicator of 2 can be useful in certain unusual circumstances.
For example, if you have very complicated slope requirements that require a
large number of sub-regions to define, you may exceed the number allowed by
Four-X. In this case you may be able to omit some because you know that
mining will not take place in these areas. However, it will probably be better
under these circumstances to define your slopes with a Slope Profile File and a
Profile Numbers File. This approach is much more flexible.

Active blocks indicator of 3: only blocks provided in the Model File are
considered during optimization. That is, the rest of the blocks in the model
framework are completely ignored.
With an active blocks indicator of 3, you will need to ensure that every relevant
block that could be mined is included in the Model File. You must also ensure
that structure arcs are generated for all of these blocks.
You can do this by using an active blocks indicator of 1 for the Structure Arcs
Program run, or an active blocks indicator of 2 with sub-regions that totally
enclose the volume of interest.
Any structure arcs in the Structure Arcs File that do not apply to blocks in the
Model File are discarded by the Optimization Program.

Refer to page 215 for a discussion of which blocks to include in the Model File.

Continued on next page

194
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Restart interval The Optimization Program periodically dumps all of the data from memory to
its Work File to enable a later restart. This can be extremely helpful if, for
example, a long optimization run is terminated because of power failure.
The restart interval lets you specify the time between these dumps. Restart
dumps do not take long, but it would be a waste of time to do them too often.
Note: If the restart interval is left blank, restart dumps occur every two hours.

Reference mining The reference mining cost is the cost of mining waste of undefined rock-type at
cost the Reference Block.
Cost of mining waste of a defined rock-type at the Reference Block
The cost of mining waste of a defined rock-type at the Reference Block is
obtained by multiplying the Reference Mining Cost by the appropriate
rock-type mining CAF.
Cost of mining waste of any type at a particular block
The cost of mining waste of any type at a particular block is obtained by
multiplying the cost of mining the same rock as waste at the Reference Block
by the positional mining CAF for the block in question.

Mining dilution When mining at the edge of an ore body, it can be difficult to avoid mining
factor some waste as well. This waste dilutes the grade of the material that is
processed. The mining dilution factor allows an overall mining dilution to be
applied.
Example: A five percent dilution would be effected by a mining dilution factor
of 1.05.
Note: The dilution is applied by increasing the tonnage of mineralised parcels,
regardless of whether there is any waste (non-parcel tonnage or parcels with no
elements) in the block. This can lead to a negative waste tonnage for an
individual block and, in regions of the pit that are entirely mineralised, negative
stripping ratios are possible.

Continued on next page

195
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Mining recovery When mining at the edge of the ore body, it is possible to miss some of the ore.
factor It is also possible to lose some of the ore during transportation to the processing
mill.
The mining recovery factor allows an overall mining recovery to be applied.
Example: A five percent mining loss would be effected by a mining recovery
factor of 0.95.
Note: Do not confuse mining recovery with processing recovery.

General default Default block tonnages are used by the Re-blocking Program and by the
block tonnage Optimization Program (where the active blocks indicator is set to 1 or 2) for
blocks that are not specified in the Model File.
Default block tonnages can be blank (meaning undefined), or a value that is
zero (to represent air), or positive.
If a value is supplied, then that value is used as the default block tonnage
everywhere in the model, except within sub-regions that have their own default
block tonnage (see Sub-region information, starting on page 201).

Ore selection The ore selection method flag controls how Four-X selects ore for processing
method flag from the available parcels. There are two possible flag settings: 1 and 2.

Ore selection method flag set to 1

Selection by cut-off
Ore is selected by comparing the grades of the material with pre-calculated
processing cut-offs. If the material does not satisfy the cut-offs, it is treated as
waste.
If more than one processing method is applicable, the grades are compared with
the cut-offs of each in turn, in the order in which they are specified in the
Parameters File.

Ore selection method flag set to 2

Selection by cash flow
Ore is selected by comparing the cash flow which would be produced by
processing it, and the cash flow which would be produced by mining it as
waste. If the cash flow from processing it is higher, the material is treated as
ore. If not, it is treated as waste.
If more than one processing method is applicable, the one which produces the
highest cash flow is used.

Continued on next page

196
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Ore selection method flag (continued)

Usually, the actions will be the same in both cases, but see page 367 for further
details.

Air flag A Air flag A controls whether air blocks are included or excluded, during pit
optimization. There are two possible flag settings: 1 and 2.

Air flag A set to 1: air blocks are included in the pit optimization. This is
required if you are going to use the Mining Width Program.

Air flag A set to 2: air blocks are not included in the optimization.
It is often quicker to optimize without the air blocks because of the reduction in
the number of blocks the program has to work with. This should only be done
if no part of the initial topography is steeper than the required mining
slopes.
It is important to note that the structure arcs, which define the slopes during
optimization, rely on “chaining”. That is, if there is an arc from block P to
block Q, and one from block Q to block R, then chaining will ensure that, if
block P is mined, block R will be mined also.
However, this will only happen if block Q is considered during optimization. If
it is not, then neither the arc P-Q, nor the arc Q-R will be used, and this link
between mining P and mining R will be lost.
Example
The diagram below shows a situation where mining block P can only be
guaranteed to trigger the mining of block R, if air blocks are included in the
optimization.

Air R

P Earth

Continued on next page

197
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Air flag A (continued)

However, note that because optimization is in three dimensions, and because

structure arcs vary greatly in length, you cannot assume that, if air is excluded,
block R, above, will not be mined.
If the topography is steeper than the required slopes, and if air blocks are
excluded, then the results are unpredictable.
Air flag A is set to 1 if the active blocks indicator is 3.

Air flag B Air flag B controls which air blocks from the Model File are included in the
Results File. There are three possible flag settings: 1, 2 and 3.

Air flag B set to 1: air blocks are not included in the Results File, regardless of
whether air blocks were included or excluded during optimization.

Air flag B set to 2: only those air blocks are included in the Results File that
would be “mined” as part of the largest pit extended into the air.
Example
In this diagram the blocks in area B are included in the Results File.

A Air
B C

Earth

Note: This option is only available if air blocks are included during
optimization (i.e. air flag A needs to be set to 1).
Note also: Air flag B is set to 2 if the active blocks indicator is 3.

Continued on next page

198
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Air flag B (continued)

Air flag B set to 3: all air blocks are included in the Results File. This is
required if you are going to use the Mining Width Program.
Example
In the diagram, above, the blocks in areas A, B and C are included in the
Results File.

Positional mining The positional mining CAF flag controls whether or not the positional mining
CAF flag CAFs are used by the Optimization Program and the Analysis Program. There
are two possible flag settings: 1 and 0.
Positional mining CAF flag set to 1: the positional mining CAFs in the Model
File are used by the Optimization Program and the Analysis Program.
Positional mining CAF flag set to 0: the positional mining CAFs in the Model
File are not used by the Optimization Program nor the Analysis Program.
This flag does not affect the use of rock-type mining CAFs.

Positional The positional processing CAF flag controls whether or not the positional
processing CAF processing CAFs are used by the Optimization Program and the Analysis
flag Program. There are two possible flag settings: 1 and 0.
Positional processing CAF flag set to 1: positional processing CAFs in the
Model File are used by the Optimization Program and the Analysis Program.
Positional processing CAF flag set to 0: positional processing CAFs in the
Model File are not used by the Optimization Program nor the Analysis
Program.

Continued on next page

199
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Print unprocessed The print unprocessed mineralisation flag controls whether or not the
mineralisation flag Optimization Program and the Analysis Program report the total tonnage and
element content of any mineralised material that is mined but not processed.
These quantities can be useful when reconciling the results of different runs.
There are two possible flag settings: 1 and 0.
Print unprocessed mineralisation flag set to 1: the Optimization Program and
the Analysis Program report the total tonnage and element content of any
mineralised material that is mined but not processed.
Print unprocessed mineralisation flag set to 0: the Optimization Program and
the Analysis Program do not report the total tonnage and element content of
any mineralised material that is mined but not processed.
Note: Parcels with zero element content, i.e. defined waste, are never reported
by this facility.

Revenue Factor The Optimization Program uses a Revenue Factor to scale base case prices up
values or down, in order to control what nested pits are to be produced.
Individual values and/or ranges can be specified. Note that the resultant
sequence of values must be in ascending order.
As a general rule, you should start with a range of Revenue Factor values from
0.3 to 2.0 (say 0.3 to 2.0 in steps of 0.02).
The aim is to get 50 or more pits, ranging in size from less than one year’s
production to much bigger than you expect to mine. These pits will enable you
to do realistic sequencing and scheduling during analysis.
Note: It is irrelevant if you do not expect to design a pit with only a one year
life. The inner pits are required for sequencing and to guide you to the best
place to start mining.
The number of pits will be reduced if:
• The ore body is such that some of the lower values do not produce a pit at all
- or -
• Successive Revenue Factor values are so close together that the change does
not add even one block to the pit outline.
If this is the case, you may want to rearrange the values.

Continued on next page

200
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Sub-region Sub-regions are defined on page 344.

information
For each sub-region you define, you provide the following information:
• The block limits
• The sub-region default block tonnage
• A slope profile consisting of:
- Slope angle information
For each slope angle: the bearing, and the slope
- The number of benches to consider for arc generation
This information is discussed below.
A Parameters File with no sub-regions is valid, but then the Structure Arcs
Program will demand an Additional Arcs File, which will have to contain all of
the required arcs.
As different programs require different sub-region information, it is often useful
to use different Parameters Files, with different sub-region layouts for this
purpose.

Block limits
The size and location of a sub-region is specified by its lowest and highest
block numbers in the X, Y and Z directions.
An example of the specification of sub-regions in this way is given in the
Appendix on page 344.

Sub-region default block tonnage

Default block tonnages are used by the Re-blocking Program and by the
Optimization Program (where the active blocks indicator is set to 1 or 2) for
blocks that are not specified in the Model File.
This can be blank (meaning undefined), or a value that is zero (to represent air),
or positive.
If a value is supplied, then, within this sub-region, that value is used in place of
any general default block tonnage (see page General default block tonnage, on
page 196).
Note that the default block tonnage is only relevant for blocks that are not
included in the Model File.

Continued on next page

201
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Sub-region information (continued)

Rock density
If the density of rock varies within the model framework, but the variation can
be simulated by allocating different default block tonnages to different
sub-regions, then sub-region default block tonnages can be useful.
It is common for users to simulate variations in density with depth by setting up
a Parameters File having a number of shallow sub-regions, with each carrying a
different default block tonnage. These sub-regions may be too shallow to
adequately reproduce the slopes, but the programs that use the default block
tonnages do not use the slopes and vice versa, so that different Parameters Files
can be used for the two purposes.

Slope angle information

For each slope angle you provide the bearing and slope.

Bearing
Bearings are expressed in degrees, clockwise from the positive Y direction –
usually North.
It is very important to note that bearings are given instead of wall positions.
Any walls at right angles to the bearings, in a particular slope region, will have
the given slope applied.
Example
In the diagram below the slope specified for a bearing of 45 degrees would be
used by the program in the positions indicated by the arrows.

45

Continued on next page

202
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Sub-region information (continued)

Slope
Slopes are expressed in degrees from horizontal. Thus 50 degrees is steeper
than 45 degrees.
For information on:
• How Four-X handles slopes, see page 331
• Variation of slopes with rock-type, see page 324

Number of benches to consider for arc generation

You can control the accuracy of slope reproduction by controlling the number
of benches that are considered when the structure arcs are generated by the
Structure Arcs Program.
This is explained in the Appendix section on page 334.
The more benches that you specify, the greater the accuracy, and the longer the
optimization will take.
You may have to do a little experimentation to find the best compromise, but as
a starting value we suggest using 8 times the largest of the two horizontal
dimensions of a block divided by the height of a block. That is:

Max ( BX , BY ) × 8
BZ

Where:
• BX is the X co-ordinate of a block (horizontal dimension)
• BY is the Y co-ordinate of a block (horizontal dimension)
• BZ is the Z co-ordinate of a block (height)
With normal slopes of 40-50 degrees from the horizontal, this will usually give
an average slope error of the order of one degree.
Example
If the blocks are dimensioned 20 by 30 by 10 in the X, Y and Z directions, you
would start with 24 (=30x8/10).

Continued on next page

203
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Grade dependent For each grade dependent expression, the user must specify:
expression
information • An expression identification code
• The expression usage
• The definition of the expression
Expression codes can be used in place of constants to provide user defined
grade-dependent values for:
Note that it is not usually meaningful to use expressions
• Selling costs
• Prices } for selling cost or price, except when the ore itself is
the product (e.g. for iron ore).
• Rock-type mining CAFs
• Rehabilitation costs
• Processing costs
• Element processing costs
- and -
• Recovery fractions
For more information about expressions, see page 282.

Element For each element, the user must specify:

information
• An element type code
• The position in the Model File
• The element formatting requirements
• The selling cost per unit
• The price per unit

Element type code

The element type code is an alphanumeric code of from 1 to 4 characters which
identifies a particular element in the model. It is case insensitive.
Examples: GOLD, Cu
This code must not contain a period (.) or slash (/), and must not match any
spreadsheet code (e.g. ROCK).
If this element is to be recovered, it must be specified in the element processing
section of a method.

Position in Model File

The position in the Model File specifies the position of the element data in the
Model File (i.e. whether the data is the first, second, etc. element value).

Continued on next page

204
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Element information (continued)

Element formatting requirements

The element formatting requirements provide the number of decimal places to
be used for the input and output of element quantities in a parcel, total
quantities and grades.
Scaling by a power of ten is also possible, but this only affects output.
Example: Use -3 to show numbers in thousands.

Selling cost per unit

The selling cost per unit is the cost involved in selling a unit of the element,
where a unit is defined by the values used for quantities of the element in the
Model File.
The code for a grade-dependent expression can be used instead of a constant,
but it would only be meaningful when the ore itself is the product, as in iron
ore.

Price per unit

The price per unit is the price for a unit of the element where a unit is defined
by the values used for quantities of the element in the Model File. It is used
with the Revenue Factors to determine element prices for different pit shells.
The code for a grade-dependent expression can be used instead of a constant,
but would only be meaningful when the ore itself is the product, as in iron ore.

Rock-type For each rock-type, the user must specify:

information
• The rock-type code
• The rock-type mining CAF
• The rehabilitation cost per tonne
• The processing throughput factor

Rock-type code
The rock-type code is an alphanumeric code of from 1 to 4 characters which
identifies a particular rock-type in the model. It is case insensitive.
Examples: OXID, SULF, WTHR
This code must not contain a period (.) or slash (/), and must not match any
spreadsheet code (e.g. ROCK).
If this code does not also appear in a method/type line (see below), this
rock-type is known as defined waste.

Continued on next page

205
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Rock-type information (continued)

Rock-type mining CAF

The rock-type mining CAF is the ratio between the cost of mining this type of
rock as waste, and the cost of mining undefined blocks.
Both costs should be the same as they are at the Reference Block
(see page 295), regardless of whether there is any of this type of rock in the
Reference Block.
The cost per tonne of mining a particular parcel as waste is the product of the
reference mining cost, the rock-type mining CAF, and the positional mining
CAF (if used).
If any rock of this type is processed, that is, mined as ore, any extra mining
cost associated with this should be included in the processing cost (see below).
Note: The code for a grade-dependent expression can be used instead of a
constant.

Rehabilitation cost per tonne

The rehabilitation cost is the cost associated with rehabilitating waste dumps
chemically, visually and ecologically. This cost is applied if the material is
treated as waste, but not if it is processed.
Note: During simulation with the Analysis Program, the cost is applied at the
time of mining, rather than at the actual time of rehabilitation. If these times
are very different, you may want to make some allowance for the discounting
which would occur.
Note also: The code for a grade-dependent expression can be used instead of a
constant.

Processing throughput factor

Some rock-types are easier to process than others, so that a processing
throughput limit for one rock-type may not be appropriate for another. The
situation is further complicated if a mixture of rock-types is being processed.
If the processing throughput factor is set greater than 1.0, then any processing
or group throughput limit applied to this rock-type is effectively increased, and
vice versa.
This factor has no effect on mining throughput.

Continued on next page

206
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Processing-method/ For each processing method/rock-type for open pit mining, the user must
rock-type specify the:
information - open
pit mining • Processing method code
• Rock-type code
• Processing cost
• Element information
For each element the:
- Element type code
- Cut-off control flag for selection by cut-off
- Element processing cost per unit
- Processing recovery fraction
- Processing recovery threshold
- Minimum
- Maximum
Processing method code
The processing method code is an alphanumeric code of from one to four
characters. It identifies the processing method to be used. It is case insensitive.
Examples: MILL, HEAP, CIL
This code must not contain a period (.) or slash (/), and must not match any
spreadsheet code (e.g. ROCK). In addition, it must not be the same as any
rock-type code.

Rock-type code
The rock-type code, which is case insensitive, must be one of the codes defined
for a rock-type.
The pairing of the method and type codes indicates that parcels of this
rock-type may be processed by this processing method, if it is economic to do
so. If a rock-type, even one containing elements, occurs in the Model File, but
is not paired with a processing method here, it will be treated as waste.

Continued on next page

207
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Processing-method/ rock-type information - open pit mining (continued)

Processing cost
The effective processing cost used by the Optimization Program and the
Analysis Program is the product of the processing cost defined here, and the
positional processing CAF for the particular block (if used).
The effective processing cost is used not only for calculating cash flows, but
also for calculating cut-offs.
Note that whenever cut-offs are output on the screen, in printed reports or in
spreadsheet data, they are shown for a positional processing CAF of 1.0.
The cut-offs used in deciding whether to process the parcels of a block may be
different from those shown if processing CAFs are being used. Typically they
are higher.
See page 366 for details of how the cut-offs and cut-overs are changed.
Note that the code for a grade-dependent expression can be used instead of a
constant.

Element information
For each element, the user must specify:
• The element type code
• The cut-off control flag for selection by cut-off
• The element processing cost per unit
• The processing recovery fraction
• The processing recovery threshold
• The minimum
• The maximum

Element type code

The element type code, which is case insensitive, must be one of the codes
defined for an element above.
See Element information on page 204.

Continued on next page

208
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Processing-method/ rock-type information - open pit mining (continued)

Cut-off control flag

The cut-off control flag dictates whether or not the element(s) are cut-off
controlled. This is only relevant when ore selection is by cut-off.
Even though an element may be a product, it need not be the subject of a
cut-off. For example, in a copper/gold mine, you may choose to operate with a
cut-off only for copper.
There are two possible flag settings: C and N.
Cut-off control flag set to C
If the cut-off control flag is set to C, then the element is cut-off controlled.
Cut-off control flag set to N
If the cut-off control flag is set to C, then the element is not cut-off controlled.
Note that when considering any second and subsequent processing methods
applicable to a particular rock-type:
• An element cannot be controlled by a cut-off unless it was controlled for the
previous method.
• All elements which were controlled by a cut-off in the previous method must
be controlled in this method, unless the number of controlled elements is
reduced to 1.

Element processing cost per unit

Costs can be calculated based on the units of each element input into the
process, where a unit is defined by the values used for quantities of the element
in the Model File. This is the element processing cost. It is in addition to the
general processing costs.
Note: The code for a grade-dependent expression can be used instead of a
constant.

Processing recovery fraction

The processing recovery fraction is the processing recovery (e.g. 0.93) at high
grade for this element.
Note: The code for a grade-dependent expression can be used instead of a
constant.

Continued on next page

209
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Processing-method/ rock-type information - open pit mining (continued)

Processing recovery threshold

The processing recovery threshold is a grade that is subtracted from the actual
grade of each parcel before the processing recovery fraction is applied.
If the processing recovery threshold is non-zero, the effective processing
recovery will decline with reducing grade. For further details see page 351.

The minimum
The minimum is used differently, depending on the type of ore selection in use.
See page 371.
If ore selection is by:
• Cut-off
This value sets a minimum for the cut-off.
When a cut-off or cut-over grade for this element is calculated by the
Optimization Program or the Utilities Program, it is compared with this
minimum. If it is lower than this minimum, then the minimum is substituted
and an asterisk (*) is printed next to it in the printouts.
• Cash flow
This value sets a minimum for the acceptable grade for this element.
Parcels with grades lower than this value are not processed by this method.
Minima can be used to obtain more control over the allocation of parcels in
relation to processing methods. However, care should be exercised when using
them during pit optimization. This is because their value does not change with
Revenue Factor, whereas the cut-offs and cash flows calculated by the
Optimization Program, the Analysis Program and the Utilities Program do.

Continued on next page

210
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Information in the Parameters File, Continued

Processing-method/ rock-type information - open pit mining (continued)

The maximum
This maximum is used differently, depending on the type of ore selection in
use. See page 372.
If ore selection is by:
• Cut-off - This value sets a maximum for the cut-off used. When a cut-off or
cut-over grade for this element is calculated by the Optimization Program or
the Utilities Program, it is compared with this maximum. If it is higher than
this maximum, then the maximum is substituted and an asterisk (*) is printed
next to it in printouts.
• Cash flow - This value sets a maximum for the acceptable grade for this
element. Parcels with grades higher than this value are not processed by this
method.
Maxima can be used to obtain more control over the allocation of parcels to
processing methods. However, care should be exercised when using them
during pit optimization. This is because their value does not change with
Revenue Factor, whereas the cut-offs and cash flows calculated by the
Optimization Program, the Analysis Program and the Utilities Program do.

Method/type The codes, values and usages are identical to those for open pit mining, above.
information for
underground See page 326 for details of when and how to use them to allow for the effects of
mining underground mining on the open pit.

Processing method A processing method group is defined by a list of from two to fifteen processing
group information method codes, or previous group codes. Group codes are of the form “GR_1”,
which refers to the first group defined, and “GR_2” which refers to the second,
and so forth.
Processing method groups are used by the Analysis Program to allow you to
limit the throughput of a group of processing methods (and/or previous
groups).
This can be useful if, for example, you have two different processing streams
but only one crusher. You define a group consisting of the two processing
codes, and the Analysis Program asks you for a throughput limit for the group.
Group codes can also be used wherever a method code can be used in
spreadsheet codes.

211
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Example Parameters File

Example The following is an example of a Parameters File.

Parameters File
1 10.00 10.00 8.00
2 33 64 23
3 1 2 1 1 1 2.00
4 1 33 1 64 19 23
5 1 4
6 0.00 37.00
4 1 33 1 64 1 18
5 2 10
6 0.00 50.00
6 180.00 55.00
12 2 0 5 2 0 $
13 2160 1.00 1.00 2 3 1.25 1

14 0.20 0.030 2.00

18 GOLD 2 3 0 4
18 SLVR 1 3 0 4
20 GOLD 0.000 400.000
20 SLVR 0.000 5.000

21 WTHR 1.000 0.000 1.000

21 OXID 1.000 0.000 1.000
21 SULF 1.000 0.000 1.000

25 MILL OXID 21.250

26 GOLD C 0.950
26 SLVR C 0.800
25 MILL SULF 18.750
26 GOLD C 0.900
26 SLVR C 0.800

There are limits to the number of items of various types that can be included.
The limits for your version of Four-X can be found by running the Utilities
Program. See page 171 for more information.

212
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 2: Model, Mining Sequence and Results Files

Overview

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Model File 214
Overview 214
Layout 218
Section B: Mining Sequence File 221
Section C: Results File 223

213
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Model File

Overview

Description Model Files (file extension “.mod”) consist of lines of text that provide details
of the block contents.
Each block contains:
• The block co-ordinates within the model framework
• A total block tonnage
If the total block tonnage is greater than the total of the parcel tonnages in the
block, then the excess is treated as undefined blocks with a rock-type mining
CAF of 1.0 and a rehabilitation cost of zero.
• Zero or more parcels
Each parcel contains a rock-type code, a tonnage and one or more element
contents. The rock-type code must match one of the rock-type codes in the
Parameters File. If the rock-type is waste, the element contents may be zero.
Each block may also include a positional mining CAF and/or a positional
processing CAF.

How the Model The Model File is created by:

File is created
• A GMP
• The Re-blocking Program

The programs that The Model File is used by:

use the Model File
• The Re-blocking Program
• The Optimization Program
• The Pit Visualisation Program
• The Utilities Program

Continued on next page

214
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Which blocks to Four-X must, in some way, be given the details of every block in its “region of
include interest”.
You can provide details of blocks through:
• The Model File
- and -
• The general and/or sub-region default block tonnages
If you do not provide details of a block in the Model File, the general and/or
sub-region default block tonnages will be used.
For more information about default block tonnages see:
• General default block tonnage, on page 196
• Sub-region information, starting on page 201
Region of interest
The area that Four-X looks at within the model framework is called the “region
of interest”. The region of interest depends on the setting of the active blocks
indicator in the Parameters File.
For more information about setting the active blocks indicator in the Parameters
File, see page 194.
Active blocks indicator of 1
If the active blocks indicator in the Parameters File is set to 1, then all blocks
within the rectangular model framework are of interest.

Rectangular model framework

Defined sub-region

Defined sub-region

Blocks supplied

Region of interest -
Active Blocks Indicator of 1

Continued on next page

215
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Which blocks to include (continued)

Active blocks indicator of 2

If the active blocks indicator in the Parameters File is set to 2, then only the
blocks that lie within defined sub-regions are of interest.
If the Model File contains blocks that lie outside any sub-region, then the
Re-blocking Program and the Optimization Program will reject them and tell
you that they have done so.

Rectangular model framework

Defined sub-region

Defined sub-region

Blocks supplied

Region of interest -
Active Blocks Indicator of 2

Setting the default block tonnage when the active blocks indicator is set to
1 or 2
If you have set the active blocks indicator to 1 or 2, it is appropriate to provide
details of every mineralised block and air block in the model framework, as a
minimum.
Every block that you do not provide will be assumed to have the appropriate
default block tonnage from the Parameters File.
Alternatively, you can provide all of the mineralised and waste blocks, and set
the default block tonnage to 0 (zero) to represent air.
If you cannot represent the variations of density through the general or
sub-region default block tonnages, then the Model File must include values for
all the waste blocks as well as the mineralised blocks. You can include them in
any case, if you wish, but it will make the file bigger, and some runs will be
slightly slower.

Continued on next page

216
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

Which blocks to include (continued)

Active blocks indicator of 3

If the active blocks indicator in the Parameters File is set to 3, then only the
blocks you supply are of interest, so the default block tonnages are irrelevant.

Rectangular model framework

Defined sub-region

Defined sub-region

Blocks supplied

Region of interest -
Active Blocks Indicator of 3

217
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Layout

Introduction The Model File consists of lines of text that describe a series of blocks.
In the Model File, the line types are:
• The Block Header Line
• The Parcel Line
The line types must appear in this order in each block.

Information The information contained in the Block Header Line and the Parcel Line
describing the describe the blocks. The information in these lines includes:
blocks
• The block X, Y and Z co-ordinates
• A positional mining CAF
• A positional processing CAF
• The block tonnage
• A zone number (optional)
The zone number can be used to indicate the source of the block in the
original model. Zone numbers can be displayed for checking by using the Pit
Visualisation Program.
• For each parcel (if any):
- The rock-type code
- The parcel tonnage
- For each element the units of the element in the parcel (note that this is a
quantity, not a grade)

Order of the This information contained in the Block Header Line and the Parcel Line must
information appear in a certain order. The tables below detail where this information is to
be shown in the Model File.

Continued on next page

218
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Layout, Continued

Block Header Line

Columns Contents Value type
2-4 Block index in the X or East direction. Integer
5-7 Block index in the Y or North direction. Integer
8-10 Block index in the Z or up direction. Note that the Integer
vertical index increases upwards, not downwards.
12-13 Number of parcel lines to follow this line (this may Integer
be zero).
17-26 Positional mining CAF. Real
28-37 Positional processing CAF. Real
39-48 Total tonnage of the block (zero if the block is Real
entirely air).
50-59 Zone number (optional). Integer

Parcel Line
Columns Contents Value type
2-4 Block index in the X or East direction. Integer
5-7 Block index in the Y or North direction. Integer
8-10 Block index in the Z or up direction. Integer
12-15 Rock-type code. Character
17-26 Parcel tonnes (it must be positive). Real
28-37 Units of element 1 in the parcel. Real
39-48 Units of element 2 in the parcel. Real
50-59 Units of element 3 in the parcel. Real
61-70 Units of element 4 in the parcel. Real
72-81 Units of element 5 in the parcel. Real
83-92 Units of element 6 in the parcel. Real
94-103 Units of element 7 in the parcel. Real
105-114 Units of element 8 in the parcel. Real
116-125 Units of element 9 in the parcel. Real
127-136 Units of element 10 in the parcel. Real

Continued on next page

219
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Layout, Continued

Parcel Line (continued)

Note:
• Data is only required for the number of elements in the model
• The blocks can be in any order in the file

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank line
comment lines or comment line with any of the following characters: * ' ! "

Comma delimited As an alternative to the fixed column layout given above, Model Files can be in
format comma delimited format, with the values on each line separated by commas.
For more information, see Order of information in the text files on page 175.

Changing the When Model Files are created by the Re-blocking Program, by default they are
format of the created in fixed column layout. Refer to the instructions on page 176 for
Model File information about how to change the default format of the Model File.

220
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Mining Sequence File

Overview and Layout

Description Mining Sequence Files (file extension “.msq”) are text files that describe:
• Which blocks, and how much of each block is mined in each period of a
mining sequence, simulated by the Analysis Program
• The method used to process each parcel
Mining Sequence Files allow you to carry out further detailed studies in relation
to mining simulation.

How the Mining The Mining Sequence File is created by the Analysis Program.
Sequence File is
created

The programs that The Mining Sequence File is used by:

use the Mining
Sequence File • The Pit Visualisation Program
• The Utilities Program

Layout The format of the Mining Sequence File is identical to that of the Model File,
except that:
• A period and fraction is added to each block header
- and -
• A processing method is added to each parcel

Period and fraction

Columns Contents Value type

50-52 Period in which the following fraction of this block Integer
was mined
54-59 Fraction of the block mined in the period Real

Processing method
The processing method is added to each parcel after all of the element details
are listed. There is a one character space followed by the four character
method code. If the parcel was not processed, the code “-np-” appears.

Continued on next page

221
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Layout (continued)

The file is written in period order and, if any of the blocks for a period have a
fraction of less than 1.0, then the same blocks will appear again in the next
period.
Note that the economic conditions can be different in different periods so that,
if a block is mined partly in one period and partly in another, it is theoretically
possible for the processing method code to be different in the two periods for
the same parcel.

Changing the When Mining Sequence Files are created by the Analysis Program, they are by
format of the default created in fixed column layout. Refer to the instructions on page 176
Mining Sequence for information about how to change the default format of the Mining Sequence
File File.

222
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Results File

Overview and Layout

Description Results Files (file extension “.res”) are text files that contain details of the
optimizations and all of the blocks within the optimized pit for an infinite
Revenue Factor.

How the Results The Results File is created by:

File is created
• The Optimization Program
• The Re-blocking Program (by merging a Pit List File with a Model File)

The programs that The Results File is used by:

use Results File
• The Re-blocking Program which allows you to modify the contents of a
Results File
• The Pit Visualisation Program
• The Mining Width Program
• The Analysis Program
• The Utilities Program

Continued on next page

223
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Layout The format of the Results File is similar to that of the Model File except that it
has a special header section and the block detail headers have a pit number in
place of a zone number. The special header is used for internal purposes only.
The layout is as follows.

Results Header
Line
Columns Contents Value type
2-4 These columns contain a specific header code.
5-7 e.g. -1 1-97 0
8-10
12-13 0 Real
17-26 First pit. Real
28-37 Last pit (this includes the infinite pit). Real
39-48 0 Real
59-60 These columns contain either: Integer
• 0 = No Revenue Factor details
If the model has been re-blocked, the Revenue
Factor information will be excluded from the
Results File.
• 1 = Revenue Factor details

Continued on next page

224
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Revenue Factor This line is only used if 1 is displayed in columns 59-60, above.
Details Lines
Columns Contents Value type
2-4 These columns contain a specific header code.
5-7 e.g. -1 1-97 0
8-10
12-13 0 Real
17-26 Start of the Revenue Factor range Integer
28-37 End of the Revenue Factor range Integer
39-48 0 Real
50-59 The number of the smallest pit that the Revenue Integer
Factor is part of

There is one such line for each pit up to the last pit (the “infinite pit”).

The format of the Results File is then identical to that of the Model File, except
that columns 50-59 of the block header line are formatted as follows.

Columns Contents Value type

50-59 Number of the smallest pit that the block is part of. Integer

Unless air flag A is set to 1 during optimization, any air flags have zero in this
field. If air flag A is 1, each air block is output with the number of the pit shell
which would reach it if the slopes were extended up into the air.
The Results File is output in ascending order of X within Y within Z. Only
those blocks, including waste blocks, that are to be mined in the largest pit are
output. Air blocks may or may not be included, depending on the value of air
flag B in the Parameters File.
The first several “blocks” in a Results File are dummy blocks that carry
information about the optimizations that have been done. They are
distinguished by having a block index in the X direction (columns 2-4) of -1. If
you read a Results File into another package, these blocks should be ignored.

Continued on next page

225
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Comma delimited As an alternative to the fixed column layout given above, Results Files can be
format in comma delimited format, with the values on each line separated by commas.
For more information, see Order of information in the text files on page 175.

Changing the When Results Files are created by the Optimization Program and the
format of the Re-blocking Program, they are by default created in fixed column layout. Refer
Results File to the instructions on page 176 for information about how to change the default
format of the Results File.

226
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 3: Slope Profile, Profile Number and Additional Arcs
Files

Overview

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Slope Profile File 228
Section B: Profile Number File 230
Section C: Additional Arcs File 232

227
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Slope Profile File

Overview and Layout

Description Slope Profile Files (file extension “.slp”) are text files that describe one or more
slope profiles.
A slope profile consists of a series of bearing/slope pairs and the number of
benches to consider when creating arcs. Each sub-region in a Parameters File
contains a slope profile described in a line type 5 and one or more lines of
type 6.
A Slope Profile File provides an alternative way of describing a slope profile
which is independent of sub-regions.

How the Slope The Slope Profile File is created:

Profile File is
created • With a text editor

The program that The Slope Profile File is used by:

uses the Slope
Profile File • The Structure Arcs Program

Layout Slope Profile Files are made up of lines of text. The order of these lines in the
file is immaterial.
There are two different line types, and each has a pre-defined left-hand side
with numeric data on the right-hand side. The line types are described below.

Bearing and slope A “bearing and slope” line contains the following text:
line
FX.SlopeProfile.<n>.BearingSlope=<bearing>,<slope>
where:
• <n> is a profile number
• <bearing> is a bearing (0.00-360.00) clockwise in degrees from the positive
Y direction (Real)
• <slope> is the required pit slope (0.01-89.99) at the above bearing, in
degrees from the horizontal (Real)
• All other text is as shown - case is unimportant
This information has the same significance as that found in line type 6 of the
Parameters File. See page 183.

Continued on next page

228
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Benches to consider A “benches to consider” line contains the following text:

line
FX.SlopeProfile.<n>.BenchesToConsider=<benches>
where:
• <n> is a profile number (Integer)
• <benches> is the number of benches to consider when generating structure
arcs (Integer)
• All other text is as shown - case is unimportant
This information has the same significance as that found in columns 21-25 in
line type 5 of the Parameters File. See page 182.

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank line
comment lines or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "

Syntax The following syntax rules apply to the file as a whole:

• The slope profile numbers must form a continuous series, starting at 1.
• One “benches to consider” line and from 1 to 8 “bearing and slope” lines
must appear with each profile number.
• All the bearings for a particular profile number must be different.

Example !
! This file describes two slope profiles
!
FX.SlopeProfile.1.BearingSlope=0,50.5
FX.SlopeProfile.1.BearingSlope=180,55
FX.SlopeProfile.1.BenchesToConsider=10

FX.SlopeProfile.2.BearingSlope=0,37
FX.SlopeProfile.2.BenchesToConsider=6
!
! Although the lines could be in any order, it is
! easier to check them if you group them logically.
!

229
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Profile Number File

Overview and Layout

Description Profile Number Files (file extension “.pnu”) are text files that list the slope
profile number to be used for each block.
Profile Number Files, by supplying a profile number for each block, define the
slope regions in which each slope profile is to apply. The shapes of these slope
regions are thus completely arbitrary. Contrast this with the alternative
approach of defining slope regions by the rectangular sub-regions in the
Parameters File.
Profile Number Files will usually have a record for each block in the model
framework, but a default number can be used for blocks which are not included.

How the Profile The Profile Number File is created by:

Number File is
created • A GMP or user software

The program that The Profile Number File is used by:

uses the Profile
Number File • The Structure Arcs Program

Layout Profile Number Files are made up of lines of text that list the number of the
slope profile which is to apply to each block. The order of these lines in the file
is immaterial.

Continued on next page

230
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Order The text in the Profile Number File must appear in a certain order on each line.
The table below details where the information should be shown in the file.

Columns Contents Value type

2-4 Block index in the X or East direction. Integer
5-7 Block index in the Y or North direction. Integer
8-10 Block index in the Z or up direction. Integer
Note: The vertical index increases upwards, not
downwards.
13-15 Slope profile number. This must be the number of Integer
a slope profile provided in the Slope Profile File.
See page 228.

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank line
comment lines or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "

Comma delimited As an alternative to the fixed column layout given above, Profile Number Files
format can be in comma delimited format, with the values on each line separated by
commas. For more information, see Order of information in the text files on
page 175.

231
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Additional Arcs File

Overview and Layout

Description Additional Arcs Files (file extension “.add”) are text files that contain details of
extra structure arcs that you wish to add to those generated by Structure Arcs
Program for the slopes.

How the Additional The Additional Arcs File is created by the user, with a text editor or a word
Arcs File is created processor in pure text mode.

The programs that The Additional Arcs File is used by the Structure Arcs Program.
use the Additional
Arcs File

Uses of the Uses of an Additional Arcs File are described on page 314.
Additional Arcs
File

Layout Additional Arcs Files are made up of lines of text.

Each line of text contains two sets of block co-ordinates. These sets of
co-ordinates specify which blocks must be mined to uncover other blocks.

Continued on next page

232
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Order The block co-ordinates must appear in a certain order on each line in the
Additional Arcs File.
The table below details where the X, Y and Z co-ordinates are to be shown in
the file.

Columns Contents Value type

2-4 X co-ordinate in blocks for block “A” Integer
5-7 Y co-ordinate in blocks for block “A” Integer
8-10 Z co-ordinate in blocks for block “A” Integer
12-14 X co-ordinate in blocks for block “B” Integer
15-17 Y co-ordinate in blocks for block “B” Integer
18-20 Z co-ordinate in blocks for block “B” Integer

Each line specifies that if block “A” is to be mined, then block “B” must be
removed as well to uncover “A”

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank line
comment lines or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "

Comma delimited As an alternative to the fixed column layout given above, Additional Arcs Files
format can be in comma delimited format, with the values on each line separated by
commas. For more information, see Order of information in the text files on
page 175.

233
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 4: Pit List, Polygon and Opti-Cut Files

Overview

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Pit List File 235
Section B: Polygon File 237
Section C: Opti-Cut Files 239

234
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Pit List File

Overview and Layout

Description Pit List Files (file extension “.pil”) are text files that list the smallest numbered
pit that each block is part of. It is therefore like a Results File without the
details of the block contents.
Pit List Files can be used to simplify the input of pit outlines to your GMP, or
you can create them with your software, so that they describe push-backs that
you want to analyse with the Analysis Program. In this case, you merge them
with a Model File, using the Re-blocking Program, and then run the analysis on
the resulting pseudo Results File. By this method you can design your own
push-backs and then use the power of the Analysis Program to simulate the
mining of these push-backs under different conditions.

How the Pit List The Pit List File is created by:
File is created
• The Re-blocking Program from a Results File
• The Mining Width Program
- or -
• User software

The programs that The Pit List File is used by:

use the Pit List File
• The Re-blocking Program
It is merged with a Model File to created a Results File.
• The Mining Width Program

Layout Pit List Files are made up of lines of text that list the smallest numbered pit that
each block is part of. The order of these lines in the file is immaterial.

Continued on next page

235
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Order The text in the Pit List File must appear in a certain order on each line. The
table below details where the information should be shown in the file.

Columns Contents Value type

2-4 Block index in the X or East direction. Integer
5-7 Block index in the Y or North direction. Integer
8-10 Block index in the Z or up direction. Integer
Note: The vertical index increases upwards, not
downwards.
13-15 Number of the smallest pit that the block is part of. Integer

Note: If you create a Pit List File outside Four-X to describe push-backs, you
must ensure that push-back 1 can be completely mined out, before starting
push-back 2 etc. This is because the Analysis Program will assume that this
sequence will honour the slope requirements.

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank line
comment lines or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "

Comma delimited As an alternative to the fixed column layout given above, Pit List Files can be
format in comma delimited format, with the values on each line separated by commas.
For more information, see Order of information in the text files on page 175.

Changing the When Pit List Files are created by the Re-blocking Program or the Mining
format of the Width Program, they are by default created in fixed column layout. For
Model File information about how to change the default format of the Pit List File, refer to
the instructions on page 176.

236
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Polygon File

Overview and Layout

Description Polygon Files (file extension “.pol”) are text files containing a sequence of X,Y
co-ordinates that define the vertices of a polygon, in the order in which they
occur as the edge of the polygon is traversed.
The Polygon Files are used to limit the output blocks to those whose centres lie
within a polygon as specified in the file.

How the Polygon The Polygon File is created by the user.

File is created

The programs that The Polygon File is used by the Re-blocking Program.
use Polygon File

Layout Polygon Files consist of lines of text that each contain a set of X,Y
co-ordinates.
X and Y are expressed as distances, not blocks, in the co-ordinate system in
which the origin in Parameters File is expressed.
If no origin is given in the Parameters File, the co-ordinate system is assumed
to start at the lower left-hand corner of the lower left-hand column of blocks in
the model framework.
All X,Y points must lie within the model framework.

Example
Given the following values:

Origin in the Parameters File 9000,3400,340

Block dimensions 10M,12M,8M
Model framework dimensions in 78,47,30
blocks

• Each X value must lie between 9000 and 9000+78x10=9780.

• Each Y value must lie between 3400 and 3400+47x12=3964.

Continued on next page

237
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Order The X, Y co-ordinates must appear in a certain order in the Polygon File.
The table below details where the X, Y co-ordinates are to be shown in the file.

Columns Contents Value type

1-10 X co-ordinate. Real
11-20 Y co-ordinate. Real

Note: The points must lie in sequence around the polygon, but can be ordered
either clockwise or anti-clockwise. There is no need for the last point to be the
same as the first point because the Re-blocking Program automatically joins the
last to the first.
The Re-blocking Program selects blocks with centres which lie within the
polygon.

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank line
comment lines or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "

Comma delimited As an alternative to the fixed column layout given above, Polygon Files can be
format in comma delimited format, with the values on each line separated by commas.

238
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Opti-Cut Files

Introduction Two types of Opti-Cut files can be created by the Analysis Program.
These are:
• The Sequence Text File (file extension .stx)
Sequence Text Files are text files that describe the physical resource and the
proposed mining sequence.
• The Economic Text File (file extension .etx)
Economics Text Files are text files that contain detailed information about an
economic scenario and how the Opti-Cut optimization is to be done.
The format of these files is given in the Opti-Cut User Manual.
Note: In order for the Analysis Program to create the Opti-Cut Files, the
initialization file must contain a line which reads Opti-Cut=Yes in the
[System] section. For more information, refer to page 391.
Note: Since development and enhancement of Opti-Cut is done independently
of that of Four-X, it is likely that the two programs will get out of step from
time to time, and the Economic Text File will require some adjustment before
being used. In any case some Four-X features, such as expressions, cannot be
automatically translated into Opti-Cut terms.

Time costs If you have not handled time costs explicitly in Four-X, or if you wish to use
stockpiles, then the Economics Text File will require modification before being
used in Opti-Cut.
Since the philosophies of the two programs are quite different, it is probably a
good idea to check the Economics Text File in any case.

239
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 5: Spreadsheet Files

Overview

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Spreadsheet Definition File 241
Overview 241
Layout 242
Codes 243
Guidelines and Examples 253
Application of Spreadsheet Codes 255
Section B: Spreadsheet Output File 263

240
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Spreadsheet Definition File

Overview

Description Spreadsheet Definition Files (file extension “.ssd”) are text files which control
the data that the Analysis Program outputs to Spreadsheet Output Files.

How the The Spreadsheet Definition Files are created and modified using a text editor or
Spreadsheet a word processor in pure text mode.
Definition File is
created

The programs that The Spreadsheet Definition File is used by the Analysis Program to control the
use the Spreadsheet data that it outputs to the Spreadsheet Output File.
Definition File

Output The Spreadsheet Definition File can specify the following tables of values as
output in the Spreadsheet Output File:
• A period table
Period information includes period tonnages, strip ratios, grades, cash flows
and start/end benches and pits.
• A grand totals table
Grand total values are those that appear at the end of each schedule report.
Common values, such as unit rates, mining cost, product price, discount rate
and tonnage limits, that apply to both periods and grand totals can also be
output.
For more information, see Section B: Spreadsheet Output File, on page 263.

241
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Layout

Line types Spreadsheet Definition Files are made up of lines of text. The data is not in
fixed field positions. Only its sequence is important.
Each line of text starts with a line type. The line types for the Spreadsheet
Definition File are:
• PER
- Lines starting with PER specify which values should appear in the period
table, and their order.
• GRA
- Lines starting with GRA specify which values should appear in the grand
totals table and their order.

Information Line types are followed by a series of codes. Codes may appear more than
following line types once in a line, if required.
Example

<line type> <code> <code> <code>

The following topic discusses codes in detail.

242
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes

Introduction Codes are made up of a keyword which may or may not be followed by an
attribute.
Example

<line type> <keyword><attribute> <keyword> <keyword><attribute>

This topic describes the various keywords and attributes that make up
Spreadsheet Definition File codes.

Types of Spreadsheet codes can be divided into two lists:

spreadsheet codes
• Codes for values set by the user
These codes return values that the user specifies, such as prices, recoveries
etc.
• Codes for derived values
These codes return amounts that the Analysis Program derives.
Note that capital expenditure could be in either list. It has been included
arbitrarily in the “codes for derived values”.

Codes for values set The following table lists the various codes for values set by the user.
by the user
In this table:
• Items in angle brackets should be replaced by appropriate codes or values.
The angle brackets should not be included.
Where items in brackets are used in combination they must be separated by a
full stop (.).
Example 1: <method>.<type>.<element>
Example 2: MILL.OREA.GOLD
• The inclusion of an exclamation mark indicates that the insertion of a “U” at
that point will cause the code to return the underground value.

Continued on next page

243
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Codes for values set by the user (continued)

Code Description
CAPEXINI
Initial capital expenditure.
DISCOUNT
Discount percentage per period.
LAG
Bench lag between the mining in specific
push-backs.
MINDIL
Mining dilution factor.
MINREC
Mining recovery factor.
PUSH<n>
Pit number for the nth push-back in the
specified push-backs schedule.
PUSH<n>/MAX_LEAD
The maximum number of benches by
which the mining of a push-back can lead
the next push-back during schedule
optimization.
PUSH<n>/MAX_MINE
The maximum number of benches that
can be mined in a push-back in a period
during schedule optimization.
PUSH<n>/MIN_LEAD
The minimum number of benches by
which the mining of a push-back can lead
the next push-back during schedule
optimization.
ROCK/LIMIT
Throughput limit.
UNDEF/TIME_CM
Time cost factored into reference mining
cost.
UNDEF/UNIT_CM
Reference mining cost.
<element>/LIMIT
Throughput limit.
<element>/PRICE
Price.
<element>/TIME_CS
Time cost factored into unit cost of
selling.
<element>/UNIT_CS
Unit cost of selling.
<GR_n>/LIMIT
Throughput limit for group “n”.
<method>/LIMIT
Throughput limit for method.
<method>.<type>/TIME_CP
Time cost factored into unit cost of
processing.
<method>.<type>/UNIT_CP!
Unit cost of processing.

Continued on next page

244
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Codes for values set by the user (continued)

Code Description
<method>.<type>.<element>/MAX!
Maximum.
<method>.<type>.<element>/MIN!
Minimum.
<method>.<type>.<element>/
Recovery percentage.
RECPER!
<method>.<type>.<element>/
Recovery threshold.
RECTHR!
<method>.<type>.<element>/
Unit cost of processing due to an element.
UNIT_CE!
<type>/CAF
Rock-type cost adjustment factor.
<type>/THRFACT
Rock-type throughput factor.
<type>/TIME_CM
Time cost factored into unit cost of
mining for a rock-type (derived value).
<type>/UNIT_CM
Unit cost of mining for a rock-type
(derived value).
<type>/UNIT_CR
Unit cost of rehabilitation for a rock-type.

Note: When any of the codes for values set by the user is requested in a grand
total, and the value is changed during the life of the mine, it returns the value
applicable in the first period.

Continued on next page

245
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Codes for derived Codes for derived values are made up of keywords which may or may not be
values followed by attributes. The table below lists the keywords for derived values
and any allowed attributes for those keywords.
Refer to page 250 for a list of the possible attributes and their meanings.
In this table:
• Items in angle brackets should be replaced by appropriate codes or values.
The angle brackets should not be included.
Where items in brackets are used in combination they must be separated by a
full stop (.).
Example: <method>.<type>.<element>
• An asterisk (*) after an attribute indicates that, for grand total codes, another
letter must be added to the attribute to indicate the scheduling option. The
extra letter will either be “B” for the best case, “S” for the user specified case
and “W” for the worst case.
• There are some instances where no attribute is required for period values, but
a slash and B, S or W is required for grand total values. This is shown as /*.

Keywords Description and allowed attributes

AVMINCAF
Average positional mining cost adjustment factor.
Allowed attributes: none.
AVPROCAF
Average positional processing cost adjustment factor.
Allowed attributes: none.
BENCH
The bench being mined.
Period: allowed attributes: /EN /ST /USE
Grand totals: allowed attributes: /FI
BLANK
Special – produces a blank column between data
columns.
Allowed attributes: none.
CAPEXREP
Replacement capital expenditure.
Allowed attributes: /CT* /DT*

Continued on next page

246
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Codes for derived values (continued)

Keywords Description and allowed attributes

CASE
Special – 1 for worst case, 2 for user specified
push-backs, 3 for best case.
Allowed attributes: none.
COVALUE
The extra cash flow for the company that results from
operating the open pit, as distinct from not operating the
open pit, and mining any suitable ore by underground
methods.
Allowed attributes: /CT* /DT*
INTERNAL
The percentage Internal Rate of Return, calculated on
the assumption that all periods are one year in duration.
Grand totals: allowed attributes: /*
LIFE
The life of the pits, in periods.
Grand totals: allowed attributes: /*
OPVALUE
The cash flow from the open pit.
Allowed attributes: /CT* /DT*
OUTSIDE
The mineralised material in the model but outside the
final pit.
Note: This is not available if the Results File is
produced by the Re-blocking Program.
Allowed attributes: /TP
OUTSIDE.<element>
The element grade and units in the model but outside
the final pit.
Note: This is not available if the Results File is
produced by the Re-blocking Program.
Allowed attributes: /GP /UP
PERIOD
The period number.
Allowed attributes: none.

Continued on next page

247
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Codes for derived values (continued)

Keywords Description and allowed attributes

PIT
The pit number.
Periods: allowed attributes: /EN /ST
For /EN and /ST, if the schedule is for specified
push-backs and the lag is greater than zero, this refers to
the push-back which is currently leading.
Grand totals: allowed attributes: /FI
PUSH<n>
Pit number for the nth push-back in the specified push-
back schedule.
Allowed attributes: /BM /CM* /DM* /CR* /DR* /TG*
/TI* /TP* /TR*
Note: For grand totals, only an “S” can be substituted
for the asterisk.
ROCK
Total material.
Allowed attributes: /CM* /DM* /CR* /DR* /TG* /TI*
/TP* /TR*
STRIP
The stripping ratio - unprocessed material/processed
material.
Allowed attributes: /*
TIMECOST
Fixed costs.
Allowed attributes: /CT* /DT*
UGVALUE
The cash flow that would have resulted if any suitable
ore in the region mined had been mined by underground
methods.
Allowed attributes: /CT* /DT*
WASTE
Tonnage mined but not processed.
Allowed attributes: /*
<element>
Element.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CS* /DS*
/CT* /DT* /GG* /GI* /GP* /GR* /UG* /UI* /UP*
/UR* /UO*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as: /CT=/CI-/CE-/CS

Continued on next page

248
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Codes for derived values (continued)

Keywords Description and allowed attributes

<GR_n>
Processing method group where “n” is the group
number†.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CP* /DP*
/CS* /DS* /CT* /DT* /TG* /TI*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as:
/CT=/CI-/CE-/CP-/CS
<GR_n>.<element>
Group “n”/element combination.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CS* /DS*
/CT* /DT* /GG* /GI* /UG* /UI* /UO*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as: /CT=/CI-/CE- /CS
<method>
Processing method.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CP* /DP*
/CS* /DS* /CT* /DT* /TG* /TI*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as: /CT=/CI-
CE-/CP-/CS
<method>.<element>
Processing method/element combination.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CS* /DS*
/CT* /DT* /GG* /GI* /UG* /UI* /UO*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as: /CT=/CI-/CE-/CS
<method>.<type>
Processing method/rock-type combination.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CP* /DP*
/CS* /DS* /CT* /DT* /TG* /TI*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as:
/CT=/CI-/CE-/CP-/CS
<method>.<type>.
Processing method/rock-type/element combination.
<element>
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CS* /DS*
/CT* /DT* /GG* /GI* /UG* /UI* /UO*
Periods only: /OF /OFU
Note: Here /CT is calculated as: /CT=/CI-/CE-/CS)

Continued on next page

† Group codes are of the form GR_1 which refers to the first group defined and GR_2 which refers to the
second, and so forth.

249
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Codes for derived values (continued)

Keywords Description and allowed attributes

<type>
Rock-type.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI* /CM* /DM*
/CP* /DP* /CR* /DR* /CS* /DS* /CT* /DT* /TG* /TI*
/TP* /TR*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as:
/CT=/CI-/CE-/CM-/CP-/CS
<type>.<element>
Rock-type/element combination.
Allowed attributes: /CE* /DE* /CI* /DI*/CS* /DS*
/CT* /DT* /GG* /GI* /GP* /GR* /UG* /UI* /UP*
/UR* /UO*
Note: Here /CT is calculated as: /CT=/CI-/CE-/CS

Attributes for Attributes for derived codes consist of a slash (/) and two or three letters.
derived codes
The table below lists the various attributes and their meanings.
In the table, an asterisk (*) after an attribute indicates that, for grand total
codes, another letter must be added to the attribute to indicate the scheduling
option. The extra letter will either be “B” for the best case, “S” for the
specified case and “W” for the worst case.
Note that:
• All cash flow and cost attributes start with /C, with the second letter
indicating the type of cash flow or cost. The discounted equivalent of each
attribute is obtained by changing the C to D.
• All tonnages start with /T.
• All units of elements start with /U.
• All grades start with /G.

Continued on next page

250
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Attributes for derived codes (continued)

Attribute(s) Description
/BM The total number of benches mined in a push-back,
including fractions. This does not include benches which
are entirely air. Only applicable to user specified case.
/CE* /DE* Cost of processing due to elements.
/CI* /DI* Cash income (revenue).
/CM* /DM* Cost of mining.
/CP* /DP* Cost of processing.
/CR* /DR* Cost of rehabilitation.
/CS* /DS* Cost of selling.
/CT* /DT* Cash flow - total of the other cash flows in the category.
/EN End pit or bench for a period. For bench use, see also
/USE.
/FI Finish pit or bench for a grand total.
/GG* Grade in the ground before processing.
/GI* Grade input to processing.
/GP* Grade in place.
/GR* Grade rejected.
/OF Cut-off.
/OFU Cut-off for underground methods.
/ST Start pit or bench for a period.
/TG* Tonnes in the ground before processing.
/TI* Tonnes input to processing.
/TP* Tonnes in place.
/TR* Tonnes rejected.
/UG* Units of an element in the ground before processing.
/UI* Units of an element input to processing.
/UO* Units of an element output from processing.
/UP* Units of an element in place.
/UR* Units of an element rejected.
/USE Percentage of the bench mined at the end of a period. See
also /EN.

Continued on next page

251
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Codes, Continued

Note that:
• GP, TP and UP refer to all material mined, be it ore or waste.
• GG, TG and UG refer only to the material in the ground which is selected for
processing.
• GI, TI and UI refer to the material input to processing, after any mining
dilution or recovery has been applied.

252
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Guidelines and Examples

Rules and Please note the following rules and guidelines when creating or editing a
guidelines Spreadsheet Definition File.
• Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in the file. Start a blank
line or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "
• Codes can be in upper or lower case, or a mixture of the two.
• Codes can also be continued on second and subsequent lines. Where codes
are continued on the second or subsequent lines, the line type must be
repeated at the beginning of the line. For an example, see page 254.
• The maximum length of a line in the Definitions File is 80 characters.
• The maximum number of codes/columns that can appear in a period or grand
total table is set when the Four-X package is compiled. Run the Utilities
Program to find out what your limit is.
• The user must ensure that enough values are output to identify the source of
the values. For example, period data will normally include CASE and
PERIOD.

Examples of codes Most codes are quite easy to remember once you become accustomed to using
them.
Examples
• ROCK/TG represents tonnes of rock in the ground for the period table.
• ROCK/LIMIT represents the throughput limit you have set on the amount of
rock to be mined in a period.
• MIL1.OXID.GOLD/UOW represents:
- (/UOW) the grand total of units output in worst case scheduling
- (GOLD) when the element, GOLD, is extracted from
- (OXID) rock-type OXID in
- (MIL1) the processing method, MIL1

Continued on next page

253
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Guidelines and Examples, Continued

Example Here is an example of the contents of a Spreadsheet Definition File.

Spreadsheet
Definition File 1

Gra GOLD/Price Pit/FI Rock/tgw Mill/tiw OPVALUE/DTW

In this example:
• Gra indicates that the codes which follow are for grand totals
• GOLD/Price (code for value set by the user)
- GOLD refers to the element, gold
- /Price refers to the price of the element, gold
• Pit/FI (code for derived value)
- Pit indicates pit number
- /FI refers to the final pit for a grand total
• Rock/tgw (code for derived value)
- Rock indicates the total material mined - ore and waste
- /tgw refers to the tonnes in the ground before processing in a worst case
scenario (w)
• Mill/tiw (code for derived value)
- Mill refers to the processing method used, mill
- /tiw indicates tonnes input to processing in a worst case scenario (w)
• OPVALUE/DTW (code for derived value)
- OPVALUE refers to the cash flow from the open pit
- /DTW indicates the discounted total cash flow
As you can see, codes can be in upper or lower case, or a mixture of the two.

Example Codes can also be continued on second and subsequent lines. The following is
Spreadsheet the exact equivalent of the example, above:
Definition File 2
Gra GOLD/Price Pit/FI Rock/tgw
GRA Mill/tiw OPVALUE/DTW

The application of These codes, listed above, give you access to almost every value you could
spreadsheet codes want in order to best assess a design. If you find their sheer number confusing,
you may find it helpful to refer to the diagrams in the following section.

254
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes

Introduction The diagrams below may make it clearer where the spreadsheet codes are
applied.

Overview The following is an overview of the main material movements which occur
during mining.

Material mined
See Material mined,
on page 256

Material mined as Material mined

waste as ore
This is because it has no See Material mined
processing path or it is not as ore, on page 258
processed.
See Material mined as waste,
on page 257

Processing
details
See Processing
details, on page 259

Output
See Output details,
on page 261

Continued on next page

255
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes, Continued

Material mined The following tables show all of the codes that can be used in relation to the
material mined.

Codes for values set by the user

Description Code(s)
• Unit cost of mining waste UNDEF/UNIT_CM, UNDEF/TIME_CM
<type>/UNIT_CM, <type>/TIME_CM

• Rock-type mining CAF <type>/CAF

• Mining limit ROCK/LIMIT

• Push-back definition PUSH<n>

• Lag between push-backs LAG

Codes for derived values

Description Code(s)
• Tonnage ROCK/TP*
PUSH<n>/TP*
<type>/TP*

• Element quantity <element>/UP*

<type>.<element>/UP*

• Grade <element>/GP*
<type>.<element>/GP*

• Average mining CAF AVMINCAF

• Bench PIT/ST, PIT/EN, PIT/FI

PUSH<n>/BM
BENCH/ST, BENCH/EN, BENCH/USE,
BENCH/FI

• Mining cost ROCK/CM*, ROCK/DM*

PUSH<n>/CM*, PUSH<n>/DM*
<type>/CM*, <type>/DM*

• Stripping ratio STRIP/*

Continued on next page

256
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes, Continued

Material mined as The following tables show all of the codes that can be used in relation to the
waste material mined as waste.

Codes for values set by the user

Description Code(s)
• Unit rehabilitation cost <type>/UNIT_CR

Codes for derived values

Description Code(s)
• Total waste tonnage WASTE/*

• Rehabilitation cost ROCK/CR*, ROCK/DR*

PUSH<n>/CR*, PUSH<n>/DR*
<type>/CR*, <type>/DR*

• Rejected tonnage ROCK/TR*

PUSH<n>/TR*
<type>/TR*

• Rejected element quantity <element>/UR*

<type>.<element>/UR*

• Rejected material grade <element>/GR*

<type>.<element>/GR*

Continued on next page

257
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes, Continued

Material mined The following tables show all of the codes that can be used in relation to the
as ore material mined as ore.
Codes for values set by the user

Description Code(s)
• Mining dilution MINDIL
• Mining recovery MINREC

Codes for derived values

Description Code(s)
• Tonnage in the ground before ROCK/TG*
processing PUSH<n>/TG*
<type>/TG*
<method>/TG*
<method>.<type>/TG*
<GR_n>/TG*
• Element quantity in the ground <element>/UG*
before processing <method>.<element>/UG*
<type>.<element>/UG*
<method>.<type>.<element>/UG*
<GR_n>.<element>/UG*
• Grade in the ground before <element>/GG*
processing <method>.<element>/GG*
<type>.<element>/GG*
<method>.<type>.<element>/GG*
<GR_n>.<element>/GG*
• Tonnage input to processing ROCK/TI*
PUSH<n>/TI*
<type>/TI*
<method>/TI*
<method>.<type>/TI*
<GR_n>/TI*
• Element quantity input to <element>/UI*
processing <method>.<element>/UI*
<type>.<element>/UI*
<method>.<type>.<element>/UI*
<GR_n>.<element>/UI*
• Grade input to processing <element>/GI*
<method>.<element>/GI*
<type>.<element>/GI*
<method>.<type>.<element>/GI*
<GR_n>.<element>/GI*

Continued on next page

258
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes, Continued

Note: Mining dilution and mining recovery can affect the quantities input to
processing. This leads to the following relations between the above attributes
for the same code:
• Tonnage input to processing

TI = TG × MINDIL × MINREC

• Element quantity input to processing

UI = UG × MINREC

• Grade input to processing

GI = GG / MINDIL

Processing details The following tables show all of the codes that can be used in relation to the
processing stage of mining.

Codes for values set by the user

Description Code(s)
• Cut-offs <method>.<type>.<element>/MIN!
<method>.<type>.<element>/MAX!
• Product prices <element>/PRICE
• Processing limits <method>/LIMIT
<GR_n>/LIMIT
• Recoveries <method>.<type>.<element>/RECPER!
<method>.<type>.<element>/RECTHR!
• Throughput factors <type>/THRFACT
• Unit costs of processing <method>.<type>/UNIT_CP!
<method>.<type>/TIME_CP!
• Unit cost of element processing <method>.<type>.<element>/UNIT_CE!

Continued on next page

259
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes, Continued

Processing details (continued)

Codes for derived values

Description Code(s)
• Costs of processing <method>/CP*, <method>/DP*
<type>/CP*, <type>/DP*
<method>.<type>/CP*, <method>.<type>/DP*
<GR_n>/CP*, <GR_n>/DP*

• Average processing AVPROCAF

CAF
• Costs of element <element>/CE*, <element>/DE*
processing <method>/CE*, <method>/DE*
<type>/CE*, <type>/DE*
<method>.<element>/CE*
<method>.<element>/DE*
<method>.<type>/CE*, <method>.<type>/DE*
<type>.<element>/CE*, <type>.<element>/DE*
<method>.<type>.<element>/CE*
<method>.<type>.<element>/DE*
<GR_n>/CE*, <GR_n>/DE*
<GR_n>.<element>/CE*, <GR_n>.<element>/DE*
• Cut-offs <method>.<type>.<element>/OF
<method>.<type>.<element>/OFU

Continued on next page

260
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes, Continued

Output details The following tables show all of the codes that can be used in relation to the
output stage of mining.
Codes for values set by the user

Description Code(s)
• Production limit <element>/LIMIT
• Unit selling cost <element>/UNIT_CS, <element>/TIME_CS

Codes for derived values

Description Code(s)
• Product <element>/OU*
<method>.<element>/OU*
<GR_n>.<element>/OU*
<type>.<element>/OU*
<method>.<type>.<element>/OU*
• Selling costs <element>/CS*, <element>/DS*
<method>/CS*, <method>/DS*
<type>/CS*, <type>/DS*
<method>.<element>/CS*, <method>.<element>/DS*
<method>.<type>/CS*, <method>.<type>/DS*
<type>.<element>/CS*, <type>.<element>/DS*
<method>.<type>.<element>/CS*
<method>.<type>.<element>/DS*
<GR_n>/CS*, <GR_n>/DS*
<GR_n>.<element>/CS*, <GR_n>.<element>/DS*
• Revenue <element>/CI*, <element>/DI*
<method>/CI*, <method>/DI*
<type>/CI*, <type>/DI*
<method>.<element>/CI*, <method>.<element>/DI*
<method>.<type>/CI*, <method>.<type>/DI*
<type>.<element>/CI*, <type>.<element>/DI*
<method>.<type>.<element>/CI*
<method>.<type>.<element>/DI*
<GR_n>/CI*, <GR_n>/DI*
<GR_n>.<element>/CI*, <GR_n>.<element>/DI*

Continued on next page

261
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Application of Spreadsheet Codes, Continued

Output details (continued)

Description Code(s)
• Net cash flow <element>/CT*, <element>/DT*
<method>/CT*, <method>/DT*
<type>/CT*, <type>/DT*
<method>.<element>/CT*, <method>.<element>/DT*
<method>.<type>/CT*, <method>.<type>/DT*
<type>.<element>/CT*, <type>.<element>/DT*
<method>.<type>.<element>/CT*
<method>.<type>.<element>/DT*
<GR_n>/CT*, <GR_n>/DT*
<GR_n>.<element>/CT*, <GR_n>.<element>/DT*
CAPEXREP/CT*, CAPEXREP/DT*
TIMECOST/CT*, TIMECOST/DT*
OPVALUE/CT*, OPVALUE/CT*
COVALUE/CT*, COVALUE/DT*
UGVALUE/CT*, UGVALUE/CT*
• Internal rate of INTERNAL
return

262
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Spreadsheet Output File

Overview and Layout

Overview This section discusses the Spreadsheet Output File as produced by the Analysis
Program.
It does not provide a detailed discussion of the spreadsheet output produced by
the Utilities Program in the Summarise a Data File mode. For more
information see Utilities Program, Section A: Summarising a Data File, on
page 150.

Description Spreadsheet Output Files (file extension “.sso”) are text files that contain output
from the Analysis Program and the Utilities Program in a form suitable for
importation into most spreadsheet programs.

How the The Spreadsheet Output File is created by:

Spreadsheet
Output File is • The Analysis Program, using a Spreadsheet Definition File
created
• The Utilities Program in the Summarising a Data File mode

Using the The Spreadsheet Output File is used by the customer and input into a
Spreadsheet spreadsheet package. This allows for further plotting of the data.
Output File

Layout The layout of the Spreadsheet Output File is quite simple. It can contain:
• A period table
- and/or -
• A grand totals table
Each table consists of columns of numbers, with each column headed by the
corresponding code.
If both a period table and a grand totals table are included, the periods table
appears first.
By default, the columns are separated by spaces.

Continued on next page

263
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Overview and Layout, Continued

Format The default format (i.e. columns separated by spaces) of a Spreadsheet Output
File can be read into most spreadsheet packages.
However, in some cases it may be necessary to parse the text after input (i.e.
arrange text into columns of cells), in order to get the numbers into their
corresponding columns. If this is inconvenient, two other formats are available
to you. These are:
• “StoreSpread=Comma”
The columns are separated by commas.
• “StoreSpread=Quote”
The columns are separated by commas and the headings are enclosed in
double quotes (“ ”).
These options are obtained by changing the “StoreSpread” field in your fx.ini
file from “StoreSpread=Fixed” to one of the two alternatives, above.
For more information, see Order of information in the text files, on page 175.

In addition, the Spreadsheet Output File default extension can be changed

to .csv in fx.ini. The extension .csv is the extension expected by many
packages for “Comma Separated Variable” files, like these.
To do this, under the [Extensions] heading, change the SSOutput line from:
SSOutput=.sso to: SSOutput=.csv
Note: For users of EXCELTM, we suggest that you change StoreSpread=Fixed to
StoreSpread=Quote. We also suggest that you modify the Spreadsheet Output
default file extension to .csv, in fx.ini. You will then find that it is very easy to
read spreadsheet data.

Example The following is an example of a Spreadsheet Output File.

"Multi-element tutorial 2"

"Grand totals:"

" "," "," "," "," "

" "," "," "," "," "
" GOLD"," Pit"," Rock"," Mill"," OPVALUE"
" /Price"," /FI"," /tpw"," /tiw"," /DTW"
" "," "," "," "," "
300.00 , 10 , 2094480 , 559920 , 2573027
300.00 , 11 , 4309680 , 1097440 , 4225424
300.00 , 12 , 6658000 , 1624480 , 5090110
300.00 , 13 , 8791360 , 2086400 , 5534342
300.00 , 14 , 10276800 , 2362560 , 5565635
300.00 , 15 , 11647440 , 2587200 , 5304338
300.00 , 16 , 14420160 , 2976000 , 4727464

264
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 6: Auxiliary Files

Initialization, Language and Fx??.ok Files

Introduction This topic discusses the various auxiliary files that come with the Four-X
package or are created by the programs, namely the initialization, language and
fx??.ok files.

Initialization file The initialization file (the “ini” file) is a text file. The Four-X initialization file
is called fx.ini.
The initialization file is updated every time you run one of the Four-X
programs. It keeps a record of the filenames you are using, and enables
programs to offer a likely name as a default when a program asks you for a
filename. Also included in this file are the number of lines to print on a page,
controls for output file formats, and details of your license entitlement.
A copy of fx.ini must be present in your working directory whenever you run
any of the Four-X programs.
You can have different copies of fx.ini for different disk directories.

Layout The initialization file, fx.ini, is divided up into the following sections:
• [Extensions]
• [Filenames]
• [System]
• [LicenseDetails]

[Extensions]
This section identifies the default extensions for all file types used in Four-X.
For more information about default file extensions, see page 19 and following.

[Filenames]
This section records the last filename used in each program. This is used to
predict default filenames to be used in a re-run, or in the next step of the
Four-X process. For more information about filenames, see page 27.

Continued on next page

265
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Initialization, Language and Fx??.ok Files, Continued

Layout (continued)

[System]
This section is used to define system-wide variables. It contains:
• Variables which you may want to alter
• Information used by the programs which will not need to be altered
The following table lists the variables which you may want to alter.

Variable This sets…

LinesOnPage The number of lines to print per page
Discount The discount mode
Milawa Whether a Milawa schedule can be produced from a
Four-X Analysis Program run
See page 124 for more information.
Opti-Cut Whether Opti-Cut files can be produced from a
Four-X Analysis Program run
StoreMinSeq The format of the Mining Sequence File
StoreModel The format of the Model File
StorePitList The format of the Pit List File
StoreResults The format of the Results File
StoreSpread The format of the Spreadsheet Output File
For more information, refer to page 264.
Version The current version of the software

To edit any of these variables, follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Open and view the Four-X initialization file, fx.ini, using a text
editor or a word processor in pure text mode.
2. Under the [System] section header Edit the variable(s) as
required.
3. Save the file and exit from the text editor or word processor.

Continued on next page

266
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
Initialization, Language and Fx??.ok Files, Continued

Layout (continued)

[LicenseDetails]
This section lists license information relating to your copy of Four-X. Do not
change any of the information in this section.

Language file This file allows the programs to translate their screen prompts, screen messages
and printer output into a language other than English.
The language file is always called fx.lng, no matter what language is involved.
If you are supplied with a language file and you wish to use the translation
facilities, make sure that there is a copy of it in your working directory. If a
copy of fx.lng is not present in your working directory, all output text will be in
English.

Fx??.ok file When a program starts a run, it first deletes any copy of the file fx??.ok (where
fx?? is the Command Line name). If the run completes successfully, it writes a
new copy of fx??.ok.
For example, if an fxst.ok file were in your Four-X directory, it would indicate
that the Structure Arcs File has been run successfully.
These files can be used to control batch file execution. For more information
on batch files, see page 280.

267
Part 3: Detailed File Formats
5 July, 1999
 Part 4: Techniques

Overview

In this part This part is divided into the following chapters.

Chapter See Page

Chapter 1: General Techniques for Getting the Most out of 269
the Package
Chapter 2: Computer Techniques 274
Chapter 3: Using Expressions 282
Chapter 4: Calculating Costs 292
Chapter 5: Mining Factors 306

268

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 1: General Techniques for Getting the Most out of the
Package

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Iteration 269
Section B: From Optimized Outline to Design 270
Section C: Using a Spider Diagram to Plot Data About the 273
Sensitivity of a Project

Section A: Iteration

Introduction It cannot be too greatly emphasised that the use of any pit optimizer is an
iterative process.
Even with Four-X, which makes some of the iterations easier, you do not just
create a block model, do an optimization run and some analysis, and then
complete a detailed final design.

Example There are many reasons for this. For example, until you have done one
optimization, you may not know where the haul roads will be. Until you know
this, you do not know where to lay back the slopes to allow for the haul roads.

Iteration Thus, in order to do a proper pit design, a circular solution is required. This
involves the repeated use of Four-X, as well as other design tools and
techniques.
As each cycle proceeds, the body of knowledge on which you base your
assumptions increases.
During this process, it is very easy to get swamped with data. Using
spreadsheet output and producing graphs will help you to summarise data and
to spot trends.
Once this process is completed to your satisfaction, the final set of assumptions
becomes your plan.

For more For a recommended approach for using the Four-X package, refer to Approach
information 2: recommended approach on page 30.

269

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section B: From Optimized Outline to Design

Introduction Even when you have done all of the necessary sensitivity work, and have settled
on a particular optimal pit that you want to use for the design, you still have to
do the detailed design.
To do this, we suggest that you use a technique which employs the use of an
optimal outline.

Optimal outline The optimal outline is initially a jagged line defined by block edges.
This is created by Four-X which uses a block model and mines each block
completely or not at all. However, as the ore body itself does not consist of
neat rectangular blocks, it is not relevant to try to follow the jagged outline in
detail, or to mine the individual blocks as though they were significant entities.

Creating a detailed To create a detailed design outline from the optimal outline you must remove
design outline the jagged outline.
The precise method by which you do this depends on the tools that are available
to you in your GMP.
You may do it entirely by hand, or with varying degrees of computer assistance.
In plan, it is only necessary to draw a smooth line through the zigzag, as is
shown in the diagram below.

Continued on next page

270

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
From Optimized Outline to Design, Continued

Creating a detailed design outline (continued)

In section, the simplest method is to join the centre points of the bottom of each
column of blocks that is to be mined, as is shown in the diagram below.

Step 2: add other details

Next, add the details of the haul roads and safety berms, and so forth.
If haul roads and safety berms are to be incorporated correctly, it is essential
that the slopes used during optimization be laid back to allow for them.
Given this, there should be no particular difficulty, as is illustrated by the
following figure.

Continued on next page

271

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
From Optimized Outline to Design, Continued

Creating a detailed design outline (continued)

The aim is to produce a detailed design that deviates as little as possible from
the general outline provided by optimization. Where deviation is unavoidable,
try to balance extra tonnage in one place with reduced tonnage in another.
Sometimes you may find that the bottom of the optimal pit is too narrow to
allow sufficient room to manoeuvre the equipment. This situation is discussed
in Minimum Mining Width, on page 313.

Final design The final design should, in most cases, have ore and waste tonnages very
similar to those for the optimal outline that you are using. If you cannot
achieve this, you may need to re-optimize with different slopes that make better
allowance for haul roads, and so forth.

272

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Using a Spider Diagram to Plot Data About the
Sensitivity of a Project

Introduction An important aspect of Four-X is its ability to provide information about the
sensitivity of the project to the various processing and cost factors.
One way of presenting this data is called a “spider” diagram.

How to plot data You can plot the distribution of NPV for each of the factors involved in the
relating to the optimization when the factors are varied by, say, plus or minus 10% from the
sensitivity of a base case.
project
The item with the most potential impact on the project is the one with the
maximum gradient.

Example Below is an example of a spider diagram.

SENSITIVITY TO CHANGE

35

30

25
NPV in millions

20
Cost of mining
15
Process cost
Gold price
10
Silver price
5 +25% NPV
-25% NPV
0
-10% Base 10%

Items that affect the NPV by more than ± 25% are highly significant.
In the example, above, both the processing cost and the gold price are highly
significant.

273

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 2: Computer Techniques

Overview

In this chapter This chapter contains the following sections.

Section See Page

Section A: Using Log Files 275
What are Log Files? 275
Logging Commands 277
Section B: Running the Programs in Batch Files 280

274

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Using Log Files

What are Log Files?

Introduction Log files are files that contain abbreviated prompts and answers. They can be
used to re-run a program using the previously logged set of prompts and
answers.
As everything you type has been “pre-recorded”, log files can significantly
reduce the time and effort taken to re-run programs. Since they can be edited,
they also make it very easy to re-run with changes.

Example of a log Here is an example of a log file for running the Optimization Program.
file
PrintFile #tut4
Restart_run? N
ParametersFile tut4
ModelFile tut4
StructureFile tut4
WorkFile #tut4
ResultsFile #tut4

In this example:
• The left-hand column shows shortened versions of the screen prompts
• The right-hand column shows the responses
• The # symbol is used to tell the program to automatically overwrite:
- The print file
- The Work File
- The Results File

Continued on next page

275

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
What are Log Files? Continued

Default log file Four-X has a different log file extension for each of the Four-X programs.
extensions
Here is a list of default log file extensions.

File type Default file extension

Log files for the:

Edit Parameters Program .loe
Re-blocking Program .lor
Structure Arcs Program .los
Optimization Program .loo
Pit Visualisation Program .lop
Mining Width Program .lom
Analysis Program .loa
Utilities Program .lou

Using log files Log files are controlled by special logging commands which you enter in
response to any prompt. For more information see Logging Commands on
page 277.

Editing log files Log files can be edited with any text editor or a word processor in pure text
mode.
It is quite common to edit an existing log file to produce a new one, but care
must be taken not to change anything in the left-hand column, and to ensure that
responses all start in the same column (column 26).

Blank and/or Blank lines or comment lines can appear anywhere in a log file. Start a blank
comment lines line or comment line with any of the following characters: ' * ! "

Tutorials and For practice using log files, refer to the following tutorials and exercises in your
exercises Getting Started Manual:
• Tutorial 2 - Further Analysis of the Results File
• Exercise 2 - Varying Silver Prices
• Tutorial 6 - The Basics of Mining Width Control

276

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Logging Commands

Introduction A full description of logging commands follows.

!LOG Command How to use Type: !LOG <filename> and press the Enter key (↵)
in response to any prompt.
Description The !LOG command starts the writing of answers to the
log file, and repeats the prompt.
If you do not provide a filename, the last one used as a
log file for the program you are running will be used.
With each answer, the program writes a shortened version
of the prompt.
Abbreviation !L
Restriction You cannot use the !LOG command if you are already
logging.

Note: When creating a log file with the !LOG command, any log file of the
same name will be overwritten.

!END Command How to use Type: !END ↵ in response to any prompt.

Description The !END command stops the logging of answers and
repeats the prompt.
Abbreviation !E
Restriction You cannot use the !END command unless you are
logging.

Continued on next page

277

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Logging Commands, Continued

!USE Command How to use Type: !USE <filename> ↵ in response to any

prompt.
Description The !USE command causes the program to start reading
answers from the specified log file, as though you had
typed them in. The program then replays the prompts and
answers on the screen.
If you do not provide a filename, the last one used as a
log file for the program you are running will be used.
Reading will stop when:
• The program run finishes
• The end of the log file is reached
In this case the program reverts to waiting for answers
from the keyboard.
• The program prompts and the log file get out of step
This usually occurs where a mistake has been made
when the file has been edited. The program issues a
warning, then it reverts to waiting for answers from the
keyboard.
Abbreviation !U
Restriction You cannot use the !USE command if you are already
logging.

!DEMO Command How to use Type: !DEMO <filename> ↵ in response to any

prompt.
Description The !DEMO command has exactly the same effect as the
!USE command, except that the program pauses after
displaying each answer. It is used for demonstration
purposes.
If you do not provide a filename, the last one used as a
log file for the program you are running will be used.
Abbreviation !D
Restriction You cannot use the !DEMO command if you are already
logging.

Continued on next page

278

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Logging Commands, Continued

!ASK Command How to use Type: !ASK ↵ in response to any prompt.

Description The !ASK command puts !ASK in the log file in place of
your answer and asks the question again.
When the log file is replayed, the program asks for an
answer to the particular prompt interactively before
continuing to read the log file.
This is useful if you want to do a series of similar runs
while varying just one or two answers.
Abbreviation !A
Restriction The !ASK command can only be used at the keyboard
when you are logging. It is the only logging command that
is valid within a log file.
It can be inserted into a log file with a text editor or word
processor in pure text mode in place of an answer.

Note: All logging commands may be entered in upper or lower case.

Example: using the If you type “!LOG <filename>” in response to any prompt, the program will
!LOG command start recording (or logging) your answers in “<filename>”.
It will continue to prompt you for input, issuing the same prompt again. This
will continue until the end of the run, or until you type “!END” in response to a
prompt.
If you do not include an extension in “<filename>”, Four-X will add the default
extension for a log file for the program you are running.

279

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Running the Programs in Batch Files

Introduction The Four-X programs can also be automated in the following ways:
• Using the autolog facility from the Command Line
• Running files created by you as redirected input files from the Command
Line

Autolog facility If log files have been created, the autolog facility can be used to automate a
series of runs, from the Command Line.
To use this facility, a log file must exist in the current directory, with the name:
autofx??.log
where fx?? is the Command Line name.
This file will automatically be used as a log file without your giving a !USE or
!DEMO command.
Example
Assume a file called autofxan.log exists in the current directory. This file
will automatically be used if the Analysis Program (FXAN) is run.
If you want to do a series of analyses, you could set up a series of individual
log files and then copy the log files, in turn, to the autofxan.log file before
running the Analysis Program. Note that you would need different print file
and Spreadsheet Output File names set up in the logs to retain the individual
results.
Here is an example of a DOS file using the autolog facility:
@echo off

copy run1.loa autofxan.log

fxan
if not exist fxan.ok goto error

copy run2.loa autofxan.log

fxan
if not exist fxan.ok goto error

copy run3.loa autofxan.log

fxan
if not exist fxan.ok goto error

del autofxan.log
goto end

:error
echo.
echo One of the FXAN runs failed.
echo.
echo autofxan.log contains the log file involved.
echo.

:end

Continued on next page

280

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Running the Programs in Batch Files, Continued

Using files as Another way to automate user input is to create a file containing the responses
redirected input required for the keyboard, then to use this file as a redirected input file.
files
Note: This feature is not available under Windows NT.
To run a file as a redirected input file, at the Command Line type:

PROGRAM NAME < FILENAME and press the Enter key

Example

FXAN <inp↵

In this example, the Analysis Program (FXAN) would be run, using the
keyboard responses from the file “inp”.

Using the fx??.ok The fx??.ok file (where fx?? is the Command Line name) is a file that is created
file to check the by each program when a run is completed successfully. This file is deleted at
run the start of a run and re-created at the end, if the run is successful.
This file can be useful in determining whether a program run has been
successful.
In addition, its presence or absence can be used to control subsequent action by
a batch or macro file.

281

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 3: Using Expressions

Types of Expressions

Introduction There are two different types of expressions that can be used in Four-X.
They are:
• Positional CAF expressions
• Grade-dependent expressions
This topic discusses the use of these two types of expressions.

Positional CAF Positional CAF expressions can be used with the Re-blocking Program to
expressions calculate values for the positional mining and processing cost adjustment
factors.
Positional CAF expressions are input to Re-blocking Program interactively or
via a log file.
Expressions input interactively
If you type an ampersand (&) at the end of a line, the program will repeat the
prompt and you can continue typing in the expression. This can continue for
many lines. The maximum depends on a number of factors, such as the
maximum number of characters in an expression, and so forth.
Using a log file
If you have to input a long expression, it is easiest to enter a simple expression
broken into two lines and use a log file to record the prompts and responses.
The long expression can then be edited into the log file, using as many lines as
required, and the program re-run with the log file.

Continued on next page

282

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Types of Expressions, Continued

Grade-dependent Grade-dependent expressions can be included in a Parameters File, each with a

expressions 1-4 character code which identifies the expression. These codes can then be
used in place of certain constants in the Parameters File.
Note: Grade-dependent expressions should be used sparingly. Their effect on
cash flow can usually be foreseen fairly easily, but they can have some
unexpected effects on cut-offs. You should be particularly careful when using
the grade of one element in an expression for the recovery of another element.
When working out the cut-off(s) for an element, Four-X assumes that the grades
of all other elements are zero. When working out the cash flows, the actual
grades of the parcel are used.
Grade-dependent expressions are limited to 64 characters in the Parameters
File. If an expression is longer than this, it must be split into sub-expressions
and then combined in a subsequent expression. For more information, see
Splitting grade-dependent expressions on page 291.

Using expressions These two different types of expressions operate the same way. The only
difference is the variables that can be used in them.
Specifically these expressions can be used for specifying:
• Selling costs†
†
• Prices
• Rock-type mining CAFs
• Rehabilitation costs
• Processing costs
• Element processing costs
• Recovery fractions

† Note: It is not usually meaningful to use expressions for selling cost or price, except when the ore itself is
the product (e.g. for iron ore).

283

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions

Introduction Each expression takes the form of a normal algebraic expression containing:
• Constants
• Variables
• Arithmetic symbols and parentheses
- and -
• Functions
Some special functions have been provided that are particularly useful for this
purpose.
Upper and lower case are equivalent throughout, and spaces can occur
anywhere.

Constants Constants are values that are fixed and unchanging for the purposes of a
particular calculation. These can have zero or more decimal places and,
optionally, a decimal exponent.
Examples
0.5 12k (where k is thousands) 2.7M (where M is millions)
5 1.376 256.1e+3 (=256100)

Variables Variables are symbols, such as x, y or z representing an unspecified member of

a group of objects, numbers, or the like.

Using variables for grade dependent expressions

When grade dependent expressions are used in a Parameters File, the only
variables which can be used are grades.
The following variable is provided.

Variable Description
<element>.G The grade of “element” in the parcel under
consideration.

Continued on next page

284

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions, Continued

Variables (continued)

Grades may be grades mined, grades sent to the waste dump or grades input to
the mill, depending on the usage of the expression.
The usage is defined by the expression “type” on the same line as the
expression.

Using variables for positional mining or processing CAFs

When expressions are used for positional mining or processing cost adjustment
factors, the following variables are provided.

Variable Description
BX, BY, BZ The output block size in units of distance.
NX, NY, NZ The output model size in blocks.
MX, MY, MZ The output model size in units of distance.
IX, IY, IZ The co-ordinates in blocks of the output block.
X, Y, Z The co-ordinates of the centre of the current output
block relative to the model origin, in units, of distance.
<element>.G The average grade of all mineralised material, for the
designated element, in the current output block.
Contrast this grade with the grade used in
grade-dependent expressions.
OLDCAF The CAF from the input file.
When blocks are combined, this is a weighted average
of the CAFs from the input blocks.

Note: All except OLDCAF refer to the output model and block size.

Continued on next page

285

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions, Continued

Arithmetic symbols The following arithmetic operators are provided.

Symbol Name and description

+ “Plus”. Used for addition.

− “Minus”. Used for subtraction.

* “Times”. Used for multiplication.
/ “Division”. Used for division.
** Used for raising a value to a power.
( ) Parentheses. These can be used to any depth.

Subject to the effects of parentheses, powers are evaluated first, followed by

multiplication and division, then addition and subtraction.
Evaluation proceeds from left to right.
Hint: If you are uncertain about what will happen, use more parentheses. They
have no effect on evaluation speed.
Note: If a divisor in an expression is zero when the expression is evaluated, the
result of the expression is set to zero. For this reason, you should consider
carefully before including a division by a grade.

Functions In addition you can use certain functions in expressions.

In each case, any argument of a function can be:
• A constant
- or -
• An expression, that may in turn include functions to any depth

Continued on next page

286

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions, Continued

Standard functions The following standard functions are provided.

Name and description Abbr.† Layout

Square root (X) SQ SQ(X)

This gives the square root of X

Integral part of (X) I I(X)

This gives the largest integer that is not

greater than X
Log (X) LOG Log(X)

This gives the natural logarithm of X

Log10 (X) LOG1 Log1(X)

This gives the log to the base 10 of X

Exponential (X) E E(X)

This gives the exponential (base “e”) of X

Minimum (X1,X2,X3....) MI MI(X1,X2,X3...)

This gives the minimum of a list of values

Maximum (X1,X2,X3....) MA MA(X1,X2,X3...)

This gives the maximum of a list of values

Continued on next page

† This is the minimum number of letters that needs to be provided in order to ensure that it matches only one
function.

287

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions, Continued

Special functions Three special functions are also available for use in expressions.
They are:
• The Select function
• The Distance function
• The Ranges function

Select function Abbreviation†: SE

Layout: SE (x, y1, y2, y3, ...yn)
Description: Select takes the integral part of x and uses it to select from the Y
values.
That is, if x is 3.6, Select will have the value y3. If X is less than 1, y1 is used.
If the integral part of x is greater than the number of Y values, the last y value is
used.
Example
Say you had the following y values: 1.4, 1.35, 1.32, 1.3, 1.27, … and x is the
block co-ordinate IZ.
You would write the function as follows.

Se (IZ, 1.4, 1.35, 1.32, 1.3, 1.27, ...)

The example above could be used to generate a positional mining CAF that
varies irregularly with depth.

Continued on next page

† This is the minimum number of letters that needs to be provided in order to ensure that it matches only one
function.

288

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions, Continued

Distance function †
Abbreviation : D
Layout: D (x1, y1, z1, x2, y2, z2)
Description: Distance calculates the straight line distance between a point at
co-ordinates (x1,y1,z1) and a point at (x2,y2,z2).
Example

D (x, y, 0, mx, my, 0)

The example above could be used to find the horizontal distance of the current
block from the North West corner of the model (Note: Zero has been used for
both z values).

Ranges function Abbreviation†: R

Layout: R (x, y1, z1, y2, z2, y3, z3,...yn)
Description: A given value, x, can be placed in numerical position against an
ascending range of z values. The Ranges function returns the corresponding y
value of the first z whose value exceeds x. If there is no such z value, then the
last y is returned.
The Ranges function could be used, for example, to output an interval position
number.
Example 1
Say, for example, you had the following y and z values:
• y values: 1 2 3 4 5 6
• z values: 2.6 5.7 9.1 13 16.2
You would write the function as follows.

R (x, 1, 2.6, 2, 5.7, 3, 9.1, 4, 13, 5, 16.2, 6)

Continued on next page

† This is the minimum number of letters that needs to be provided in order to ensure that it matches only one
function.

289

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions, Continued

Ranges function (continued)

Note:
• The last value should always be a y value, so there should be an even number
of arguments.
• The z values must be in ascending order (no check is made on this).
Example 2

R (gold.G, 1, 2.5, 1.2)

This example could be used to set a factor 20% higher if the gold grade was
greater than or equal to 2.5.

Example The following is an example expression.

expression

max....)(0,Au.g-0.2)*0.95/max(Au.g,0.2)

This expression uses:

• The “Max” function
• The <element>.grade variable
This expression would return an effective recovery exactly like the one
obtained by having a threshold of 0.2 and a recovery fraction of 0.95.

Continued on next page

290

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Form of Expressions, Continued

Splitting grade- Grade-dependent expressions are limited to 64 characters in the Parameters

dependent File.
expressions
If an expression is longer than this, it must be split into sub-expressions and
then combined in a subsequent expression.
Example
The following is an example of how a long select function can be split into two.
Note: Usually, splitting is much simpler than this.

Original expression Select(Au.g,1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10)

Partial expressions EX1 - Select(Au.g,1,2,3,4,5,0)
EX2 - Select(Au.g-4,0,6,7,8,9,10)
Combined EX3 - EX1 + EX2
expression

In the above example, if Au.g is:

• 5 or less, EX1 evaluates correctly, otherwise it returns zero
• 6 or more, EX2 evaluates correctly, otherwise it return zero
EX3, the sum of the two, therefore returns the same value as the original
expression.

291

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 4: Calculating Costs

Overview

In this chapter This chapter contains the following topics.

Section See Page

Section A: Calculating Costs for Pit Optimization 293
Costs - General 293
Costs - Specific 296
The Application of Costs 299
Example of Cost Calculation 303
Section B: Time Cost Handling During Analysis 305

292

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Calculating Costs for Pit Optimization

Costs - General

Introduction When preparing for a pit optimization using the Optimization Program, you
need to calculate the expected mining, processing, rehabilitation and selling
costs. This is because the Lerchs-Grossmann pit optimization method used by
Four-X can only take account of block values and slope requirements.
However, Four-X has very specific requirements with regard to the calculation
of these costs and the way they are input, and it is important that these be fully
understood.

How costs to be Costs must be expressed as “mining cost per tonne”, as “processing cost per
expressed tonne”, as “rehabilitation cost per tonne”, or as “selling cost per unit of product
produced”.
To reduce costs to a per tonne or a per unit basis, you have to make
assumptions about the production rate.
If the size of the pit, produced by the optimization, makes these assumptions
inappropriate, then the costs should be re-calculated and the optimization done
again.
Note: Many users set up all of their cost calculations in a computer spreadsheet.
This makes re-calculation much easier.

Continued on next page

293

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Costs - General, Continued

What is a cost? Costs include

• Incremental costs
Such as wages and fuel costs.
These costs must be included in the calculation of the cost of the activity with
which they are associated.
Costs may or may not include
• Expenditures that are related to time, rather than to tonnage or production
These require careful thought, but generally:

Include: any expenditure that would stop if mining stopped (time-related

costs).
Exclude: any expenditure that would not stop if mining stopped.

The reasoning behind this is that, when the Optimization Program adds a block
to the pit outline, it may effectively extend the life of the mine. If it does, the
extra costs that would occur as a result of this extended life must be paid for.
Otherwise, the Optimization Program will add blocks to the pit that reduce,
rather than increase its real value.

Sharing Since the Optimization Program can only take note of costs expressed through
time-related costs the block values, it is necessary to share time-related costs between the blocks
between blocks in some way.
How they should be shared depends on whether production is limited by:
• Mining
• Processing
- or -
• The market

Production limited by mining

If production is limited by mining, as in some heap leach operations, every
block that is mined extends the life of the mine, so time costs should be added
to the mining cost.

Continued on next page

294

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Costs - General, Continued

Production limited by processing

Usually production is limited by processing. In this case, only the mining of an
ore block extends the life of the mine. Ore block values should therefore
include an allowance for time costs.
To include an allowance for time costs in ore blocks, add an appropriate
amount to the processing cost per tonne.

Production limited by the market

If production is limited by the market, then time costs should be added to the
selling cost.

Amount to be added
In each case, the amount added is the time costs per year, divided by the
throughput limit per year.

Note: It is possible to handle time costs explicitly, rather than factoring them
into other costs as described above, during the analysis with the Analysis
Program. This is discussed in Section B: Time Cost Handling During Analysis,
on page 305.

Cost adjustment Four-X assumes that all costs that you give it are calculated for a particular
factors block in the model. This block, called the Reference Block, is usually at the
surface, but it can be anywhere you nominate. The concept of a Reference
Block is very important in Four-X.
Mining and processing costs should be worked out for the Reference Block
even if there is no appropriate material in that block. That is, even if the
Reference Block consists entirely of barren material, you should still work out
the processing cost as though the material to be processed was in that block.
These costs are stored in the Parameters File.
Four-X deals with any variation of these costs, such as the increase of mining
cost with depth, by the use of CAFs.
There can be adjustment factors for the (waste) mining cost and for the
processing cost for each block in the Model File. There can be a second
adjustment for the (waste) mining cost that depends on rock-type, and that
appears in the Parameters File.

295

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Costs - Specific

Introduction Costs are expressed as:

• Mining cost per tonne
• Processing cost per tonne
• Rehabilitation cost per tonne
• Selling cost per unit of product produced
• Time costs

Mining costs Mining costs include:

• Assaying and sampling
• Clearing the site and topsoil removal
• Dewatering the pit
• Drilling and blasting
• Ground support
• Loading and hauling
• Mine services, which include:
- Geological services
- Grade control
- In-pit supervision
- Mine administration
- Surveying
• Mobilising/demobilising
• Standby and miscellaneous machine hire maintenance

Continued on next page

296

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Costs - Specific, Continued

Processing costs Processing costs include:

• Crushing and grinding
• Grade control (usually)
• Maintenance
• Mill services
• Ore handling (additional costs)
• Stockpile management
• Treatment plant reagents
Extra ore mining costs
Because different equipment may be used, it is not uncommon for the cost per
tonne of mining ore to be greater than the cost per tonne of mining waste. For
Four-X purposes, this extra cost should be added to the processing cost.
Example
If the costs of mining and processing ore are $1.54 and $7.37 respectively, and
the cost of mining waste is $0.82, then, for Four-X purposes, we use a
processing cost of $8.09 (=1.54+7.37-0.82).
Remember that it is important to calculate these figures initially as though
mining were taking place at the Reference Block, even if there is no mineralised
material in the Reference Block.
If the costs are different in other parts of the model, then the differences should
be handled by including positional mining and/or processing CAFs in the
Model File.

Rehabilitation costs Rehabilitation costs include:

• Waste dump rehabilitation
• Acid mine drainage measures
• Revegetation

Selling costs Selling costs include:

• Bullion transportation
• Insurance
• Marketing
• Refining
• Smelting
• Supervision
• Transporting

Continued on next page

297

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Costs - Specific, Continued

Time costs Time costs include:

• Accommodation supplies and services
• Administration salaries and wages
• Communications
• Insurance
• Legal services
• Safety and training
• Supplies and services

298

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Application of Costs

Introduction Some examples of the handling of various costs may be helpful.

These examples do not cover all possible costs, but should indicate how to treat
most costs.

Processing mill There may be a several types of costs involved in relation to a processing mill.
There may also be other expenditures that are not considered to be “costs” for
the purposes of Four-X.

Example
Assume that we have a processing mill that cost $10m to build and commission.
If the mine were to be shut down very shortly after operations commenced, the
mill would have:
• A certain salvage value
- and -
• An unrecoverable amount

Unrecoverable amount
The unrecoverable amount (for the purposes of this example, $4m) is an
“up-front” or “sunk” cost which must either be:
• Entered as an initial capital expenditure during the analysis with the Analysis
Program (see page 305)
- or -
• Subtracted from any optimized value of the pit itself
It is not a cost for Four-X purposes.

Salvage value
The mill may also have a certain salvage value (in our example, $6m).
The extent of the salvage value will depend on:
• Whether there is an on-going program of maintenance and capital
replacement
This will keep the salvage value of the mill close to $6m in today's dollars. In
this situation the $6m is theoretically recoverable when the mine is closed,
and so is not a cost.
However, maintenance and periodic capital replacement expenses are costs
for these purposes, because they would stop if mining stopped. They
should be averaged and treated as time costs.

Continued on next page

299

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Application of Costs, Continued

Processing mill (continued)

• Whether only essential maintenance will be done

Here, the salvage value of the mill will progressively decline. In this case,
the expected rate of this decline should be treated as a time cost.
Note: The rate of decline is not necessarily the same as the depreciation rate
that is used by accountants. In most cases the depreciation rate is set by
taxation considerations, and may reduce the book value to zero when the
salvage value is clearly not zero.
The interest on the salvage value is discussed in Bank loans for recoverable
costs, on page 301.

Trucks The types of costs involved in relation to trucks depends upon the life of the
mine.
Where the life of the mine shorter than the life of a truck
If the expected life of the mine is shorter than the operating life of a truck, then
truck purchases can be treated in the same way as the cost of the mill (see the
example, above).
Where the life of the mine is longer than the life of a truck
If the life of the mine is much longer than the life of a truck, then trucks will
have to be purchased progressively to maintain the fleet.
Such purchases will stop if mining is stopped. Consequently, the cost of
purchasing trucks should be averaged out over the life of the mine and treated
as a time cost.

Unless the life of the mine is expected to be very long, some compromise
between the two approaches, above, is usually required.
Contract mining companies must take these factors into account when quoting
for a job, and it is sometimes useful to think as they do when you are working
out the costs for your own fleet. You should include everything that they do,
except for their allowance for profit.

Administration As on-site administration costs will usually stop if mining is stopped, they
costs should be treated as a time cost.
Head office administration costs may, or may not, stop if mining stops
depending on the circumstances of the particular mine, and thus may or may not
be included.

Continued on next page

300

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Application of Costs, Continued

Bank loans for Repayment (principal and interest) of a bank loan taken out to cover initial
initial costs set-up costs will have to continue whether mining continues or not.
Repayments of bank loans for initial costs should therefore not be included in
the costs used when calculating block values.
These repayments will have to come from the cash flow of the mine. Thus, if
the mine is not going to produce enough cash flow to cover them, the project
should not proceed. You should not introduce these repayments as costs, in an
attempt to “improve” the optimization. The result will be quite the opposite to
what you expect. You will get a smaller pit with a smaller total cash flow.

Bank loans for Although bank loan repayments themselves are not included, some of the items
recoverable costs that the loan was used to pay for may be included.
For example, if you borrow money from the bank for day-to-day working
capital or for items, such as the $6m discussed in the mill example above, then
you can reasonably expect to repay the loan if mining stops.
Consequently, the interest paid on such a loan is a cost that stops if mining
stops. It should therefore be treated as a time cost.
Note: Four-X works throughout in today’s currency, so the interest rate used
should not include an allowance for inflation.

Grade control costs It is often necessary to do grade control work on waste rock as well as ore. In
this case, grade control costs apply to waste rock costs too.
If only some of the waste rock is grade controlled, then the correct way to
handle it is to load the cost of those particular types of waste rock.
However, many users make an estimate of the tonnes of such waste rock per
tonne of ore and increase the cost of mining ore.

Support cable bolts If the permitted pit wall slope is to be increased by the use of cable bolts or
some other similar technique, the cost per tonne is related to pit size, which has
to be estimated.
In this situation, a cost per square foot of wall can be transformed into a cost
per tonne of waste. This is an iterative estimate, but fortunately costs per tonne
are usually low.

Continued on next page

301

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
The Application of Costs, Continued

Reagent costs If a certain element, not necessarily a product, uses up reagent and thus
increases the cost of processing, you can use an element processing cost to
simulate it.
If the extra cost is not directly proportional to the amount of the element input
to the mill, set up a grade-dependent expression for the processing cost per
tonne, and then use the expression code in place of the processing cost.

302

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Example of Cost Calculation

Introduction The following shows how time costs would be handled where the operation is
either milling or mining limited.

Time cost
calculations
Time costs per year 980,000
Expected yearly mill throughput 1,000,000
Time cost per tonne milled 0.98
Expected yearly mining capacity 4,000,000
Time cost per tonne mined 0.24

Incremental costs
per tonne
Bench Mining waste Mining ore Extra for mining ore Milling ore
5 1.05 1.87 0.82 8.25
4 1.17 2.15 0.98 8.25
3 1.29 2.47 1.18 8.25
2 1.41 2.84 1.43 8.25
1 1.53 3.26 1.73 8.25

Throughput limit
on milling
Bench Mining Mining Milling Extra Time Milling Milling
waste cost ore for costs cost for cost
adj. mining Four-X adj.
ore
5 1.05 1.00 8.25 0.82 0.98 10.05 1.00
4 1.17 1.11 8.25 0.98 0.98 10.21 1.02
3 1.29 1.23 8.25 1.18 0.98 10.41 1.04
2 1.41 1.34 8.25 1.43 0.98 10.66 1.06
1 1.53 1.46 8.25 1.73 0.98 10.96 1.09
Cost of mining 1.05 Cost of processing 10.05

Continued on next page

303

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Example of Cost Calculation, Continued

Throughput limit
on mining
Bench Mining Time Mining Mining Milling Extra Milling Milling
waste costs cost cost ore for cost cost
for adj mining for adj.
Four-X ore Four-X
5 1.05 0.24 1.29 1.00 8.25 0.82 9.07 1.00
4 1.17 0.24 1.41 1.09 8.25 0.98 9.23 1.02
3 1.29 0.24 1.53 1.19 8.25 1.18 9.43 1.04
2 1.41 0.24 1.65 1.28 8.25 1.43 9.68 1.07
1 1.53 0.24 1.77 1.37 8.25 1.73 9.98 1.10
Cost of mining 1.29 Cost of processing 9.07

304

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Time Cost Handling During Analysis

Introduction During analysis with the Analysis Program, time costs do not need to be
factored into the mining, processing or selling costs like they do when using the
Optimization Program. This is because time costs can be dealt with explicitly.

Production limits One production limit

If there is only one production limit, and the amounts factored in are correct,
then the cash flows will include the correct allowance in each period for the
time costs, and there is no need to take any special action unless you need the
time costs to be reported separately.
More than one production limit
However if, for example, two limits are applied (e.g. mining and processing),
and one limit controls the throughput during some of the periods and the other
during the other periods, it is not possible to allow correctly for the required
time costs through the factored amounts.
In this case you can set up the time costs and replacement capital expenditures
as explicit amounts per period, but it is essential also to remove the amounts
that you factored into the mining, processing or selling cost for pit optimization
purposes. If you do not remove them, then some costs will be paid for twice in
the Analysis Program simulation.
However, if you do this by changing the costs directly, the cut-offs calculated
by Four-X will also be changed, and you probably do not want this to happen.

To deal with this, the Analysis Program has a special facility that allows you to
type in the factored amounts themselves. The Analysis Program can then use
the original costs for calculating the cut-offs and can correct the costs when
calculating the cash flows.

Entering This special facility is invoked by answering “Yes” to the question:

time/replacement
costs explicitly
Do you wish to enter time and/or replacement costs explicitly?

You will then be prompted, in each analysis request, for the time costs and the
replacement capital costs.
You will also be prompted, after you have entered the reference mining cost,
for the “Time/Replacement costs factored into” the mining cost, the processing
cost(s) and the selling cost.
For a full procedure, see Section B: Using the Analysis Program on page 126.

305

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Chapter 5: Mining Factors

Overview

In this chapter This chapter contains the following topics.

Section See Page

Section A: Techniques with Blocks 307
Block Sizes 307
Re-blocking and Bias 310
Restricting the Number of Parcels in a Block 312
Section B: Pit Shape Techniques 313
Minimum Mining Width 313
Dealing with Pits that Hit the Side of the Model 316
Framework
Dealing with Obstructions and Immovable 318
Objects
Extending the Ore Body 319
Section C: Complex Processing Methods 321
Section D: Handling Slopes that Vary with Rock-type 324
Section E: Allowing for Underground Mining 326

306

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Techniques with Blocks

Block Sizes

Introduction There are four different block sizes that should be used in pit optimization.
These are discussed below.

Block size for The size of block that you need for outlining the ore body depends on the shape
outlining the ore and size of the ore body, and on your GMP.
body
The size of the block may be quite small, which can lead to a model framework
consisting of millions of blocks.

Block size for The values of blocks should be calculated for a block size that is similar to the
calculating values selective mining size. That is, a block should not be so small that it could not
be mined separately, nor so large that grades are artificially smoothed.
A block size calculated in this way is sometimes bigger than is required for
outlining the ore body.
If the block size in the model is smaller than this, then you should use the
Re-blocking Program to re-block it and to reduce the number of parcels, per
rock-type, in a block to one.
This has the effect of averaging the grade within the block. If you do not do
this, you will be simulating the mining of the ore body with a selectivity that
you cannot achieve in practice. This will produce an unrealistically optimistic
result.
For more information about what the Re-blocking Program can do, see page 48.

Block size for For pit design purposes, 100,000 to 200,000 blocks for the model framework is
designing a pit usually sufficient, assuming the pit occupies most of the model framework, and
is not too convoluted.
This is because the smoothed optimal outline that you will produce when
designing a pit is quite insensitive to block size, and because the pit value is
quite insensitive to pit tonnage changes near the optimal (maximum) value.
For more information, see page 270.

Continued on next page

307

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Block Sizes, Continued

The diagram below shows the sort of curve you get if you plot total pit value
against pit tonnage.

Note that the graph goes through a smooth maximum. Such a smooth
maximum is normal for real ore bodies (indeed it is possible to prove that the
curve cannot have a sharp peak).
This has a profound effect on the process of designing pits.
As this diagram shows, small deviations from a design that is not optimal (A)
can have significant effects on the pit value. Thus, generations of mining
engineers have experimented with small changes to try to improve their
designs.
As can be seen, this is quite unnecessary if you start from the optimal
outline (B), provided by Four-X, where small deviations have only a small
effect on the value of the pit.
These considerations can lead to a block size that may be bigger than is
required for calculating values.
If it is, you should combine blocks by using the Re-blocking Program.
However, you should not reduce the parcels to one per rock-type per block.
For a discussion on limiting the parcels to a reasonable number, see page 312.

Continued on next page

308

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Block Sizes, Continued

Block size for You may want to do sensitivity work if, for example, you want to examine the
sensitivity work effects of different prices or costs.
Assuming that the pit fills most of the model framework, a framework of
25,000 to 50,000 blocks will usually give just the same shape of graph with a
very small shift of absolute value.
When you work with a model of this size, sensitivity work can be done very
quickly, and this approach generally leads to a much more thorough sensitivity
analysis.
Time spent on sensitivity work is almost always rewarded by an increase in the
value of the project that far outweighs the cost of the sensitivity work itself.

Block size strategy The general block size strategy is as follows.

Step Action
1. Create a block model with a suitable block size for delineating the
ore body.
2. Re-block it, if necessary, within your GMP to a size that is of the
same order as your selective mining tonnage, before outputting it
from your GMP as a Four-X Model File.
Alternatively you can output it in its original form, and then
re-block it with the Re-blocking Program.
3. Re-block this initial Model File with the Re-blocking Program so
as to reduce the number of blocks in the model framework to
25,000-50,000.
For a discussion on limiting the parcels to a reasonable number, see
page 312.
4. Do the sensitivity work using this model, and establish the Revenue
Factor, costs and slopes which give you the outline that you want to
use for design purposes.
5. Re-block the initial Model File again, but this time produce a model
framework having around 200,000 blocks.
6. Use the Optimization Program to do a pit optimization, using the
required economics and slopes.
7. Use the Analysis Program to do a few quick checks on your
sensitivity work conclusions, before importing the Results File back
into your GMP for final detailed design.

309

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Re-blocking and Bias

Introduction When someone has put a great deal of effort into creating a very detailed block
model of a mineralised body, it may seem almost sacrilegious to combine the
small blocks into larger blocks.
However, provided the parcels are retained when the blocks are combined,
re-blocking usually has very little effect on the optimized result. This is
because, for any price and costs, the value of the new block is exactly the sum
of the values of the component blocks. All that has been lost is a little
positional accuracy with respect to the parcels.

Position and/or Inside/outside optimal outline

contents of a
combined block There is no effect at all when a combined block happens to be completely
inside or completely outside an optimal outline, even if mineralised blocks are
combined with waste. The total value is unchanged.
On the side boundaries of a pit in an waste region
When combined blocks lie on the side boundaries of a pit in an waste region,
there is random give-and-take that produces very little overall change.
Ore inside and waste outside a pit
When combined blocks include ore inside a pit and waste outside it, there can
be a bias due to the excess waste carried. However, in most cases, this bias is
small and, in others, the bias can be removed by careful modelling in the first
place.

Continued on next page

310

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Re-blocking and Bias, Continued

Example
The following diagram shows a high-grade, shallow dipping reef, the footwall
of which will form one wall of the pit.

Air

Shallow dipping reef Blocks

Waste attached to the

ore because of re-blocking

Earth

In this diagram, the squares represent blocks created by combining several

smaller blocks, and the shaded areas show waste that would never be mined in
practice, but which re-blocking might attach to the ore, thus biasing the
optimization.
If, however, the region under the main reef is modelled with a very low density
(say 0.01 or even zero), then the cost of mining it will have negligible effect on
the optimization.
The detailed pit design will exclude the unwanted waste.

Bias Tests on a wide range of ore bodies have given changes in total pit value of
around only one percent when model frameworks are re-blocked from, say,
200,000 blocks to 25,000 blocks.
Since re-blocking of this order reduces optimization time by a large factor, this
makes the runs required for sensitivity work very quick.

For more For more information about the Re-blocking Program, see page 45.
information

311

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Restricting the Number of Parcels in a Block

Introduction Four-X currently allows up to 99 parcels per block. Since most GMPs export
only one parcel per block, this limit is seldom a restriction, even when models
are severely re-blocked.
However, some GMPs do subdivide their blocks in order to more fully
delineate the ore body, and some of them export the pieces as separate parcels.
Also, multiple parcels are sometimes used to model the results of indicator
kriging.
In either case, re-blocking can lead to a number of parcels which exceeds the
limit of 99.

Using the The Re-blocking Program allows you to set a limit on the number of parcels for
Re-blocking each rock-type per block.
Program
If, when combining blocks, the program finds an output block which contains
more parcels than this limit for a particular rock-type, it reduces the number by
a mechanism which is described on page 51.

When to limit If you are producing a model where the block size is similar to the selective
parcels mining size, you should limit the number of parcels to one for each rock-type,
as is discussed in the section on block sizes, starting on page 307.
If you are producing a model for use in design or sensitivity work, you have to
consider how many parcels you need.
Assuming that the grades are different in the different parcels, what is important
is to retain a good description of the grade distribution in the model as a whole,
so that the tonnage processed will react realistically to changes in cut-off. It
does not have to be too detailed in a particular block . This is because the
overall mine behaviour is dependent on the grade distribution of groups of
blocks rather than that of individual blocks.
With a single element, five or ten parcels per rock-type in a block is probably
enough. With two elements, one might expect to have to square this, but five or
ten is still probably enough. This is because the tonnage discrimination is the
same as for one element.

312

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Pit Shape Techniques

Minimum Mining Width

Introduction If the ore body is large, achieving the necessary minimum mining width at the
bottom of the pit usually involves only minor adjustments to the optimal
outline.
However, if you have a steeply dipping, narrow, high-grade reef, or the
mineralisation is very spotty, the problem may be more significant.

Dealing with There are four ways of dealing with these situations:
mining width
• You can exclude a small amount of ore when you do the design, thus
deviating slightly from the outline.
The viability of this approach depends on how much you have to exclude.
The Mining Width Program can do this for you. For more information, see
page 104.
• You can lay the slopes back slightly during the pit optimization, widen the
bottom of the pit, and get back the extra waste further up the walls.
This is shown in the following exaggerated diagram.

Optimal
outline

Detailed
design

• If only small parts of the bottom of the pit are too narrow, you can check that
the mining width is maintained on the bench above, and then plan to dig out
the blocks containing ore at the end of mining.
• You can, in some cases, use a file of additional arcs, as is explained below.
Note: You should always do a pit optimization without additional arcs first,
as the problem may not be as bad as you expect.

Continued on next page

313

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Minimum Mining Width, Continued

Using a file of If you know, in a horizontal sense, where the base of the pit will be, you can
additional arcs link strings of blocks together with additional arcs to ensure that the required
mining width is achieved.
The diagram below shows a steeply dipping reef, where it is clear that the
footwall of the reef will form one wall of the pit.

Air

Steeply
dipping Earth
reef
Blocks

This diagram shows strings, of four blocks each, that could be linked to ensure
a minimum width of four blocks at the bottom of the pit.
Strings like this would have to be provided along the whole strike and depth of
the reef, but take care not to link them along strike as well as across strike.
This would have the effect of linking planes of blocks together, which would
specify the length of the pit floor and force it to be horizontal. Such a
constraint could easily distort the optimization so much that it would hardly be
worth doing.
The sheer number of additional arcs required for this technique would almost
certainly make it necessary to write a program to create them. The program
would have to be given, or would have to obtain from the model, details of the
line where the footwall of the reef intersects each bench. It would then be a
simple matter to identify the positions of the blocks which have to be linked.

Continued on next page

314

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Minimum Mining Width, Continued

Using a file of additional arcs (continued)

To link together four blocks (A, B, C and D), you should include the following
arcs in an Additional Arcs File, in the order shown:

Link from… Link to…

A B
B C
C D
D C
C B
B A

Other arcs and sequences will produce the same pit outline, but this approach
gives the quickest optimization.
For similar reasons, it is best to include the arcs for the lowest bench first, and
then work upwards.
For the format of the Additional Arcs File, see Section C: Additional Arcs File,
on page 232.

315

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Dealing with Pits that Hit the Side of the Model Framework

Introduction If the active blocks indicator is 1 and any of the nested pits reaches the extreme
edge of the model framework, then that pit has effectively got a vertical wall, as
is shown in the diagram below.

Air

Vertical
wall
Pit
Earth

In this situation, no allowance has been made for the cost of mining the part
outside of the model framework (i.e. the dashed area in the above diagram).
This result is, in normal circumstances, undesirable.

Using the programs It is always a good idea to do a quick check for this with the Pit Visualisation
to deal with the Program, after doing a pit optimization.
problem
If you find that any of the pits do hit the side of the model framework, consider
using the Re-blocking Program to extend the model and the topology sideways
before running the Structure Arcs Program and the Optimization Program
again.

Where a pit In some circumstances it can be useful to have a pit reach the side.
reaching the side is
beneficial Example
When a lease boundary divides a single ore body that is being mined by two
different companies, and you want to explore the consequences of joining the
pits.

Continued on next page

316

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Dealing with Pits that Hit the Side of the Model Framework,
Continued

Active blocks If the active blocks indicator is 2, and the sub-regions do not fill the whole
indicator of 2 model framework, the same concepts apply if a pit hits a sub-region wall that is
not at the side of the model framework, and that does not have another
sub-region adjacent to it.

317

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Dealing with Obstructions and Immovable Objects

Introduction It is not uncommon in open pit design to have things, such as a crusher, or a
road or a lease boundary, that the pit must not encroach upon.
There are very simple ways of handling obstructions and immovable objects
using Four-X.

Adding “pseudo” In order to prevent Four-X from including an area in the optimal pit that
blocks contains an immovable object or an obstruction, add blocks to the model that
have a very high rock tonnage.
These blocks will be so expensive to mine that they will not be included in any
optimal pit.

Adding pseudo If you wish to preserve a straight boundary, then you may have to add
blocks and additional arcs to stop the pit from encroaching on, for example, a lease
additional arcs boundary.

Tutorials and For practice using this technique, refer to Tutorial 5 - Dealing with an
exercises Obstruction in your Getting Started Manual.

318

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Extending the Ore Body

Introduction Sometimes when you optimize, the pit reaches the bottom of the model
framework, and the question arises as to whether it could go deeper.
If drilling has already been done below the model framework, then you can
create a new, deeper block model in your GMP, re-create the Model File and
repeat the optimization and sensitivity work.
If the model framework goes as deep as the drilling, you can use Four-X to
investigate whether further drilling is warranted. You can extend the bottom of
the model downwards along the current plunge/dip and then re-optimize to see
if the resultant pit goes deeper.

When to use this The Parameters File and Model File created in this way are based on the
technique assumption that the mineralisation continues downwards with the same width
and grade as in the blocks in the bottom bench of the original model
framework.
If the pit goes no deeper than it did before when you re-optimize, then there is
not much point in drilling deeper, unless you have reason to believe that the
grades or the mineralisation width may increase with depth.

Continued on next page

319

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Extending the Ore Body, Continued

Procedure To extend the mineralised body downwards, follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Using the existing Parameters File and Model File, use the
Re-blocking Program to:
• Reduce the height of the model framework to 1 bench, but change
nothing else.
This will create a Model File containing just the blocks from the
bottom bench.
• Create a new Parameters File to go with it.
You can now effectively paste this single bench model under your original
model framework any number of times, for example, 5 times.
2. Run the Re-blocking Program and tell it you want to input 6 Model
Files.
• Use the original Parameters File as the primary Parameters File
and extend the framework downwards by five benches.
Do this by increasing the height of the model by 5 and by loading
the primary Model File with an offset of 5 in the Z direction only.
• When the Re-blocking Program asks for details of the secondary
files, use the single bench Parameters File and Model File for
each of them, and load each with a different Z offset in the
range 0 to 4.

320

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section C: Complex Processing Methods

Introduction When there are multiple products, it is common for processing streams to have
different sections which are used to extract different products.
Here are some examples, with some suggestions on how to model them in
Four-X.

Element extraction Sometimes different products are extracted at different stages in the processing.
at different stages
Example

10% recovery
for Element 1

60% recovery 70% recovery

for Element 1 for Element 2
Ore
- Element 1 Crush Method A Method B
- Element 2 Element 2

Element 1 Element 1

This can simply be treated as a single method with a recovery of

0.6+0.4x0.1=0.64 for Element 1 and of 0.70 for Element 2.

Continued on next page

321

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Complex Processing Methods, Continued

Separation If, for example, after crushing, the material is divided into two streams in which
each extract a different product, we might have the following.

Example

20% of the ore

90% of Element 1

Ore Element 1
- Element 1 Crush Separate Method A
- Element 2

70% recovery
of Element 1
80% of the ore
70% of Element 2

60% recovery
Method B of Element 2

Element 2

This can be treated as one processing method, with recoveries of 0.9×0.7=0.63

for Element 1 and 0.7×0.6=0.42 for Element 2.
• If the percentage split of the ore is fixed, then the sum of the costs of
crushing and separation of Method A (×0.2) and Method B (×0.8) gives the
processing cost.
• If the costs of any of the stages vary with the element quantities processed,
this can probably be handled with the use of element processing costs.
• If the split of the ore depends on the relative grades of Element 1 and
Element 2, the situation is more complicated, and can probably only be
modelled with the use of a grade-dependent expression for the processing
cost.

Continued on next page

322

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Complex Processing Methods, Continued

Different selling Example

costs
In this example, there are two types of ore with each ore type going to a
separate process.

Ore A Element 1 / Element 3

- Element 1 Crush Method A
- Element 3

Multiple Processes

Ore B Element 1 / Element 2

- Element 1 Crush Method B
- Element 2

If there are different selling costs or prices associated with Element 1 in the two
streams, then it may be better to treat it as two separate elements (e.g. Element
1 and Element 4).

323

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section D: Handling Slopes that Vary with Rock-type

Introduction Each slope profile has a set of bearings and slopes associated with it.
Thus, the slopes can vary with direction within a single slope region, as is
illustrated below.

Example In this diagram, if only one slope region was used, the slope specified for a
bearing of 45 degrees would be used by Four-X in the positions indicated by
the arrows.

45

If you did not want this slope to be applied at all these positions, possibly
because different rock-types were involved, then you could define different
slope regions within which different slope profiles could be applied. There are
two ways of doing this:
• You could define the slope regions and profiles in the Parameters File. In
this case the slope regions would be rectangular.
• You could define the slope regions with a Model File zone number or a
Profile Number File, and the slope profiles with a Slope Profile File. In this
case the slope regions can be of arbitrary shape.

Continued on next page

324

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Handling Slopes that Vary with Rock-type, Continued

Using rectangular The following diagram shows a model with two rock-types, separated by an
slope regions irregular boundary.

Air

Sub-region 1
Sub-region 2
Rock type A

Sub-region 3
Sub-region 4
Rock type B

If we assume that:
• Rock-type A will support 40 degree slopes
- and -
• Rock-type B will support 55 degree slopes
… then an approximation to this can be achieved by setting up sub-regions 1 to
4, as shown.
Sub-regions 1 and 2 would have 40 degree slopes, and 3 and 4 would have 55
degree slopes.
A better approximation could be achieved by using more sub-regions, but there
is a limit to this technique.

Note: Care should be taken not to use sub-regions that contain only a few
benches, because this can make the slope modelling for that sub-region very
poor.

Using irregular A better approach in this case would be to use a Model File which carried zone
slope regions numbers or a Profile Number File to identify the rock-type of each block. This
could then be used in conjunction with a Slope Profile File to generate a
Structure File which exactly modelled the required slopes.

325

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Section E: Allowing for Underground Mining

Introduction Four-X is concerned with designing open pits and currently has no direct
relevance to underground mining.
However, if both above-ground and underground methods are to be used, this
can affect the design of the open pit, and Four-X can take account of this.

Important When considering this issue, it is important that, if a particular block can be
considerations mined by either above-ground methods or underground methods, then the
correct value to give it during open pit optimization is the difference between
its value when mined above-ground and its value when mined underground.
Example
Consider a block that is worth $1,000 if mined by above-ground methods and
$800 if mined by underground methods.
• If no underground mining is to take place, then the correct value to use
during open pit optimization is $1,000.
• If you decide to mine underground below the open pit, then the correct value
to use for open pit optimization is $200.
This is because the advantage to the company obtained by mining the block
by above-ground methods is only $200, since the company will still make
$800 if the block is omitted from the open pit.
However, if the block is included in the open pit, then $1,000 is made from it.
Therefore, there is a difference between the profit gained from mining the block
and the advantage gained from choosing to mine it by above-ground methods.
It is this advantage which is relevant to open pit optimization. Open pits which
are designed to maximize advantage to the company are usually smaller than
pits which are designed to maximize the value of the pit itself.

Procedure To use this facility, follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. If only some of the blocks in the model are being considered for
underground mining (e.g. a particular reef), identify the relevant
parcels by giving them a different rock-type code.
2. For those rock-types that could be mined underground, add
line-types 30 and 31 to the Parameters File, indicating how they will
be processed if mined underground. See page 190 for more
information about line-types 30 and 31.

Continued on next page

326

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Allowing for Underground Mining, Continued

The way values are There are several differences between the way values are calculated for open pit
calculated for mining and underground mining.
underground
With underground mining:
• The underground value of a block is calculated without any reference to the
total ROCK in the block.
• The processing cost, PROCOST, you supply must cover all mining costs,
which are assumed to be proportional to the amount of ore mined.
• The positional mining, the rock-type mining and the positional processing
CAFs are not applied.
• Mining dilution and recovery are ignored.

Nested pits With underground calculations, if you want to generate just one pit and have
thus set the minimum and maximum Revenue Factor to the same value, then
there are no restrictions on the methods and values you supply.
However, if you want to produce multiple nested pits, then there are certain
restrictions required to ensure that the pits nest correctly.
For each rock-type, these are:
• If one or more underground processing method(s) is defined, at least one
above-ground processing method must be defined.
And, for each element in the rock-type:
• All above-ground processing recovery fractions must be greater than, or
equal to, any underground processing recovery fractions.
• The ratio of RECOVERY/(PROCOST-REHCOST) for all above-ground
methods must be greater than, or equal to, the ratio of
RECOVERY/(PROCOST-REHCOST) for any underground methods.
• All above-ground recovery thresholds must be less than, or equal to, any
underground recovery thresholds.
• All above-ground minimum cut-offs must be less than, or equal to, any
underground minimum cut-offs.
• All above-ground maximum cut-offs must be less than, or equal to, any
underground maximum cut-offs.
These restrictions are normally complied with naturally, and will only come
into effect if you supply unusual values in the Parameters File.

Continued on next page

327

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
Allowing for Underground Mining, Continued

Nested pits (continued)

Note: If you are using positional processing CAFs (which only apply to
above-ground mining) or grade-dependent expressions the above restrictions do
not ensure that the pits are correctly generated in all cases. If such a possibility
is detected, the Optimization Program does extra checks when it is reading in
the Model File. If nesting could fail, the optimization continues, but a warning
message is issued. In this case the pits will be nested, but each may not be
strictly optimal.

Illustration of the
underground effect
Optimum pit

More profit when

mined from pit
?

More profit when

mined underground

Pit ore
Possible
u’gnd ore

328

Part 4: Techniques
5 July, 1999
 Appendices

Overview

In this part This part contains the following Appendices.

Appendix See Page

Appendix A: How the Structure Arcs Program Works 330
Appendix B: How Four-X Calculates a Block Value 337
Appendix C: How a Block Model is Defined 343
Appendix D: Ore Selection Methods: by Cut-off or Cash 346
Flow
Section A: Cut-offs 348
Section B: Cash Flow 367
Section C: How Cut-offs and Cash Flows are 370
Affected by Minima and Maxima
Appendix E: The Concepts Behind Four-X Nested Pits 377
Appendix F: How the Milawa Algorithm Works 381
Appendix G: How the Lerchs-Grossmann Algorithm Works 382
Appendix H: Four-X and Other Whittle Packages 391
Appendix I: Four-X System Limits and Precision 402
Appendix J: Error Messages 404
Appendix K: Requests for Program Enhancement 408

329
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix A: How the Structure Arcs Program Works

Overview

In this Appendix This Appendix contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

How the Structure Arcs Program Handles Slopes 331
How Possible Arcs are Generated for a Block 334
How the Structure Arcs File is Generated 336

330
Appendices
5 July, 1999
How the Structure Arcs Program Handles Slopes

Introduction Slope profiles are required by the Structure Arcs Program when creating a
Structure Arcs File. Depending on how the slope regions are defined, the slope
profiles may be defined in the sub-regions part of the Parameters File or in a
Slope Profiles File.
Note: These slopes set maxima to the slopes of the final pit outline. If the
outline is following the ore body (e.g. along an ore footwall), the slopes may be
shallower.

How the Structure For each slope profile, the Structure Arcs Program first converts the slope
Arcs Program requirements into an inverted “cone” that defines the rock that must be mined to
deals with slopes expose a point at the tip of the cone.
At each bearing specified, this cone has the required slope. Between these
bearings the slope is interpolated.
If only one bearing and slope is specified, the slope is the same all round, and
the bearing is ignored.

Example 1 Consider bearings BA and BB, with BB greater than BA, and corresponding
slopes SA and SB.
The interpolation formula for the slope at a bearing B, between BA and BB, is
as follows.

  1  BB − B B − BA  1 1 
arctan min  + , , 
 
 BB − BA tan SA  ( ) ( )
tan SB tan SA cos B − BA tan SB cos BB − B  

Continued on next page

331
Appendices
5 July, 1999
How the Structure Arcs Program Handles Slopes, Continued

Example 1 (continued)

If you find the formula somewhat daunting, consider the following figure.

This is a horizontal section through part of the inverted “cone” with slopes
specified as above, and with SA being steeper than SB.
The curved line, PQR, is the initial interpolation line, but note that between P
and Q it curves outside the tangent to the slope SA.
This would rarely be what the engineer would want, so the Structure Arcs
Program uses the tangent (straight line PQ) until it reaches Q, and then follows
the curve QR. This explains why the formula above contains a minimum
function.

Continued on next page

332
Appendices
5 July, 1999
How the Structure Arcs Program Handles Slopes, Continued

Example 2: a more In a more extreme situation with, say, a steep slope to the north and a shallow
extreme situation one to the south, without the limitation to the tangent, a single block ore body
would produce a heart shaped pit, as shown below.

Under such circumstances, the Structure Arcs Program uses the straight line,
PQR, rather than the curve PQR.
This use of tangents to the slope wall sets a minimum bearing difference for a
particular change of slope. This is because neither slope radius can go beyond
a right-angle to the other slope radius.
For two slopes SA and SB, where SA is greater than SB, as in the example
above, the minimum bearing difference is:

 tan SB 
arccos 
 tan SA 

Slopes that change If you have slopes that change more quickly than this, then any program except
more quickly than the Edit Parameters Program will detect it when it reads the slope profile, and
this will show on the screen and in the print file the minimum bearing difference
required.
The Edit Parameters Program only detects the problem when you “validate” the
data that you are editing.

333
Appendices
5 July, 1999
How Possible Arcs are Generated for a Block

How Four-X works Having created the inverted cone for a particular sub-region, Four-X then works
out the minimum out the minimum set of arcs that will ensure that the necessary blocks will be
set of arcs removed, if these arcs are applied to all blocks.

Example The procedure is complicated and works in three dimensions, but the following
example in two dimensions will illustrate it.

In the above example, the desired slope can be achieved by using just the three
arcs shown by dashed lines with arrow heads for each block. This is because,
when these three arcs are applied to all of the blocks, chaining of the block
dependencies results in every block with a centre above the line of the desired
slope being mined, if the bottom left-hand block is mined.
In this case we have considered 8 benches. If we had only considered 3
benches, we would only have found two of the arcs, and the slopes would have
been steeper.
Clearly, the more benches we examine, the more accurately we can reproduce
the slopes. For Four-X, you specify the number to be examined, by supplying
the number of “benches to consider” when generating the structure arcs for
each sub-region in the Parameters File or for each slope profile on a Slope
Profile File.

Continued on next page

334
Appendices
5 July, 1999
How Possible Arcs are Generated for a Block, Continued

Working in three In practice, when working in three dimensions, it typically requires between 50
dimensions and 100 arcs per block to ensure an average slope accuracy of 1 degree, which
is sufficient for most purposes.
The number of benches required for this depends on the proportions of the
blocks. We suggest a way of calculating a starting number in the section on the
Parameters File, on page 201. However, note that there is an inherent limitation
to the accuracy, which is the fact that the Optimization Program can only
“mine” whole blocks.

Shallow models or Some models that are shallow and/or have wide blocks can present slope
models that have modelling difficulties. In these cases the Re-blocking Program can be used to
wide blocks split the blocks to make them narrower.

335
Appendices
5 July, 1999
How the Structure Arcs File is Generated

How the Structure When these generic lists of arcs per block have been generated for each
Arcs Program sub-region, the Structure Arcs Program examines each block in the model and
generates the adds structure arcs appropriate to it to the Structure Arcs File.
Structure Arcs File
During this operation, it checks for and rejects arcs that go outside the model,
and adjusts arcs which start in one slope region and end in another.
The arcs are stored as lists towards each block from below, and consequently
no arcs are generated for the bottom bench.

If Additional Arcs If an Additional Arcs File is supplied, the Structure Arcs Program adds the arcs
File used from it to the end of the Structure Arcs File.

336
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix B: How Four-X Calculates a Block Value

Values Used from the Model File and Parameters File

Introduction In calculating a block value, Four-X uses information from the Model File and
from the Parameters File.

Values from the The values from the Model File are listed in the following table.
Model File
Note: We have given the different items code names so that the values can be
easily identified in the flowcharts that follow.
Those marked with an asterisk (*) are optional and can be ignored at the first
reading.

Value Code name

The total tonnage of the block ROCK

The ratio between the cost of mining waste, where this block MINADJ*
is, and the cost of mining waste at the Reference Block
The ratio between the processing cost, where this block is, PROADJ*
and the processing cost at the Reference Block

For each parcel within the block, if any:

Value Code name

The rock-type of the parcel TYPE
The tonnage of the parcel PAR

For each element:

Value Code name

The quantity of the element, if any ELEM

Continued on next page

337
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Values Used from the Model File and Parameters File, Continued

Values from the The values from the Parameters File are listed in the following table.
Parameters File
Note: We have given the different items code names so that the values can be
easily identified in the flowcharts that follow.
Those marked with an asterisk (*) are optional and can be ignored at the first
reading.

Value Code name

The reference mining cost MINCOST

The mining dilution factor MINDIL*

The mining recovery factor MINREC*

The fraction of the base case revenue to use in this REVFAC

optimization

For each element:

Value Code name

The price for a unit of product PRICE

The cost of selling a unit of product SELCOST*

For each rock-type:

Value Code name

The cost per tonne of rehabilitating this rock-type if it is REHCOST*
mined and dumped
The mining CAF for this rock-type TYPADJ*

For each allowed processing-method/rock-type combination:

Value Code name

The cost per tonne of processing this rock-type, by this PROCOST
method

Continued on next page

338
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Values Used from the Model File and Parameters File, Continued

Values from the Parameters File (continued)

For each element within a method/type combination:

Value Code name

The extra cost per input unit of this element, when processing ELCOST*
this rock-type by this method
The fraction of the element recovered at high grade, when RECOVERY
processing this rock-type by this method
The threshold below which no product at all is recovered, THRESHOLD*
when processing this rock-type by this method
The minimum cut-off that can be used, when processing this MINCUT*
rock-type by this method
The maximum cut-off that can be used, when processing this MAXCUT*
rock-type by this method

339
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Calculation

Introduction Four-X calculates the value of a block by adding together the cash flows
associated with each parcel, and subtracting the cost of mining the whole block
as waste.

Where optional If the optional values (i.e. asterisked values (*), above) are ignored, there is no
values ignored underground option, and ore selection is by cut-off.
In this case, Four-X calculates the value of a block as follows.

Set BLOCKAG to zero

For each parcel in the block, if any:
For each processing method suitable for this parcel, if any:
If the parcel passes the cut-off criteria
Set PARVAL to -PARxPROCOST
For each element in this parcel, if any:
Set REVENUE to
ELEMxRECOVERYxPRICExREVFAC
Set PARVAL
to PARVAL + REVENUE
Next element
Add PARVAL to BLOCKAG
Go to the next parcel
End If
Next processing method
Next parcel
Subtract ROCKxMINCOST from BLOCKAG
Set BLOCKVAL to BLOCKAG

Where:
• BLOCKAG is the value of the block if it is mined above ground.
• BLOCKVAL is the value of the block (in this simple case equal to
BLOCKAG).
• REVENUE is the value of the element recovered from the parcel.
• PARVAL is the cash flow from processing the parcel.

Process where ore The procedure is very similar if ore selection is by cash flow, except that parcel
selection is by cash values are calculated for all processing methods and the best is used, provided
flow that it produces a better cash flow than treating the parcel as waste.

Continued on next page

340
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Calculation, Continued

Where all optional If all the optional values are taken into account, the procedure for calculating
values taken into the value of a block is as follows.
account

Set BLOCKAG, BLOCKUG and TMPADJ to zero

For each parcel in the block, if any:
Add the PARx(TYPADJ-1.0) to TMPADJ
Set REHVAL to PARxREHCOST
For each above ground processing method suitable for this parcel, if any:
If the parcel passes the cut-off criteria
Set PARVAL to -PARxMINDILxMINRECxPROADJxPROCOST
For each element in this parcel, if any:
Set AVAILMET to the maximum of zero and
(ELEMi - PARxTHRESHOLD)
Set REVENUE to
AVAILMETxMINRECxRECOVERYxPRICExREVFAC
Set SELLVAL to
AVAILMETxMINRECxRECOVERYxSELCOST
Set ELEMVAL to
AVAILMETxMINRECxELCOST
Set PARVAL
to PARVAL + REVENUE-SELLVAL-ELEMVAL
Next element
Add PARVAL to BLOCKAG
Go to check underground processing methods
End If
Next processing method
(The parcel is not worth processing)
Subtract REHVAL from BLOCKAG
For each underground processing method suitable for this parcel, if any:
If the parcel passes the cut-off criteria
Set PARVAL to -PARxPROCOST
For each element in this parcel, if any:
Set AVAILMET to the maximum of zero and
(ELEMi - PARxTHRESHOLD)
Set REVENUE to
AVAILMETxRECOVERYxPRICExREVFAC
Set SELLVAL to
AVAILMETxRECOVERYxSELCOST
Set ELEMVAL to
AVAILMETxELCOST
Set PARVAL
to PARVAL + REVENUE-SELLVAL-ELEMVAL
Next element
Add PARVAL to BLOCKUG
Go to next parcel
End If
Next processing method
Next parcel
Subtract (ROCK+TMPADJ)xMINADJxMINCOST from BLOCKAG
BLOCKVAL = BLOCKAG - BLOCKUG

Continued on next page

341
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Calculation, Continued

Where all optional values taken into account (continued)

Where:
• BLOCKUG is the value of the block if it is mined underground.
• REHVAL is the total rehabilitation cost for the parcel.
• AVAILMET is the element content of the parcel above the processing
recovery threshold.
• SELLVAL is the cost of selling the recovered element.
• ELEMVAL is the cost of processing the element.

Process where ore Again, the procedure is very similar if ore selection is by cash flow, except that
selection by cash parcel values are calculated for all processing methods and the best is used,
flow provided that it produces a better cash flow than treating the parcel as waste.

Utilities Program The Utilities Program has facilities for printing out the details, like those shown
above, of actual block value calculations using your data. For more
information see page 164.

342
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix C: How a Block Model is Defined

Block Model

Introduction A block model is a collection of data that contains estimates of things, such as
element grade and density, for a set of blocks that include the ore body and its
surrounds. This is usually prepared with your Generalised Mining Package
(GMP) and is contained in a Model File.
Details of the precise data requirements for a Four-X Model File start on page
214.

Model framework We use the term “model framework” to denote a rectangular region of space
that is divided into a number of such blocks, all rectangular and of the same
size.
Example

The above figure shows such a region with one of the blocks outlined.
The only restriction set by Four-X on the size and proportions of a block is that
an exact number of them must fit into the model along each side. That is, the
size of the model framework in any direction must be a multiple of the block
size in that direction.
The position of each block in the model framework is defined by the block
indices IX, IY and IZ. These are counts of block positions along each of the
axes, starting from 1.
Note: We use X, Y and Z rather than Easting, Northing and Elevation because
not all models are aligned by the compass. Note that blocks are numbered from
the bottom up in the Z direction.

343
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Sub-regions

Introduction For certain purposes, we divide the model region into two or more sub-regions.
Each sub-region is rectangular, and is defined in the Parameters File by the
minimum and maximum block co-ordinates in the X, Y and Z directions.

Example The diagram below shows a model framework divided into four sub-regions.

20

55 11
41
40 10 60
35 36
1
1 1

In this diagram, the numbers represent block positions along each axis.
The table below shows the block limits used to define these sub-regions.

Sub-region Min X Max X Min Y Max Y Min Z Max Z

1 1 35 1 40 1 10
2 1 35 1 40 11 20
3 1 35 41 55 1 20
4 36 60 1 55 1 20

Continued on next page

344
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Sub-regions, Continued

Information Sub-regions carry slope profile definitions and the sub-region default block
contained in the tonnage. Consequently, the slope definitions and the default block tonnage can
sub-regions vary with position in the model. The order in which sub-regions are declared in
the Parameters File is immaterial.

Sub-region layout It is possible to have a different sub-region layout for slopes and for default
block tonnages. You would set these up in two different Parameters Files, and
use one with the Structure Arcs Program for structure arc generation, and the
other with the Re-blocking Program for re-blocking and the Optimization
Program for pit optimization.

345
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix D: Ore Selection Methods: by Cut-off or Cash Flow

Overview

Introduction Four-X has two methods of selecting parcels for processing. It can use cut-offs
or cash flow.
A parcel has a rock-type and one or more element grades. Zero or more
processing methods will be applicable to that rock-type. If there are zero
methods for the rock-type, the parcel is automatically mined as waste.
The ore selection method is controlled by the ore selection method flag in the
Parameters File. See page 196 for more information.

Terminology Ore selection by Cut-off

When ore selection is by cut-off, ore is selected by comparing the grades of the
material with pre-calculated processing cut-offs. If it does not satisfy the
cut-offs, it is treated as waste.
Ore selection by cash flow
When ore selection is by cash flow, ore is selected by comparing the cash flow
which would be produced by processing it and the cash flow which would be
produced by mining it as waste. If the cash flow from processing it is higher,
the material is treated as ore. If not, it is treated as waste.

Continued on next page

346
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Overview, Continued

In this Appendix This Appendix contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

Section A: Cut-offs 348
Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off 348
Calculation
The Derivation of the Formula for a Marginal 354
Cut-off
The Formula for a Cut-over 359
Multiple Processing Methods 360
Cut-offs with Multiple Elements 361
Ranked Cut-offs 363
Display of Cut-offs and Cut-overs and Cut-off 366
Scaling
Section B: Cash Flow 367
Ore Selection by Cash Flow 367
Section C: How Cut-offs and Cash Flows are Affected by 370
Minima and Maxima
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum 371
Cut-offs
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Parcel 375
Grades

347
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Section A: Cut-offs

Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off Calculation

Ore selection by As mentioned above, when ore selection is by cut-off, ore is selected by
cut-off comparing the grades of the material with pre-calculated processing cut-offs. If
it does not satisfy the cut-offs, it is treated as waste.
For an explanation of how multiple cut-offs are handled, see Cut-offs with
Multiple Elements on page 361.
If more than one processing method is applicable, the grades are compared with
the cut-offs of each in turn, in the order in which they are specified in the
Parameters File.
Below we explain how cut-offs are calculated for a single element, when ore
selection is by cut-off.
We will start with a simple case and progressively introduce more complexity.

Cut-off calculation: If only one element is involved and only one processing method is applicable to
the simple case a particular rock-type, then the cut-off used to decide whether to process
material or not is that grade at which the product recovered just pays for the
processing of the material (plus any extra mining and hauling cost for ore).
That is:

Cut-off × RECOVERY × PRICE = PROCOST

- or -

PROCOST
Cut-off =
RECOVERY × PRICE

Where PROCOST is the cost of “processing”.

We assume that the decision to process or not to process is made while the
material is still in the ground. Thus, material that is not processed incurs only
the cost of mining it as waste. Material that is to be processed will often be
handled with different equipment at a greater cost, and this extra cost should be
added to the cost of processing. This is not the usual definition of processing
cost, so we have put the word “processing” in quotes to remind you of this.

Continued on next page

348
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off Calculation, Continued

Cut-off calculation: the simple case (continued)

This can be illustrated as follows.

Revenue
per tonne
ice
x Pr
ry
ve
eco
R
t=
dien
a
Gr

0 Grade

Cut-off
Cost of
"processing"

In this diagram, the thick line is referred to as the processing line. If the
processing recovery or the price increases, the line gets steeper and the cut-off
grade decreases.

Mining dilution Allowing for mining dilution (MINDIL) and mining recovery (MINREC), the
and recovery cost and revenue can be expressed as follows.

Processing cost per tonne = MINDIL × MINREC × PROCOST

Revenue per tonne = MINREC × GRADE × RECOVERY × PRICE

and hence:

(MINDIL × PROCOST)
Cut-off =
(RECOVERY × PRICE)

Continued on next page

349
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off Calculation, Continued

Mining dilution and recovery (continued)

Note that mining recovery has no effect on cut-off.

Positional The processing cost at the Reference Block is multiplied by the Positional
processing and cost Processing CAF (PROADJ) for each block.
adjustment factor
This leads to a cut-off for a parcel within a particular block of:

(PROCOST × PROADJ)
Cut-off =
(RECOVERY × PRICE)

Note that this means that the cut-offs applied by Four-X may be different in
different parts of the pit.
However, for details of how the cut-offs are scaled in Four-X, see page 366 .

Element processing Four-X provides for an extra processing cost which is proportional to the grade
cost of an element (ELCOST). This gives:

PROCOST
Cut-off =
RECOVERY × PRICE − ELCOST

Continued on next page

350
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off Calculation, Continued

Non-linear Four-X has a facility whereby you can simulate non-linear recovery by
processing recovery subtracting a “threshold” grade from the actual grade of the material before
applying the recovery fraction (THRESHOLD).
The amount of product per tonne that we get is:

(GRADE − THRESHOLD) × RECOVERY

This gives an effective recovery of:

RECOVERY
(GRADE − THRESHOLD) ×
GRADE

The sort of effective recovery fraction curves that result from this are illustrated
in the following diagram.

Recovery fraction at high grade

Effective
recovery
fraction

Different threshold grades Grade

Non-linear recovery gives:

THRESHOLD + PROCOST
Cut-off =
RECOVERY × PRICE

This is illustrated in the diagram below.

Continued on next page

351
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off Calculation, Continued

Non-linear processing recovery (continued)

Revenue
per tonne
e
P r ic
yx
er
c ov
Re
t=
ie n
ad
Gr

0 Grade

Cut-off
Cost of
"processing"

Threshold
0 grade

If a processing mill has a constant tailings grade, regardless of head grade, and
all the other product is recovered, this is easily simulated by setting the
recovery threshold to the expected tailings grade, and the recovery to 100%.

Selling cost If there is a cost which is proportional to the amount of a product sold
(SELCOST), then it can effectively be subtracted from the price.
This gives:

PROCOST
Cut-off =
[RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST)

Continued on next page

352
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ore Selection by Cut-off and Cut-off Calculation, Continued

Rehabilitation cost If there are rehabilitation costs (REHCOST) incurred when a particular type of
rock is mined as waste and dumped, this can make it more economic to process
some material at a loss, rather than mining it as waste.
This has the effect of reducing the calculated cut-off.

(PROCOST - REHCOST)
Cut-off =
(RECOVERY × PRICE)

This is illustrated in the diagram below.

Revenue
per tonne
ice
x Pr
ry
ve
eco
R
t=
dien
a
Gr

0 Grade
Rehabilitation cost

Cost of
"processing"
Cut-off

In the extreme case where the rehabilitation cost is greater than the processing
cost, the cut-off will fall to zero, and all mineralised material will be processed.

353
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Derivation of the Formula for a Marginal Cut-off

Introduction Four-X uses marginal cut-offs for each element when a single processing
method is applicable to a particular rock-type.
The formula for the marginal cut-off, taking into account all of the optional
values is explained below.

Tonnage into the The tonnage into the mill per tonne mined is:
mill

MINDIL × MINREC

Amount of product The amount of product into the mill per tonne mined is:
into the mill

GRADE × MINREC

where GRADE is the grade in the ground.

Grade input to the The grade input to the mill is:

mill

(GRADE × MINREC) GRADE

=
(MINDIL × MINREC) MINDIL

Mill recovery The mill recovery is:

 (GRADE ÷ MINDIL - THRESHOLD) 

 (GRADE ÷ MINDIL)  × RECOVERY
 

 (GRADE - THRESHOLD × MINDIL) 

=
 GRADE  × RECOVERY

Continued on next page

354
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Derivation of the Formula for a Marginal Cut-off, Continued

Product produced The amount of product produced per tonne mined is:

 (GRADE − THRESHOLD × MINDIL) 

GRADE × MINREC ×   × RECOVERY
GRADE

= (GRADE − THRESHOLD × MINDIL) × MINREC × RECOVERY

Revenue The revenue per tonne mined is:

(GRADE − THRESHOLD × MINDIL) × MINREC × RECOVERY × PRICE

Main processing The main processing cost per tonne mined is:
cost

MINDIL × MINREC × PROCOST × PROADJ

Element processing The element processing cost per tonne mined is:
cost

GRADE × MINREC × ELCOST

Selling cost The selling cost per tonne mined is:

(GRADE - THRESHOLD × MINDIL) × MINREC × RECOVERY × SELCOST

Cash flow If the material is processed, the cash flow per tonne is therefore:

(GRADE - THRESHOLD × MINDIL) × MINREC × RECOVERY × PRICE

- MINDIL × MINREC × PROCOST × PROADJ

- GRADE × MINREC × ELCOST

- (GRADE - THRESHOLD × MINDIL) × MINREC × RECOVERY × SELCOST

(GRADE - THRESHOLD × MINDIL) × MINREC × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST)

- MINDIL × MINREC × PROCOST × PROADJ

- GRADE × MINREC × ELCOST

Continued on next page

355
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Derivation of the Formula for a Marginal Cut-off, Continued

Rehabilitation cost If the material is rejected, the rehabilitation cost per tonne mined is:

REHCOST

Note that, because the decision to process or not is made while the material is
still in the ground, MINDIL and MINREC do not affect rehabilitation cost.

Cash flow and In order to calculate the marginal cut-off, we equate the cash flow per tonne
rehabilitation cost calculated above, plus the rehabilitation cost per tonne to zero.
= zero
(GRADE - THRESHOLD × MINDIL) × MINREC × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST)

- MINDIL × MINREC × PROCOST × PROADJ

- GRADE × MINREC × ELCOST

+ REHCOST

= ZERO

The necessary steps are then taken to solve this equation for GRADE.

Bringing grade The GRADE items are brought together on one side of the equation, as follows.
items together

GRADE × MINREC × RECOVERY × (PRICE − SELCOST)

- GRADE × MINREC × ELCOST

THRESHOLD × MINDIL × MINREC × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST)

+ MINDIL × MINREC × PROCOST × PROADJ

- REHCOST

Continued on next page

356
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Derivation of the Formula for a Marginal Cut-off, Continued

Dividing by This equation is then divided through by MINREC:

MINREC
GRADE × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST) - GRADE × ELCOST

THRESHOLD × MINDIL × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST)

REHCOST
+ MINDIL × PROCOST × PROADJ -
MINREC

Giving GRADE a GRADE is then given a single multiplier, as follows.

single multiplier

[
GRADE × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST) - ELCOST ]
=

MINDIL × PROCOST × PROADJ

+ THRESHOLD × MINDIL × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST)
REHCOST
-
MINREC

Dividing by the The equation is then divided through by the GRADE multiplier.
GRADE multiplier

 MINDIL × PROCOST × PROADJ 

 
 + THRESHOLD × MINDIL × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST) 
- (REHCOST ÷ MINREC) 
Cut-off =
[ RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST) - ELCOST]
- or -

[THRESHOLD × MINDIL × RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST) ]

[ RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST) - ELCOST]
Cut-off =  REHCOST 

 MINDIL × PROCOST × PROADJ - MINREC 
 
+
[ RECOVERY × (PRICE - SELCOST) - ELCOST]

Continued on next page

357
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Derivation of the Formula for a Marginal Cut-off, Continued

Removing the If the optional values MINDIL, MINREC, THRESHOLD, SELCOST,

optional values REHCOST and ELCOST are removed, this simplifies to:

(PROCOST × PROADJ)
Cut-off =
(RECOVERY × PRICE)

358
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Formula for a Cut-over

Introduction If we use techniques similar to those shown in the derivation of the formula for
a cut-off on page 348, we get the following formula for a cut-over between two
processing methods “A” and “B”:

 
 MINDIL × (PRICE - SELCOST) 
 
 
 × (THRESHOLDA × RECOVERYA - THRESHOLDB × RECOVERYB) 
 
 - MINDIL × PROADJ × (PROCOSTA - PROCOSTB) 
 
Cut-over =  RECOVERYA × (PRICE - SELCOST) - ELCOSTA 
 
 
 - RECOVERYB × (PRICE - SELCOST) - ELCOSTB 
 

If we remove the optional values MINDIL, MINREC, THRESHOLD,

SELCOST and ELCOST, this simplifies to:

[(PROCOST − PROCOST ) × PROADJ ]

B A

[(RECOVERY - RECOVERY ]
Cut-over =
A B

359
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Multiple Processing Methods

Introduction If more than one processing method is applicable to a particular rock-type then,
when ore selection is by cut-off, Four-X looks at the processing methods, in the
order in which they are specified in the Parameters File, and selects the first
method that passes the cut-off criteria.
Thus, the order in which methods are described in the Parameters File can be
important.
For example, for a mill and heap leach operation, it is important to describe the
mill first.

Diagram Graphically, the “processing lines” are laid on top of each other and the highest
at each point is used. Where this process leads to a grade at which we change
from one processing method to another, we refer to this grade as a cut-over,
rather than a cut-off.
The figure below shows the effect for a mill and heap leach operation, where it
is cheaper to heap leach material, but the recovery fraction is less.

Revenue Mill
per tonne

Heap leach

Cut-over

0 Grade

Cut-off

With this arrangement, Four-X will put material that is above the cut-over
through the mill. It will heap leach material that is between the cut-over and the
cut-off, and it will mine material that is below the cut-off as waste. The thick
combined processing line reflects this.

360
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Cut-offs with Multiple Elements

Introduction When there are two or more elements with cut-offs, Four-X uses an approach
which has the same effect as using an equivalent metal.

Example 1 This is illustrated below for the case where there are two elements P and Q with
cut-offs as shown.
Note that any grade combination can be represented by a point in the plane of
the graph.

P
P cut-off

Process

Don't process

Q cut-off Q

If the sum of the grades divided by the corresponding cut-offs is greater than
one, then the material is processed.
Note: This can lead to an apparently strange situation where the average grade
of an element processed is below the cut-off for that element.

Continued on next page

361
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Cut-offs with Multiple Elements, Continued

Example 2 The material in the shaded area in the following diagram is below both cut-offs,
but still gives a positive cash flow when processed, because both elements
make a contribution.

P
Process
Process
P cut-off

Process
Process

Don't process

Q cut-off Q

Note that, if non-linear grade-dependent expressions are used for the prices or
costs, the exact line which divides positive and negative cash flow grade
combinations may not be straight. Nevertheless, if Four-X is using ore
selection by cut-off, a straight line is used to join the cut-offs. If this
discrepancy is important to you, consider using the method described in Ore
Selection by Cash Flow, on page 367).

362
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ranked Cut-offs

Introduction Ranked cut-offs only become relevant when there is more than one processing
method for the same rock-type and when there is more than one element
involved.

Multiple processing In a normal situation, where there are multiple processing methods and multiple
methods and elements, Four-X works out the cut-offs and cut-overs independently for each
elements element.
Graphically, this can be represented by the following diagram.

Mill

Process by method Mill

Heap leach
Process
by method
Heap leach

Don't process

Heap leach Mill Q

Continued on next page

363
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ranked Cut-offs, Continued

Multiple processing methods and elements (continued)

However, it is possible that the recoveries, costs and so forth, can be very
different for each element in relation to each processing method, creating a
situation like the one shown in the following diagram.

Mill

Heap leach

Waste

Mill Heap leach Q

Unless Four-X calculates the cut-offs, in this situation you would have to resort
to ore selection by cash flow. See page 367 for more information.

Continued on next page

364
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ranked Cut-offs, Continued

Ranked cut-offs However, if Four-X calculates the cut-offs, it can force the cut-offs to be
ranked. That is, they are in the same ranked order along each axis.
This is shown in the following diagram.

Mill

Process
by method Process by
Heap leach Heap leach method Mill

Waste

Heap Mill
leach Q

Note: In this situation, you cannot specify minimum cut-offs, and maximum
cut-offs must be in the same order for the different processing methods.

365
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Display of Cut-offs and Cut-overs and Cut-off Scaling

Introduction The cut-offs and cut-overs produced by the Optimization Program, the Analysis
Program and the Utilities Program are rounded to the number of decimal places
that you specify for cut-offs and grades. These rounded values are then used in
ore selection.

Cut-offs in the It is important to realise that cut-offs and cut-overs reported by the
Optimization and Optimization Program and the Analysis Program are always for processing
Analysis Programs material at the Reference Block. See Cost adjustment factors on page 295.
If positional processing CAFs in the Model File are in effect, then the cut-offs
and cut-overs calculated for the parcels of a particular block are affected by the
processing CAF for that block, as is explained below.

Cut-off scaling When the processing cost adjustment factor in a block is other than 1.0, Four-X
scales the cut-offs and cut-overs as follows:

Cut-off = (CUTREF - THRESHOLD) × PROADJ + THRESHOLD

Where CUTREF is the cut-off at the Reference Block.

If you examine the formulae given for cut-offs and cut-overs on pages 348 and
359 respectively, you will realise that, when optional values are in use, the
above simplified adjustment may not always be exactly correct.
We have used this approach in the belief that it is better to do something that
the user can understand easily and can use on the pit floor, than to be
technically exact.
Note that this approximation can only affect the ore selection. It does not affect
the cash flow calculations, which are always exact.
If you wish to know the cut-offs to use on the pit floor for different processing
CAFs, there is an option in the Utilities Program which will enable you to print
them out. This option also gives a warning if the scaling approximation used
by the Optimization Program and the Analysis Program is significantly different
from the correct cut-off.
See Chapter 8: Utilities Program (FXUT) on page 149.

366
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Section B: Cash Flow

Ore Selection by Cash Flow

Ore selection by When ore selection is by cash flow, ore is selected by comparing the cash flow
cash flow which would be produced by processing it and the cash flow which would be
produced by mining it as waste. If the cash flow from processing it is higher,
the material is treated as ore. If not, it is treated as waste.
If more than one processing method is applicable, the one which produces the
highest cash flow is used.
In most cases, ore selection by cash flow will produce the same result as that
produced by the use of marginal cut-offs.
However there are some cases where this is not true. The following example
will make this clear.

Example Consider products P and Q with Mill A and Mill B:

• The price of product, P, is $100 per tonne.
• The price of product, Q, is $100 per tonne.
The details for the mills are as follows.

Details Mill A Mill B

Processing cost $18 per tonne $18 per tonne
Recovery of product P 90% 60%
Recovery of product Q 60% 90%
Cut-off for P alone 0.2 0.3
Cut-off for Q alone 0.3 0.2

Continued on next page

367
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ore Selection by Cash Flow, Continued

Mill A
For Mill A we can draw a line on the plane of all grade combinations which
divides those grade combinations for which it is profitable to send material to
Mill A from those for which it is not.

Product P

Cut-off for P
0.2

Send to Mill A

Waste

Cut-off for Q 0.3 Product Q

Continued on next page

368
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Ore Selection by Cash Flow, Continued

Mills A and B
When we add Mill B we get the following.

Product P

Mill B cut-off 0.3

Send to Mill B

Send to
Mill A cut-off 0.2 Mill A

Send to Mill A

Waste

Send to Mill B
Mill B cut-off 0.2 Mill A cut-off 0.3 Product Q

Clearly, it is not possible here to use cut-offs to select material for each mill so
as to give the highest cash flow in all cases. The only option is to adopt a grade
control system which is based on cash flows.
Whilst this case is artificial, real cases do occur which are just as complicated,
particularly where deleterious elements are involved.

369
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Section C: How Cut-offs and Cash Flows are Affected by Minima
and Maxima

Overview

Introduction When ore selection is by cut-off, any minima or maxima that you include in the
Parameters File are used as minimum or maximum cut-offs. When ore
selection is by cash flow, they are used as minimum or maximum parcel
grades.
The difference may appear subtle, but it is important. It is explained in this
section which contains the following topics:
• The effects of minimum and maximum cut-offs
• Minimum and maximum parcel grades

370
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Cut-offs

Introduction When ore selection is by cut-off, Four-X initially calculates its cut-offs so as to
maximize the cash flow. However, minimum and maximum cut-offs can
override these calculated cut-offs.

Minimum cut-offs If the minimum cut-off for a particular rock-type and processing method
combination is lower than the calculated cut-off, it has no effect.
If the minimum cut-off is higher than the calculated cut-off, then it forces the
cut-off higher, as is shown below. This may cause material that could have
been processed at a profit to be rejected.

Revenue
per tonne

Minimum
cut-off

Cut-off
0 Grade

Cost of
"processing"

Continued on next page

371
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Cut-offs, Continued

Maximum cut-offs A maximum cut-off works in exactly the opposite way to a minimum cut-off.
If it is higher than the calculated cut-off, it has no effect.
If it is lower than the calculated cut-off, it forces the cut-off down, as is shown
below. This may cause material to be processed at a loss.

Revenue
per tonne
ice
x Pr
ry
ve
eco
R
t=
Maximum
dien
cut-off a
Gr

0 Grade

Cost of
"processing" Cut-off

Where both are If both a minimum and a maximum are used, then the minimum will come into
used play when the gradient of the line increases with increasing price, and the
maximum will come into play when the gradient decreases with decreasing
price. If the minimum and maximum are equal, then the cut-off will be fixed,
regardless of price.
Minimum and maximum cut-offs can be specified for each
processing-method/rock-type/element combination. They apply to both cut-offs
and cut-overs.

Continued on next page

372
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Cut-offs, Continued

Example 1 The example below shows the effect of a minimum cut-off that applies to the
mill, when both mill and heap leach processing is available.

Revenue Minimum Mill

per tonne cut-off
for Mill
Cut-over Heap leach

0 Grade

Cut-off

If the minimum was below the calculated cut-over at the intersection of the two
sloping lines, it would have no effect.

Continued on next page

373
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Cut-offs, Continued

Example 2 The example below shows the effect of a maximum cut-off that applies to the
mill.

Revenue Mill
per tonne

Maximum Heap leach

cut-off
for Mill
Cut-over

0 Grade

Cut-off

Note Difference between Four-X and Four-D

Four-X differs from Four-D in that a maximum cut-off is effective on cut-overs.

Revenue Factor
The initial cut-offs, which are calculated so as to maximize cash flow, change if
the Revenue Factor changes, and thus they are different for each pit in a set of
nested pits produced by Four-X. Remember that any minima or maxima that
you specify do not change with the Revenue Factor, and they should therefore
be used with care in relation to optimization.

374
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Parcel Grades

Introduction When ore selection is by cash flow, Four-X usually treats each parcel in the
way which will maximize cash flow. However, minimum and maximum parcel
grades can override this.
A parcel with any of its grades outside the range specified by a minimum and/or
maximum parcel grade for a particular processing method is excluded from that
method.

Minimum parcel When there is only one element involved, the minimum has the same effect
grades regardless of the ore selection method. That is, a minimum cut-off and a
minimum parcel grade are the same. However, if two or more elements are
involved, the effects are very different.

Example: ore selection by cut-off

The following diagram illustrates ore selection by cut-off.

P
P cut-off

Process

Don't process

Q cut-off Q

A minimum cut-off for element Q could affect the position of that cut-off, but
parcels with Q grades below that cut-off would still be acceptable if their P
grade was sufficiently high.

Continued on next page

375
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Effects of Minimum and Maximum Parcel Grades, Continued

Minimum parcel grades (continued)

Example: ore selection by cash flow

Contrast this with ore selection by cash flow, illustrated below.

Will not be May be processed

processed if the cash flow is
high enough

Minimum Q
Q grade

Here material with a Q grade less than the minimum will not be processed
regardless of the P grade and regardless of the cash flow.
If there is more than one element and any of the parcel’s grades is below the
minimum, it will be rejected.

Maximum parcel The maximum has a very different effect with the two different ore selection
grades methods, even when there is only one element involved.
If ore selection is by cut-off, the cut-off cannot be above the maximum, so
material with grades above the cut-off will always be processed.
If ore selection is by cash flow, material with grades above the maximum will
never be processed. If there is more than one element, and any of the parcel’s
grades is above the maximum, it will be rejected.

376
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix E: The Concepts Behind Four-X Nested Pits

Introduction Four-X uses a Model File containing details of the content of each block, but,
for optimization purposes, we need a single value for each block. This value is
the cash flow (positive or negative) that would result from mining the block.

For optimization purposes it is important to assume that the block has been
uncovered. It is incorrect to allow for stripping costs, because the optimizer
does this.

If we calculate the block values for a particular model we will get a certain set
of block values that, when used in a pit optimization, will lead to a particular pit
outline, the optimal outline.

Example 1 For the purposes of this example, assume the pit outline is outline “A” in the
following diagram.

Air

Earth

Within an optimal outline, every block is “worth mining”.

Each block consists of zero or more parcels and, possibly, some undefined rock
which can be regarded as another parcel.
The cash flow which results from mining a block consists of the sum of the cash
flows which result from mining its parcels.
The cash flow which results from mining a particular parcel depends on the way
we treat the parcel, and on the prices and costs associated with it. What
happens if we increase all the prices used by Four-X and keep the costs the
same?

Continued on next page

377
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Concepts Behind Four-X Nested Pits, Continued

Example 1 (continued)

Although the increase in prices may cause the parcel to be treated differently
(e.g. it may now be processed rather than treated as waste), the cash flow will
always stay the same or increase. Increasing the prices will not decrease the
cash flow which results from mining any parcel.
Thus, if we increase the prices, the value of every block within outline A will
increase or stay the same. No block value will go down. Consequently, every
block within outline A is still worth mining.

Example 2 In addition, if we do another optimization using the new values, the new
outline, shown as B below, is certain to include the whole of A. It may also
include extra blocks that were not worth mining before, but which now are
worth mining.

Air

Earth

Continued on next page

378
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Concepts Behind Four-X Nested Pits, Continued

The Four-X Consequently, if we step the prices through a series of values, doing an
Optimization optimization for each, we obtain a set of nested pit outlines, and this is, in
Program effect, what the Optimization Program in Four-X does. It multiplies all of the
prices by a series of 50 to 100 “Revenue Factors” ranging, typically, from 0.3
to 2.0, and produces a pit outline for each.
The reason for producing outlines for the smaller values of Revenue Factor is
that we want to produce inner pit shells to highlight the best positions to start
mining and to assist with the sequencing. The outlines are usually very close
together and form an almost continuous “spectrum”, where the change in
tonnage from one outline to the next is quite small. However, if the grade
increases sharply with depth, or the ore body is discontinuous, large tonnage
differences between adjacent pits can occur.
Since all the outlines obey the pit slope requirements, it is simple to determine
what sequences are permissible when mining out a particular pit.

Continued on next page

379
Appendices
5 July, 1999
The Concepts Behind Four-X Nested Pits, Continued

Example 3 Refer to the following diagram.

2-8 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b a b c d e
g f g h i j
k l m n
o p q
r s
t

In the schematic of nested pits above:

• If pit 5 is the ultimate pit, we can clearly mine in the sequence a, b, c, d, e, f,
g, h, etc.
• If the pits are sufficiently far apart to give working space, another possible
sequence is a, f, b, g, k, c, etc.
The point is that, given a set of nested pits, these sequences are clearly defined
and easy for the computer to trace, and thus to simulate various mining
schedules in order to obtain projected tonnages, grades and cash flows.
Although each set of outlines is only strictly optimal for a particular set of
costs, their usefulness goes far beyond this. Provided that the costs used are of
the same order, another optimization run with different costs will usually
produce a set of pits of very similar shape, but which are shifted relative to
those from the first run. For example, pit number 20 from one run may be very
similar to pit number 25 from the other run. It is therefore reasonable to
simulate mining with wide ranges of prices and costs using the same set of
nested pits. Once a set of costs has been settled on, a final optimization with
those costs and a repeated simulation can be run as a check.

380
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix F: How the Milawa Algorithm Works

Introduction The Milawa Algorithm is part of the Analysis Program. It is a strategic

scheduling tool which differs from most other schedules in that it is designed
specifically for long term scheduling.
It can operate in either NPV mode where it will seek to maximize NPV or
balancing mode where it will seek to maximize the use of production facilities
early in the life of the mine. For more information, see page 124.

How the Milawa The Milawa algorithm utilises three routines.

Algorithm works
The first routine takes a set of variables and generates a feasible schedule from
them. The number of variables required depends on the number of:
• Benches in the ultimate pit
• Push-backs
- and -
• Time periods in the life of the mine
The second is an evaluation routine which calculates the NPV or balance for an
individual schedule.
The third routine searches the domain of feasible schedules for the one which
has the highest NPV or best balance. The routine also has logic built in to
decide when to stop searching.
The Milawa Algorithm does not generate and evaluate all feasible schedules, as
the number of feasible schedules in any analysis is extremely large. Rather it
strategically samples the feasible domain and gradually focuses the search
(without necessarily narrowing it) until it converges on its solution.
The number of evaluations required to converge on a solution varies, but 5,000
is typical, and this usually takes less than a minute.
Using the NPV mode as an example, the feasible domain can be viewed as a
multi-dimensional volume, where each point in the volume has a corresponding
NPV. The optimum solution is the point which has the highest NPV, but it is
possible for there to be more than one point with the maximum NPV. It is also
possible for there to be a range of other solutions which have NPVs that are
very close to the maximum. Milawa cannot guarantee to find a schedule with
the absolute maximum NPV, particularly if the highest happens to occur on a
very sharp peak. However, experience has shown that it will find a solution
with a very high NPV.

381
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix G: How the Lerchs-Grossmann Algorithm Works

Overview

Lerchs-Grossmann Four-X uses the Lerchs-Grossmann algorithm† for determining the exact
algorithm optimal shape for an open pit in three dimensions.
The method works on a block model of the ore body, and progressively
constructs lists of related blocks that should, or should not, be mined.
The final lists define a pit outline that has the highest possible total value,
subject to the required pit slopes.
This outline:
• Includes every block that is “worth mining” when waste stripping is taken
into account.
• Excludes every block that is not “worth mining”.
The method uses the values of the blocks and what are called structure arcs as
input.
For the purposes of using Four-X, there is no need for you to know the details
of how the Lerchs-Grossmann optimization method works. It is well
established and well regarded in the industry. However, for your information,
we have included the following simplified explanation which contains examples
of all the essentials of the method.

†H. Lerchs & I. F. Grossmann, “Optimum Design of Open-Pit Mines”, Joint C.O.R.S. and O.R.S.A.
Conference, Montreal, May 27-29, 1964, in Transactions, C.I.M., 1965, pp.17-24.

382
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration

Demonstration of The Lerchs-Grossmann three-dimensional optimization method achieves its aim

how the by manipulating the block values, and the structure arcs, which are explained in
Lerchs-Grossmann the Appendix on slope handling, starting on page 331. It uses no other
optimization information.
method works
In other words, except for the information given by the arcs, it “knows” nothing
about the positions of the blocks – nor indeed about mining.
Therefore, to demonstrate how the method works we need to work only with a
list of blocks and a list of arcs. Whether these are laid out in one, two or three
dimensions and how many arcs per block are used is immaterial to the logic of
the method, which is purely mathematical.
For simplicity, this demonstration will be in two dimensions and will use square
blocks and slopes of 45 degrees, although this is not a requirement for
Lerchs-Grossmann.

This allows us to work with only three arcs per block. These three arcs go from
a block to the horizontal row of three blocks immediately above it, as shown in
the following figure.

Continued on next page

383
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration, Continued

Demonstration of how the Lerchs-Grossmann optimization method works (continued)

This ensures that, whenever a block is mined, the three immediately above it
are mined. Since the three arcs are applied to each of the blocks, a chaining
effect ensures that, whenever any block is mined, the whole 45 degree cone
above it is also mined.
The method “flags” each block that we currently intend to mine. During the
optimization process, these flags can be turned on and off many times. A block
is flagged to be mined if it currently belongs to a linked group of blocks that
have a total value that is positive. These groups are called “branches”.
The method repeatedly scans through the blocks looking for blocks that are
flagged to be mined and that have an arc pointing to a block that is not flagged
to be mined. Whenever it finds such a situation it has to do something about it,
because we are planning to mine a block without mining all the blocks above it.
The way it resolves these situations forms the core of the Lerchs-Grossmann
method.

The following figures take you through such a search.

How the We start with a two-dimensional model below.

Lerchs-Grossmann
method scans This model is 17 blocks long and 5 blocks high. Only three blocks contain
through the blocks potential ore, and they have the values shown. All other blocks are waste and
have the value -1.0.

Continued on next page

384
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration, Continued

Step 1 We search along the bottom bench, starting at the left, as shown in the diagram
below.

As shown in this diagram, first arc from a “flagged” block that we find is to a
block which is not flagged.

Step 2 To resolve this, we link the two blocks together, as is shown in the following
diagram.

23.9 6.9 23.9

22.9

The total value of the two-block branch is 22.9. This is because we have had to
mine a block of waste which has a value of -1.0.

Step 3 We deal with the other two arcs from this block in the same way.

The total value of the four-block branch is now 20.9.

Continued on next page

385
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration, Continued

Step 4 We then continue in the same way along the bottom bench and then along the
next bench as is shown in the following diagram.

Note: Even waste blocks are flagged if they belong to a positive branch.

Step 5 As is shown in the following diagram, the next flagged block has an arc to a
block which is also flagged.

We do not create a link for this arc or for the vertical one from the same block,
because nothing has to be resolved.

Step 6 The next arc from a flagged to another flagged block is between two branches.

The procedure is unchanged - we do not insert a link.

Continued on next page

386
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration, Continued

Step 7 We continue adding links until we reach the one shown in the following
diagram.

When we add this link, the branch total will become -0.1, and all the blocks in
the branch have their flags turned off.

Step 8 The next arc of interest is from a flagged block to a block which is part of a
branch which is not flagged.

Effectively the centre and the right-hand branches can co-operate in paying for
the mining of the circled common waste block.

Continued on next page

387
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration, Continued

Step 9 The Lerchs-Grossmann method includes a procedure for combining the two
linked branches into one branch, with only one total value. This is shown in the
following diagram.

23.9 6.9 23.9

15.9 20.8

Note that there is no requirement to always branch upwards from the root.

Step 10 The next arc of interest is from a flagged block to a waste block.

Lerchs-Grossmann detects that this extra waste will remove the ability of the
centre branch to co-operate with the right-hand branch in paying for the mining
of the circled block.

Step 11 Lerchs-Grossmann includes a procedure for breaking the single branch into two
branches by removing a link.

Continued on next page

388
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration, Continued

Step 12 We continue adding links and, eventually, the total value of the left-hand
branch becomes negative.

23.9 6.9 23.9

-0.1 -0.1 8.9

The next arc after this is again between a positive and a negative branch.

Step 13 This is dealt with in the same way as before, and the left and right-hand
branches are combined into one, with one total value.

Step 14 We continue adding arcs until we reach the situation shown above.
The program then scans for arcs from blocks which are flagged to blocks which
are not flagged. However, we can see that it will find none, and the
optimization is complete.

Continued on next page

389
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Demonstration, Continued

Optimal pit Lerchs and Grossmann showed that, when no further arcs can be found that are
from a flagged block to a block that is not flagged, then the flagged blocks
constitute the optimal pit.
In this case, we have a W shaped pit that is worth 0.8, and we can see that this
is indeed the pit with the maximum possible value.

Note that the centre branch has a negative value, so that none of its blocks are
flagged and none of them are mined.
In real three-dimensional optimizations, there will usually be many scans of the
blocks, checking for arcs that have to be resolved. These continue until a scan
occurs in which none have to be resolved, and we know that the optimization is
complete.

390
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix H: Four-X and Other Whittle Packages

Interfacing with Opti-Cut

Enabling Four-X to Opti-Cut Sequence Text Files and Economics Text Files can be generated any
create Opti-Cut time a user runs a single economic scenario and a single mining schedule using
Files the Analysis Program.
To do this, you must enable Opti-Cut output from Four-X. The procedure to
enable Opti-Cut output from Four-X is as follows.

Step Action
1. Open and view the Four-X initialization file, fx.ini, using a text
editor or a word processor in pure text mode.
2. Under the [System] section header, check to see if there is a line
beginning with the words:
Opti-Cut=
• If there is a line beginning “Opti-Cut=”:
- And the line reads “Opti-Cut=Yes”, then the program is
enabled for Opti-Cut output.
- And the line reads “Opti-Cut=No”, then the program is not
enabled for Opti-Cut output. To enable Opti-Cut output, edit
the line to read “Opti-Cut=Yes”.
• If there is there is no “Opti-Cut=” line under the [System] section
header, edit the file to include “Opti-Cut=Yes” in the [System]
section.
The line “Opti-Cut=” can occur anywhere in the [System] section.
It does not need to be the first line.
3. Save the file and exit from the text editor or word processor.

Producing To produce Opti-Cut files:

Opti-Cut files
• Run the Analysis Program and enter a single economic scenario for a single
mining schedule (best, worst or user specified).
• An additional message will appear that asks whether you want to produce
Opti-Cut output.
• If you answer yes (Y), then nominate the filenames for the Sequence and
Economics Text Files. Note: They can have the same name.
See Section B: Using the Analysis Program, on page 126.

Continued on next page

391
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Interfacing with Opti-Cut, Continued

Differences There are several differences between Opti-Cut and Four-X that need to be
between Four-X taken into account when using Four-X to produce Opti-Cut files. These
and Opti-Cut differences are discussed below.

Capital costs and Opti-Cut deals with capital costs and time costs. To cater for capital costs and
time costs time costs either:
• During the Analysis Program run:
- Add capital costs
- and -
- Choose the option to enter time costs explicitly.
Note: Remember to remove explicit time costs from the unit costs
- or -
• Once the Economics Text File is produced, edit the file to take into account
capital costs and time costs.

Throughput Four-X can have throughput adjustment factors for one or more rock-types.
adjustment factors This factor is not directly available in Opti-Cut, however, it can be simulated.
If, for instance, processing is the limiting factor, then adjust the throughput
limit in the Opti-Cut Economics Text File produced by the Analysis Program.
Example
Where a mill that can handle rock-types OREA and OREB and OREB has a
throughput factor of 1.15, you could specify a throughput group in the
Economics Text File, as follows:

TG PROC OREA.Q + OREB.Q/1.15

TL PROC USER_DEFINED_LIMIT

In this example:
• In the Throughput Group Line (TG), the material that is put through to the
process (PROC) will be OREA plus OREB divided by 1.05.
In other words, this will ensure a throughput factor of 1.05 in relation to ore
type OREB.
• In the Throughput Limit Line (TL), the throughput of the process (PROC) is
limited to the <USER DEFINED LIMIT>.
Refer to the Opti-Cut Manual for other examples.

Continued on next page

392
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Interfacing with Opti-Cut, Continued

Expressions Expressions are treated slightly differently in Four-X and Opti-Cut. Therefore,
you may need to adjust the Economics Text File if expressions have been used.
Example
In Four-X the recovery can be expressed as a period variation in the following
form.

REC1 P3/REC2

In this example, the recovery is REC1 until period 3 (P3) when it is REC2.
Here, REC1 and REC2 are grade dependent expressions.
In contrast, in Opti-Cut the expression would be set up to vary by period and
then the recovery would be assigned to that expression.

393
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Differences Between Four-X and Four-D

Introduction Experienced Four-D users may find the following summary useful when
coming to grips with the changes in Four-X.
In general, the major changes have been to the Parameters File, the Model and
Results File, and the Spreadsheet codes.

File differences File differences are described in the table below.

File type Differences from Four-D

Parameters • The Parameters File has new records for expressions and
File elements.
• The processing methods have recovery and cut-offs defined
at an element level.
• MCOSTM ratios have been replaced with a Revenue Factor
which scales revenues up and down, to provide the pit shells.
• Data is entered into the Parameters File as actual costs rather
than as cost ratios.
Model File • The Model File can carry more than one element.
• Model Files based on individual element details can be
merged using the Re-blocking Program.
Results File • The Results File can carry more than one element.
• The header records contain the base value and Revenue
Factors, rather than the MCOSTM values.

Continued on next page

394
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Differences Between Four-X and Four-D, Continued

Program Differences between the Four-D and Four-X programs are detailed in the table
differences below.

Program Differences from Four-D

All • All Four-X programs refer to element or element
quantity rather than “metal”.
Edit Parameters • The operation of the Edit Parameters Program is the
Program (FXED) same, however, it also allows the user to define
expressions which can be used in place of constants.
• There is a new Menu item for elements and
processing methods that has been revised to allow for
the allocation of elements.
• Existing Four-D Parameters Files can be converted to
Four-X files using this program.
Re-blocking • The Re-blocking Program has a new option when
Program (FXRE) processing models that allows the user to merge
models which contain different elements.
• The use of GRADE in CAF expressions is replaced by
<element>.G to be more specific.
Structure Arcs • The Structure Arcs Program can now deal with slope
Program (FXST) regions which are of arbitrary shape rather than being
restricted to rectangular sub-regions.
Optimization • In the Optimization Program, the pit shell increments
Program (FXOP) are controlled by the Revenue Factors rather than the
MCOSTM values.
Pit Visualisation • The Pit Visualisation Program (equivalent to Four-D
Program (FXPI) Plan Printing Program) allows the selection of specific
elements when displaying element distributions.

Continued on next page

395
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Differences Between Four-X and Four-D, Continued

Program differences (continued)

Analysis Program • In the Four-X Analysis Program, prices must be given

(FXAN) for each product. The Parameters File change screen
has been revised to allow for increased complexity in
processing methods.
• The Analysis Program does not use cost ratios, so that
the reference mining cost can be changed in any
period without affecting other costs.
• The spreadsheet codes have changed and have been
extended. Refer to the section below.
• When a specified schedule is used, there is an option
to optimize the mining schedule.
Utilities Program • In the Utilities Program, data is provided by element.
(FXUT)

Spreadsheet code The spreadsheet codes for Four-X are similar to those for Four-D, but because
differences Four-X is a multi-element package, keywords such as METAL are now element
based, and “method” and “type” codes must be extended to include
method.element, type.element and method.type.element.

Spreadsheet codes The table below lists Four-D and corresponding Four-X spreadsheet keywords
that have changed and the allowed attributes for each of the keywords.
(period and grand
total)
Four-D keyword For Four-X, use Allowed attributes
COSTM UNDEF/UNIT-CM
GR_<n> GR_<n>.<element> /GG /GI /UG /UI /UO
METAL <element> /UG /UI /UO
<method> <method>.<element> /GG /GI /UG /UI /UO
<method>.<type> <method>.<type>.<element> /GG /GI /UG /UI /UO
OUTSIDE OUTSIDE.<element> /GG /UG
PRICE <element>/PRICE
REJECTED <type>.<element> /GR /UR
REJECTED ROCK /TR
SELLCOST <element> /CS* /DS*
Sellcost <method>.<element> /CS* /DS*
<type> <type>.<element> /GG /GI /UG /UI /UO

Continued on next page

396
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Differences Between Four-X and Four-D, Continued

New attributes for In Four-X:

Four-X
• The attributes for periods and grand totals are the same, except that the grand
totals have a B, S or W to distinguish best, specified or worst case scenarios.
In the following table, the * shows that a grand total extension is required.
• A ! indicates that the insertion of a “U” will cause the code to return to the
underground value.
• In general CP,CB,CS,CW has been replaced by CT* and DP,DB,DS,DW by
DT*.
• GM, TM and UM have been changed to GP, TP and UP

Attributes Description
/BM Benches mined so far in a push-back (e.g. 7.43)
/CE* /DE* Cost of processing due to elements
/CI* /DI* Cash income (revenue)
/CM* /DM* Cost of mining
/CP* /DP* Cost of processing
/CR* /DR* Cost of rehabilitation
/CS* /DS* Cost of selling
/CT* /DT* Cash flow - total of the other cash flows in the category
/GP* Grade in place
/GR* Grade rejected
/LIMIT Throughput limit
/OF! Cut-off
/TIME_CM Time cost rate factored into unit cost of mining
/TIME_CP Time cost rate factored into the unit cost of processing
/TIME_CS Time cost rate factored into unit cost of selling
/TP* Tonnes in place
/TR* Tonnes rejected
/UNIT_CE! Unit cost of processing due to an element
/UNIT_CM Unit cost of mining
/UNIT_CP! Unit cost of processing
/UNIT_CR Unit cost of rehabilitation

Continued on next page

397
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Differences Between Four-X and Four-D, Continued

New attributes for Four-X (continued)

Attributes Description
/UNIT_CS Unit cost of selling
/UP* Units of an element in place
/USE Percentage of a bench mined
/UR* Units of an element rejected

For an overview of in-ground, in-place and rejected codes, refer to page 255.

Revised The following is a list of revised spreadsheet codes for Four-X.

spreadsheet codes
for Four-X
Four-D Four-X
Keyword Attribute(s) Keyword Attribute(s)
ROCK C* D* ROCK CM* DM*
ROCK L ROCK LIMIT
METAL LI <element> LIMIT
GR_<n> C* D* GR_<n> CE* DE*
GR_<n> L GR_<n> LIMIT
<method> C* D* <method> CT* DT*
<method> L <method> LIMIT
<method>.<type> C* D* <method>.<type> CE* DE*
<method>.<type> CO <method>.<type> OF
.<element>
<method>.<type> MA <method>.<type> MAX!
.<element>
<method>.<type> MI <method>.<type> MIN!
.<element>
<method>.<type> RF <method>.<type> RECPER
.<element>
<method>.<type> RT <method>.<type> RECTHR
.<element>
<type> C* D* <type> CM* DM*
<type> MF <type> UNIT_CM
<type> RC <type> UNIT_CR
<type> TF <type> THRFACT
<type> TM* <type> TP*

398
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Merging Elements from Different Four-D Model Files

Introduction Some GMPs have facilities for outputting Four-D Model Files, but not Four-X
Model Files.

Merging elements To successfully merge elements in this situation you will need to follow the
steps in the table below.

Step Action
1. Export separate Four-D Model Files containing the individual
elements from your GMP.
Make these Model Files as similar as possible.
2. Create corresponding Parameters Files (these may have been
produced by your GMP when it produced the Model Files).
3. Change each Four-D Parameters File into the corresponding Four-X
Parameters File.
Do this by reading each Four-D Parameters File into the Edit
Parameters Program (see page 33 for more information) and then:
• Fix the mining default waste cost
• Change the single element name (EL1) to the relevant element
code
- and -
• Save the file
Note: The different elements in the Model Files should be shown as
occupying the first position in the Model File in their respective Parameters
File. When they are merged they will be positioned in the order that the files
are read.

Continued on next page

399
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Merging Elements from Different Four-D Model Files, Continued

Merging elements (continued)

Step Action
4. Run the Re-blocking Program:
• Use mode one
• Choose the number of input Model Files that you want to use
• Choose the merge† option
• Make sure you take the option to create a new Parameters File
Note: Always use the original Model Files from your GMP as input
files to this merge operation. Do not re-block them first, as this may
interfere with the element merging.
5. Use the Edit Parameters Program to check and correct any
inappropriate values in the new Parameters File.

Merging Process Before the merge starts, the Re-blocking Program first sets the positions of the
elements in the merged Model File. In this simple case, element “A” would go
in position 1 and element “B” would go in position 2.
More generally, the element positions for the first model are retained and any
new elements from subsequent models are allocated successive positions, as
required.
The first Model File is then read in and stored. The second and any subsequent
files are then read in and merged, block by block, with the stored model.
During merging, where the same block occurs in the stored model and in the
new Model File, the information is merged according to the following rules:
• If the two blocks have exactly the same number of parcels and all parcels
match in relation to rock-type and tonnage, then, for each parcel, the element
quantities are copied from the new block into the appropriate positions in the
stored block.
Note that, where the same element appears in both blocks, the element
quantity from the new block replaces that in the stored block.
• If the blocks have different numbers of parcels, or different parcel rock-type,
tonnage or order then the system searches for the first parcel that matches the
rock-type and tonnage that has not yet been used in this merge. If it cannot
find a match, it adds the material as a new parcel.

Continued on next page

†Note: This merge facility is provided purely as an interim solution to the problem. It relies heavily on the
models which are merged being very similar, except for the elements they contain, and can produce
unexpected results if they are not. Encourage your GMP supplier to provide a Four-X interface which
outputs all the elements at once.
400
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Merging Elements from Different Four-D Model Files, Continued

Merging Process (continued)

These rules can be displayed in a flowchart as follows.

For each parcel in the new block:

For each parcel in the stored block:
If the parcel has not been used:
If the stored and new parcels have the same rock-type and tonnage:
Copy the element quantities from the new parcel to the stored parcel
Deal with the next new parcel
End If
End If
Next stored parcel
If a match was not found:
Add the new parcel to the stored block with the elements repositioned as
required
End If

Next new parcel

• If any blocks have different numbers of parcels, the system will report the
first 50 differences with the message:

*** WARNING: MODEL BLOCK X,Y,Z DOES NOT HAVE THE

SAME NUMBER OF PARCELS FOR MERGE

where X,Y,Z are the block co-ordinates of the block.

401
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix I: Four-X System Limits and Precision

Current limits To view the current Four-X system limits use, the Utilities Program and choose
the “show Four-X system limits” mode. Refer to page 171 for further
information.

Number of blocks The number of blocks that can be held in memory, without using the software
that can be held in virtual memory system, is particularly important during optimization.
memory
Each block requires 16 bytes (characters) of memory, and if, after the
preliminary scan(s) the blocks will fit into memory, then the program will run
a lot faster.
This is because the Optimization Program does not have to spend time copying
block details back and forth, between memory and disk.
Note that the program will always run, no matter how many blocks you have
(up to 2 billion), but if you try to optimize, say, a one hundred million block
model on a PC, not only will you need a great deal of disk space, but you will
also have to wait a long time for the result.
Fortunately, you should never need to optimize such a big model. This is
explained in the section on block sizes which starts on page 307.
Virtual memory mode
Whenever you work with more blocks than will fit into memory, the programs
automatically switch into virtual memory mode, and this is when the buffers are
used.
In this mode, the program keeps data which it has not needed recently on disk
rather than in memory. When it does need it, something else has to be written
to disk before the required data can be read into memory.
This disk reading and writing slows things down, but the alternative is to be
unable to run with so many blocks.

Continued on next page

402
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Four-X System Limits and Precision, Continued

Precision within The Parameters File gives the user control over a number of variables in the
Four-X Four-X package.
Decimal places
Line type 12 gives the user control over the number of decimal places in the
report outputs for the following fields:
• Tonnes in a block
• Totals of tonnes
• Revenue Factor values
• Small currency
• Currency totals
Line type 20 gives the user control over the decimal places used for:
• Element quantities in a block
• Element totals
• Grades
See page 178 for more information about the Parameters File.
Other variables
Other variables are rounded to a precision, as specified below.

Variable Number of decimal places

Block dimensions 2
Bearings 2
Cost adjustment factors 3
Discount percentage 2
Hours between restarts 2
Recovery fraction 3
Rock throughput factor 3
Slopes 2

403
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix J: Error Messages

Overview

Introduction A package such as Four-X that runs on a wide range of machines, can produce
a wide range of error messages if things go wrong.

Types of error The error messages produced by Four-X fall into three broad categories.
messages
These are:
• Data checks
• Problem traps
• System error messages.

In this section This section contains the following topics

Topic See Page

Data Checks 405
Problem Traps 406
System Error Messages 407

404
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Data Checks

Introduction Four-X never assumes that the data that it is given is correct, and it does
whatever checks it can as soon as it can.
For example, when you give any of the programs (except for the Edit
Parameters Program) the name of the Parameters File, it immediately reads it
and checks it. Any errors that Four-X detects are reported on the screen and in
the print file.

Error messages Data check error messages, produced by Four-X, are recognisable because they
all start with three asterisks (***) and are displayed in capital letters.
We have tried to make the meaning of these messages self-explanatory, so there
is little point in listing all of them here.
We have, however, listed two of the more common types of error messages
below.

On a PC, when a program is started, you may get one of the following error
messages:
“Warning - available memory restricted” error message.

*** WARNING - AVAILABLE MEMORY IS RESTRICTED

SEE NOTES IN README FILE THAT CAME WITH THIS SOFTWARE

“Not enough memory available to run” error message.

*** NOT ENOUGH MEMORY AVAILABLE TO RUN

SEE NOTES IN README FILE THAT CAME WITH THIS SOFTWARE

Refer to the readme file for a discussion of how available memory might be
increased.

Note: There is a limit to the power of data checking. If you inadvertently give
Four-X wrong data that could still be valid, it cannot detect the error.

405
Appendices
5 July, 1999
Problem Traps

Introduction The programming of Four-X is defensive to the point that it does not even trust
itself to do the right thing.
There are nearly four hundred points in the code where the Programmer’s
understanding of the problem and the integrity of the program itself are
checked.

Error messages If any of the programs ever stop and display the message:

PROGRAM ERROR ? IN ??????

where the question marks are replaced by various letters, you should inform
Whittle Programming immediately, giving the details of the message and the
circumstances under which it appeared.

406
Appendices
5 July, 1999
System Error Messages

Introduction Four-X, like all application packages, uses the facilities of the computer
operating system when starting up, reading the data input, producing output and
stopping. It also uses the facilities of a FORTRAN compiler.
When either the operating system or the compiler detects an error, it usually
issues a message and stops the run, without giving the Four-X code the
opportunity to take any action. Consequently the operating system error
message is all you get.
Since Four-X can run on a variety of operating systems and compilers, there is
very little that can be said to help you deal with these messages, except to
suggest that you take the wording very literally.
If you report one of these system messages to Whittle Programming, please be
sure to include details of any computer gobbledegook that accompanies it.

Error messages Common system error messages are described below:

• “Out of disk space” and “Unable to write file” error messages
The most common problem is to run out of disk space. The message this
produces can be anything from “Out of disk space” to the less helpful
“Unable to write file”.
If this happens, you will have to clear something off your disk before you
can run Four-X successfully.
If, after getting one of these messages, you find that there appears to be
ample free disk space, it is important to note that the Four-X programs
often use temporary files, which the system automatically deletes when the
program stops. As a consequence, it is quite possible for there to be free
disk space after the run, even though the message indicated that there was
none left.
Also note that UNIX systems sometimes put temporary files in a special
directory which may have space restrictions, and this is not apparent in
your working directory.

• “Unable to open file” error message

On a PC, another confusing error arises with the message “Unable to open
file”. This is usually caused by the “Files=” line in the CONFIG.SYS file
being omitted or set to too low a number.

• “Can’t read” error message.

It also possible to get a “Can’t read” error. This could be caused by
another program already reading the file.
For example, if an automatic backup program is making a backup of the
file, a Four-X program may not be able to access the file at that point in
time.

407
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Appendix K: Requests for Program Enhancement

Requests From time to time, users may feel that additional features or functions would
make their life easier.
We certainly want to make your task as easy as possible. We are responsive to
users’ needs and all requests will be considered and implemented wherever
possible.
The more detailed an explanation you can give, the better your chances of
having your request implemented.
If you have a request, e-mail us at [email protected]. Alternatively,
photocopy this page, fill it out and fax it to Whittle Programming on one of the
following facsimile numbers:

International Facsimile (61 3) 9899 3799

USA Facsimile 1 800 942 2460
Canada Facsimile 1 800 665 4312

Name:
Company:

Contact details:

Suggestion:

408
Appendices
5 July, 1999
 Glossary

Additional Arcs An Additional Arcs File is text file containing details of Arcs that are additional
File to those required to maintain the slopes specified in the Parameters File.

Air block An air block is a block that is entirely above the earth’s surface. It has exactly
zero tonnage, no parcels, and is given a value of zero during optimization.

Analysis In Four-X, the term analysis refers to carrying out runs of the Analysis Program
and considering its output.
The runs simulate the operation of the mine with different pit sizes, throughput
limits and economic circumstances.

Analysis request An analysis request is the information that you provide to the program for it to
do an analysis.

Arc An arc is an ordered association between two blocks which indicates that, if the
first block is to be mined, then the second must also be mined, but not vice
versa. These are used during optimization to indicate the required slopes.

Argument An argument is a value which is input to a mathematical procedure or function.

Bench A bench is a horizontal layer of blocks.

Binary file A binary file is a disk file containing information that is purely for computer
use, and that cannot be displayed on the screen, printed, or edited as text.

Block A block is a rectangular volume of space for which density and grade estimates
are made by interpolation from drill-hole and other data.

Block model A block model is a regular set of blocks covering the ore body and its
surrounds.

Continued on next page

409
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

CAF See Cost adjustment factors.

Cash flow The cash flow is the net cash income generated by the operation of a mine or
some component of it.

Character values Character values are made up of alphabetical characters and are usually a code.

Constant A constant is a value that is fixed and unchanging for the purposes of a
particular calculation.
Example: 0.5, 12k or 2.7M.
Where:
• k is thousands
• M is millions.

Cost adjustment The cost of mining and the cost of processing can vary with both position in the
factors pit and with rock-type. Four-X deals with this by using “cost adjustment
factors” (CAFs). See Positional CAFs and Rock-type CAFs.

Cost of mining In this Manual, unless the context indicates otherwise, the cost of mining is the
cost of blasting, loading and hauling a tonne of rock of a particular type as
waste.
See also Reference mining cost below.

Cost of processing In Four-X, the cost of processing is the difference between the total cost of
blasting, loading, hauling and processing a tonne of material as ore, and the cost
of blasting, loading and hauling the same material in the same position as waste.
If the cost of processing varies with the type of rock processed, and/or the
processing method, then different costs are used for each combination.
If the cost of processing varies with position in the pit, then positional
processing CAFs are used.

Cut-off A cut-off is a grade below which we choose not to process material.

Continued on next page

410
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Cut-over A cut-over is a grade above which material is processed by one method and
below which it is processed by another method.

Defined waste Defined waste consists of parcels with a rock-type for which there is no
processing method.

Deleterious element A deleterious element is an element whose presence causes an increase in costs,
or a reduction in recovery.

Dilution See Mining dilution.

Discounting A dollar that we get today is more valuable to us than a dollar that we expect to
get next year.
When estimating the value of a project, it is common to reduce expected future
cash flows by a certain percentage per year, to allow for interest and risk, etc.
This process is called discounting.
The sum of all expected discounted cash flows is called the Net Present Value
(NPV).

Drop cut Drop cuts are defined in the Mining Width Program as regions of contiguous
blocks, within a push-back, that are surrounded by blocks of later push-backs or
by the final pit limit. For more information, see page 108.

Economic scenario An economic scenario is a set of economic values and process definitions which
may change over time, that constitutes one possible economic environment for
this project.

Element An element is a substance in the mineralised material which is of interest to the

study, and for which grades are available. It need not be a product.

Element processing An element processing cost is an addition to the processing cost which is
cost proportional to the quantity of an element which is input to the process.

Continued on next page

411
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Expression An expression is a series of constants, variables and functions linked by

mathematical symbols which indicate how they are to be combined to produce a
final value.

Footwall A footwall is the rock surface exposed after a layer of ore has been removed.

TM
Four-D Four-D is a Whittle Programming computer package, similar to Four-X.
Like Four-X, Four-D allows rapid simulation of the mine life for different
mining sequences and economic scenarios and explicitly deals with the effect of
time on the value of cash flows. However, it can only handle one element.

Framework The framework is a rectangular region in space into which blocks are loaded
prior to re-blocking. One or more files can be loaded into it in any position.

Function A function performs a specified mathematical action.

G&A costs See Time costs.

Generalised A Generalised Mining Package is used to prepare the Model File for Four-X
Mining Package and, probably, to complete the details of the design after the final optimization.

GMP See Generalised Mining Package.

Haul road A haul road is a roadway leading into the open pit that gives trucks access to
the region to be mined.

Head grade The head grade is the grade of the ore input into the mill.

Continued on next page

412
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Initial capital The initial capital expenditure is the amount spent before the first day of
expenditure operation of the mine.

Initialization file The initialization file is a small text file that is used to retain a record of the
most recently used filenames and extensions, so that the programs can offer
sensible default filenames. It also contains license, and other information. This
file is named fx.ini.
For more information, see page 265.

Input framework The input framework is a rectangular region of space into which blocks are
loaded prior to re-blocking.

Internal rate of The internal rate of return is the discount rate (percentage) at which the NPV of
return (IRR) the project is zero.

Integers Integers are whole numbers.

Lag The lag is the number of benches by which the mining of one specified
push-back is to lag behind the previous one.

Language file The language file is a binary file which contains the necessary information for
translating the English text that appears on the screen, and in the print files, into
another language.
The file, if present, is called fx.lng.
For more information, see page 267.

Log file A log file is a text file of abbreviated prompts and responses that can be used to
re-run a program.
For more information, see page 275.

Marginal cut-off A marginal cut-off is a cut-off which maximizes cash flow from the mine,
having regard to mill costs and time costs.

Continued on next page

413
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Maximum cut-off The maximum cut-off is a cut-off specified by the user. The Optimization,
Analysis and Utilities Programs will not raise a cut-off or cut-over above this
limit.

Maximum parcel A parcel with a grade greater than this will not be processed.
grade

Milawa A proprietary computer module which is used in Four-X to improve mining

TM
Algorithm schedules.

Minimum cut-off The minimum cut-off is a cut-off specified by the user. The Optimization,
Analysis and Utilities Programs will not lower the cut-off or cut-over below this
limit.

Minimum parcel A parcel with a grade less than this will not be processed.
grade

Mining dilution When mining ore, it is common to inadvertently mine some waste also.

Mining Dilution

Dilution
Waste

Ore

If possible, the dilution of the ore should be dealt with in the construction of the
Model File. If this is not possible, or has not been done, Four-X can apply an
overall dilution factor that increases the tonnage of each parcel processed, but
leaves the element content of the parcel unchanged.
Example
A 5% dilution would require a mining dilution factor of 1.05. This factor
affects cut-offs and cut-overs.

Continued on next page

414
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Mining recovery Not all the ore that you intend to process actually reaches the processing mill.
If, for example, 5% is lost, then the mining recovery factor is 0.95. Both the
tonnage and the element content of each parcel processed are multiplied by this
factor.
This does not affect cut-offs and cut-overs.

Mining schedule A mining schedule is a mining sequence divided into time slots.

Mining sequence A mining sequence or a sequence is the order in which mining is to occur.

Mining Sequence A Mining Sequence File is a text file containing details of the blocks mined in
File each period of an analysis simulation.

Mining width The mining width is the minimum width required for access and for equipment
to operate on a working bench.

Model In relation to the Re-blocking Program, “model” denotes a rectangular

co-ordinate framework containing a collection of blocks. A model is defined
by a Parameters File together with a Model File, a Results File or a Pit List
File.

Model File A Model File is a text file containing details of the contents of the blocks in a
block model.

Model framework The model framework is the whole rectangular region of a block model. This
contains NX x NY x NZ blocks. The term is used in this Manual when we wish
to emphasise that we are referring to the whole region.

Modelling Modelling is the process of creating a block model from drill-hole and other
data. The term “slope modelling” is used for the process of converting slope
requirements into structure arcs.

Net Present Value See Discounting.

Continued on next page

415
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

NPV Net Present Value. See Discounting.

Operator An operator is a symbol expressing a mathematical procedure.

Operators include: +, -, *, /.

Opti-Cut An Opti-Cut Economics Text File is a text file that carries detailed information
Economics Text about the economic scenario and how the Opti-Cut optimization is to be done.
File

Opti-Cut Sequence An Opti-Cut Sequence Text File is a text file that describes the physical
Text File resource and proposed mining sequence. These files can be produced by
Four-X.

Opti-Cut™ Opti-Cut is a Whittle Programming package.

It optimizes cut-offs over time so as to maximize Net Present Value.

Ore body An ore body is a solid and fairly continuous mass of mineralised material that
can be distinguished from the surrounding waste.

Ore selection by Ore is selected by comparing the cash flow which would be produced by
cash flow processing it and the cash flow which would be produced by mining it as waste.
If the cash flow from processing it is higher, the material is treated as ore. If
not it is treated as waste.
If more than one processing method is applicable, the one which produces the
highest cash flow is used.

Ore selection by Ore is selected by comparing the grades of the material with pre-calculated
cut-off processing cut-offs. If it does not satisfy the cut-offs, it is treated as waste.
If more than one processing method is applicable, the grades are compared with
the cut-offs of each in turn, in the order in which they are specified in the
Parameters File.

Continued on next page

416
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Overheads See Time costs.

Parameters File A Parameters File is a small text file containing general information about the
project and how it is to be handled.

Parcel A parcel is part of a block for which the rock-type, tonnage and element content
(if any) are known. A block may contain zero or more parcels. The total
tonnage of the parcels may be the same as the tonnage of the block, or it may be
less. If it is less, the difference is called undefined blocks, that is, it is waste of
unknown rock-type. If a block has no parcels, the total tonnage of the block is
undefined blocks.
Neither the position of a parcel within a block, nor its shape, are defined.

Parse In a spreadsheet program, to arrange text into columns of cells.

PC IBM Personal Computer or compatible clone.

Period In Four-X, a period is a time interval to which particular economics and

throughput limits apply, and for which tonnages and grades, etc. are reported.
The period length is arbitrary, but the discount rate, throughput limits and any
time costs supplied must be for that length of time.

Pit List File A Pit List File is a text file containing the block co-ordinates of each block in
the pits produced in an optimization run.

Polygon File A Polygon File is a text file containing the co-ordinates of a polygon, that can
be used to limit the blocks output by the Re-blocking Program.

Continued on next page

417
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Positional CAFs Four-X allows for the variation of mining and processing costs with position in
the pit by the use of positional mining and processing “cost adjustment factors”
(CAFs) which are part of the description of a block. These factors should be
1.0 for a group in the Reference Position, but can have any value in other
positions.
The mining cost per tonne, which applies to a particular rock-type at the
Reference Position, is multiplied by the positional mining CAF of each block to
obtain the mining cost for that block
Processing costs in a block are obtained in a similar manner by using the
positional processing CAF.

Position of the The position of the model within the framework is defined by the offset of the
model model origin from the framework origin. When the two origins coincide, the
offset is zero.

Primary model The first model to be read into the Re-blocking Program is called the “primary”
model.

Primary model The primary model framework is based on the primary model and is the
framework framework into which other models will be read if the framework has not been
defined.

Print files Print files are files in which the different programs store the results of their
runs. These files can be viewed or printed out by the user.
Four-X has a different print file extension for each of the main programs.
For a list of print files and default file extensions, see page 24.

Processing cost See Cost of processing.

Processing method A processing method group is defined by a list of from two to fifteen processing
group method codes, or previous group codes. Processing method groups are used by
the Analysis Program to allow you to limit the throughput of a group of
processing methods (and/or previous groups).
This can be useful if, for example, you have two different processing streams
but only one crusher. You define a group consisting of the two processing
codes, and the Analysis Program asks you for a throughput limit for the group.

Continued on next page

418
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Processing The processing recovery fraction is the fraction of product that is extracted by a
recovery fraction particular processing method.
See also Processing recovery threshold.

Processing The processing recovery threshold is a grade that is subtracted from the ore
recovery threshold grade before the processing recovery percentage is applied.

Product A product is an element which may be extracted for sale. Examples: gold,
copper, diamonds, etc.

Pure text mode When a word processor is operated in pure text mode, this causes it to store the
file in pure ASCII without any formatting controls.

Push-back A push-back is an intermediate pit outline that is mined to, before mining to
another push-back or to the final pit outline.

Real values Real values are numbers that include a decimal point.

Reference Block The Reference Block is a particular block in the model, chosen by the user, for
which all mining and processing costs are calculated. If the costs are different
in other parts of the model, this is handled by positional CAFs for mining
and/or processing.

Reference Mining The Reference Mining Cost is the cost of mining waste of undefined rock-type
Cost at the Reference Block.
The cost of mining waste of a defined rock-type at the Reference Block is
obtained by multiplying the Reference Mining Cost by the appropriate
rock-type mining CAF.
The cost of mining waste of any type at a particular block is obtained by
multiplying the cost of mining the same rock as waste at the Reference Block
by the positional mining CAF for the block in question.

Regular block A regular block model is a block model where the blocks are all of the same
model size.

Continued on next page

419
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Rehabilitation cost The rehabilitation cost is the cost, per tonne, of rehabilitating material of a
particular type of rock after it has been dumped as waste.

Rejected material Rejected material is material for which there is a processing path (i.e. a
method/rock-type combination) but which is not processed because its grades
are not good enough.

Replacement From time to time in the operation of a mine, it is necessary to refurbish major
capital expenditure pieces of equipment, and this often involves expenditure that is well in excess
of normal maintenance costs. We refer to this as replacement capital
expenditure.
For optimization purposes, it must be handled implicitly by averaging it out
over the expected mine life and factoring it into the mining, processing or
selling cost.
During analysis, it is possible to handle replacement capital expenditure
explicitly, as is explained on page 305.

Restart run Restart runs are used where an Optimization Program run has been terminated
because of power failure or hardware malfunction. When the Optimization
Program is used, it automatically creates a Work File which contains all of the
intermediate information generated during a pit optimization and this
information is used in a restart run.

Results File A Results File is a text file containing details of each block that is contained in
the pits produced in an optimization run.

Revenue Factor This is the factor by which the revenue for each block is scaled in order to
produce one of the nested pits. Different Revenue Factors produce different
pits, unless the change is so small that not even a single block is added or
removed.

Rock Rock refers to all material, not just to waste.

Continued on next page

420
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Rock-type Different rock-types are identified in Four-X by the four-letter codes which
appear in each Parcel. The same codes appear in the Parameters File.

Rock-type mining The cost of mining can vary with rock-type, and this is handled in Four-X by
CAFs the use of rock-type mining “cost adjustment factors” (CAFs) in the Parameters
File.
Any variation of processing cost with rock-type is dealt with through the
processing costs.

Safety berm A safety berm is a horizontal strip along the wall of an open pit inserted to stop
falling material.

Scenario In relation to the Analysis Program, a scenario is the economic scenario

together with the mining schedule.

Secondary models Any subsequent models that are read into the Re-blocking Program are referred
to as “secondary” models.

Selective mining Selective mining size is the minimum tonnage of ore that can be extracted from
size a mine without extracting adjacent waste. This is usually determined by the
type of equipment used for mining the ore.

Slope profile A slope profile consists of a set of bearing and slope pairs together with a
number of benches to consider when generating structure arcs. A slope profile
is applicable to one or more slope regions. Slope profiles can be input to the
Structure Arcs Program either from the sub-regions part of a Parameters File or
from a Slope Profile File.

Slope region A slope region is a group of blocks to which a particular slope profile applies.
Slope regions which are rectangular can be defined by sub-regions in a
Parameters File. Irregular slope regions can be defined by the zone numbers in
a Model File or by a Profile Number File.

Continued on next page

421
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Spreadsheet A Spreadsheet Definition File is a small text file that lists the items which are to
Definition File be output to a Spreadsheet Output File during a run of the Analysis Program.

Spreadsheet A Spreadsheet Output File is a small text file containing columns of selected
Output File values created from a run of the Analysis Program.
The items that are to be included are listed in a Spreadsheet Definition File.

Stripping ratio The stripping ratio is the ratio of the tonnes mined but not processed to the
tonnes processed.

Structure arc Structure arc is the term used in Four-X for an arc in graphics theory.

Structure Arcs File A Structure Arcs File is a binary file containing the structure arcs required for
an optimization.

Sub-region A sub-region is a rectangular volume of blocks that forms part (or all) of a
Model framework.

Text file A text file is a file containing alphanumeric characters that can be displayed on
the screen, printed, and edited as text.

TM
Three-D Three-D is a Whittle Programming computer package.
Three-D finds the three-dimensional open pit outline which maximizes the total
undiscounted cash flow. It can be used for mines with a life of up to three
years. Beyond three years, the discounting of future cash flows starts to affect
the ultimate pit outline which has the highest NPV.

Continued on next page

422
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Throughput factor The throughput factor is the relative speed of processing for a particular
rock-type.
Example: A rock-type which is easy to crush might have a throughput factor of
1.2, and this would be allowed for when applying milling throughput limits.

Throughput limits During analysis, Four-X accepts throughput limits on:

• Total mining
• Total processing by processing method(s)
• Total processing for groups of methods
• Total production by product
When simulating the mine operation, a period is terminated when any of these
limits is reached.

Time costs Time costs are costs that continue during mining regardless of the amount
mined, processed or sold. These are often called overheads or G&A (General
& Administration) costs.
For optimization purposes, they must be handled implicitly by factoring them
into the mining, processing or selling cost.
During analysis, it is possible to handle time costs explicitly, as is explained on
page 305.

Undefined waste Undefined waste is any part of the total tonnage of a block which is not
included in a parcel in that block.

Continued on next page

423
Glossary
5 July, 1999
Glossary, Continued

Units In Four-X, the units used for quantities of rock, elements and currency are
arbitrary, and it is possible to have different units for each element.
The units for rock and elements are set by the units used in the Model File, and
grades are expressed throughout as the ratio of quantities measured in these
units. For example, if the Model File contains rock quantities measured in
metric tonnes, gold quantities measured in grams and copper in pounds, then
the grades and cut-offs will be expressed in grams per tonne and pounds per
tonne respectively. (This Manual and Four-X refer to tonnes, but no particular
scaling is implied by this).
Four-X makes no assumptions about the units of distance, except that they must
be the same for the block dimensions and the origin co-ordinates in the
Parameters File.
The symbol for the unit of currency, which appears in the printed output from
the Analysis Program, can be controlled by the user.

UNIX UNIX is a multi-user, multi-tasking computer system.

Variable A variable is a symbol, such as x, y or z, representing an unspecified member of

a group of objects, numbers, or the like.

Virtual memory Virtual memory is a system that uses the computer’s hard disk as temporary
storage in place of high-speed memory, to enable data that will not fit into
memory to be processed. Four-X uses this system only if the number of blocks
or analyses being processed cannot be fitted into physical memory.

Waste Waste is material that contains no product, or so little that it is not worth
processing.

Work File The Work File is a binary file containing working information for the
Optimization Program.

Workstation A workstation is a UNIX-style computer.

424
Glossary
5 July, 1999
 Index

Page numbers in bold type contain extensive and/or highly relevant topic information.

Special characters and keys

' * ! " symbols to start a blank or comment line .......................................................192, 229, 231, 233, 236, 238, 253, 276
# for a block removed..............................................................................................................................................109, 117
$ currency symbol .............................................................................. See Currency characters, position in Parameters File
& for extending input lines......................................................................................................................................139, 282
( ) parentheses, use of .............................................................................................................................286
↵ Enter symbol ..................................................................................................................................................................11
− subtraction .........................................................................................................................................................286
* for a cut-off higher than the maximum .........................................................................................................................211
* for a cut-off lower than the minimum...........................................................................................................................210
* for an added waste block ..............................................................................................................................................117
* multiplication...................................................................................................................................................286
** for raising a value to a power...........................................................................................................286
*** error message ............................................................................................................................................................405
. for air blocks..................................................................................................................................................................100
/ division .................................................................................................................................................................286
[ ] use of square brackets .................................................................................................................................................11
^ caret symbol..................................................................................................................................................................133
+ addition .................................................................................................................................................................286
+ for an added block........................................................................................................................................................117
< > use of angle brackets .................................................................................................................................................12
! logging commands ........................................................................................................................................................277
!ASK ..........................................................................................................................................................................279
!DEMO.......................................................................................................................................................................278
!END ..........................................................................................................................................................................277
!LOG ..........................................................................................................................................................................277
!USE...........................................................................................................................................................................278

A
.add .................................................................................................................................................See Additional Arcs File
Abbreviations used ............................................................................................................................................................14
Active blocks indicator
editing, using the Edit Parameters Program ...........................................................................................................37, 40
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................181
reference.........................................................................................54, 59, 194, 196, 198, 201, 215, 216, 217, 316, 317
when creating a Structure Arcs File .............................................................................................................................23
when running the Optimization Program .....................................................................................................................93
when using the Mining Width Program .............................................................................................................105, 113
Additional Arcs File
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................409
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................232
reference.......................................................................................19, 84, 85, 87, 88, 112, 201, 232, 313, 314, 315, 336
Administration costs........................................................................................................................................................300

425
Index
5 July, 1999
Air block
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................409
position in Model File ................................................................................................................................................219
reference...................................................................................49, 51, 96, 100, 105, 113, 184, 197, 198, 199, 216, 225
Air flag A
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................184
reference.....................................................................................................................................113, 184, 197, 198, 225
Air flag B
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................184
reference.....................................................................................................................................................198, 199, 225
when using the Mining Width Program .............................................................................................................105, 113
Analysis Program
and default answers ....................................................................................................................................................133
entering
large values ...........................................................................................................................................................134
value ranges ..........................................................................................................................................................136
error correction...........................................................................................................................................................133
mining schedules........................................................................................................................... See Mining schedules
output .........................................................................................................................................................................145
reference.....................................................................................29, 30, 31, 32, 119, 305, 309, 366, 381, 391, 396, 409
setting period length...................................................................................................................................................140
using after the Mining Width Program.......................................................................................................................113
Analysis request, definition .............................................................................................................................................409
Analysis, definition..........................................................................................................................................................409
Arcs ...................................................................................................................................................See also Structure arcs
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................409
generation of ................................................................................................... 334. See also Benches for arc generation
Argument, definition .......................................................................................................................................................409
Arithmetic symbols..........................................................................................................................................................286
autofx??.log ........................................................................................................................................... See Autolog facility
Autolog facility................................................................................................................................................................280
Auxiliary files ..................................................................................................................................................................265
Average mining CAF
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................256
Average processing CAF
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................260

B
Bank loans
for initial costs............................................................................................................................................................301
for recoverable costs...................................................................................................................................................301
Bench
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................246, 256
Bench, definition .............................................................................................................................................................409
Benches for arc generation
formula .......................................................................................................................................................................203
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................182
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................203
Benches mined, spreadsheet codes ..................................................................................................................................251
Best case mining schedule .................................................................................................. See Mining schedules: best case
Bias..........................................................................................................................................................................310, 311
Binary file, definition ......................................................................................................................................................409
Blank lines.............................................................................................................................................. See Comment lines

426
Index
5 July, 1999
Block
adding "pseudo" blocks..............................................................................................................................................318
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................409
dimensions of .....................................................................................................................................................180, 193
Block model
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................409
reference.............................................................................................................................................269, 270, 309, 310
Block size
discussion...................................................................................................................................................................307
for calculating values .................................................................................................................................................307
for designing a pit.......................................................................................................................................................307
for outlining the ore body...........................................................................................................................................307
for sensitivity work.....................................................................................................................................................309
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................180
reference.......................................................................................................................................................30, 285, 343
strategy .......................................................................................................................................................................309
Bold type, use of................................................................................................................................................................12

C
Can’t read error message .................................................................................................................................................407
CAF .............................................................................................................................................See Cost adjustment factor
Cash flow.........................................................................................................................................................................211
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................410
in Spreadsheet Definition File....................................................................................................................................250
minimum parcel grade................................................................................................... 210. See Parcel:grade:minimum
ore selection by .................................................................................................................... See Ore selection:cash flow
reference.....................................................................................................................283, 301, 340, 342, 367, 374, 375
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................247, 251
underground spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................248
Changing the size and/or position of the model ................................................................................................................49
Combining and/or splitting blocks ....................................................................................................................................51
Comma delimited format .................................................................................................................................................175
Command Line names .......................................................................................................................................................13
Comment lines.............................................................................................................................................................40, 43
Constants
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................410
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................284
Co-ordinates of the origin........................................................................................................ See Model framework:origin
Corner......................................................................................................................................................... See Sharp corner

427
Index
5 July, 1999
Cost adjustment factor .....................................................................................................................................................295
average positional mining
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................246
average positional processing
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................246
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................410
mining
rock-type
definition .........................................................................................................................................................421
spreadsheet codes ............................................................................................................................................256
positional mining
definition...............................................................................................................................................................418
position in file .......................................................................................................................................................225
position in Model File...........................................................................................................................................219
position in Results File .........................................................................................................................................224
reference................................................................................................................195, 218, 295, 297, 327, 418, 419
positional mining CAF flag
reference................................................................................................................................................................199
positional mining flag
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................181
positional processing
definition...............................................................................................................................................................418
effect on cut-offs ...................................................................................................................................................208
reference........................................................................................................................208, 218, 297, 366, 418, 419
positional processing CAF flag
reference................................................................................................................................................................199
positional processing flag
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................181
rock-type
mining
position in Parameters File ..............................................................................................................................188
reference ..........................................................................................................................................195, 295, 419
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................245
Cost of mining
description..................................................................................................................................................................410
for a rock-type
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................245
reference.....................................................................................................................................206, 301, 348, 410, 421
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................251, 256
time cost factored in
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................245
waste...........................................................................................................................................................................297
Cost of processing
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................410
due to an element
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................245
due to elements
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................251
element
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................260
reference.............................................................................................................................................297, 322, 348, 410
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................244, 251, 260
time cost factored in
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................244

428
Index
5 July, 1999
Costs........................................................................................................................................................................293, 296
examples.....................................................................................................................................................................299
rehabilitation
definition...............................................................................................................................................................420
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................188
reference................................................................................................................204, 205, 206, 214, 293, 296, 297
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................245, 251, 257
selling
different selling costs ............................................................................................................................................323
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................187
reference................................................................................................................204, 205, 293, 295, 296, 297, 305
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................244, 251, 261
time cost factored in
spreadsheet codes ............................................................................................................................................244
time-related ........................................................................................................................................................294, 298
calculation.............................................................................................................................................................303
definition...............................................................................................................................................................423
handled during analysis.........................................................................................................................................305
reference........................................................................................................................................295, 300, 301, 303
Currency characters, position in Parameters File.............................................................................................................183
Cut-off ..................................................................................................... See also Minimum and Maximum Cut-off grades
calculation ..................................................................................................................................................................348
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................410
display of....................................................................................................................................................................366
effect of processing CAFs ..........................................................................................................................................208
for underground methods
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................251
maximum....................................................................................................................................................168, 370, 371
definition...............................................................................................................................................................414
minimum ............................................................................................................................................................370, 371
definition...............................................................................................................................................................414
Multiple Elements ......................................................................................................................................................361
ore selection by ........................................................................................................................See Ore selection:Cut-off
reference.....................................................................................................................................................139, 305, 394
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................251, 259, 260
Cut-off control flag..........................................................................................................................................................209
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................189
Cut-over...........................................................................................................................................................................359
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................411
description..................................................................................................................................................................360
display of....................................................................................................................................................................366
reference.............................................................................................................................................................211, 373

D
Data checks......................................................................................................................................................................405
Decimal places
currency totals, position in Parameters File................................................................................................................183
grades and cut-offs for element, position in Parameters File......................................................................................186
Revenue Factor values, position in Parameters File...................................................................................................183
small amounts of currency, position in Parameters File .............................................................................................183
tonnes, position in Parameters File ............................................................................................................................183
total units of element, position in Parameters File .....................................................................................................186
totals of tonnes, position in Parameters File...............................................................................................................183
units of element, position in Parameters File .............................................................................................................186

429
Index
5 July, 1999
Default block tonnage
general........................................................................................................................See General default block tonnage
sub-region
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................182
reference................................................................................................................................................215, 216, 345
Defined waste .............................................................................................................................. See also Undefined blocks
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................411
reference.....................................................................................................................................................195, 205, 419
Deleterious elements
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................411
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................369
Dilution ................................................................................................................................................. See Mining dilution
Dimensions of a block .................................................................................................................................. See Block sizes
Discount percentage
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................244
Discounting
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................411
reference.............................................................................................................................122, 140, 143, 206, 250, 417
Distance function.............................................................................................................................................................289
example ......................................................................................................................................................................289
Drop cut................................................................................................................................................... See Small drop cut

E
.etx.......................................................................................................................... See Opti-Cut:files:Economics Text File
Edit Parameters Program ...................................................................................................................................................33
Dimensions Edit Menu.................................................................................................................................................40
Element Edit Menu ......................................................................................................................................................42
Expression Edit Menu ..................................................................................................................................................42
Global Values Edit Menu.......................................................................................................................................40, 41
Header Comment Edit Menu..................................................................................................................................39, 40
Main Edit Menu ...........................................................................................................................................................39
Main Menu...................................................................................................................................................................38
Menu system ................................................................................................................................................................34
Processing Method Groups Menu ................................................................................................................................43
Processing-Method/Rock-type Combination Select Menu...........................................................................................43
Rock-type Edit Menu ...................................................................................................................................................42
Sub-region Select Menu...............................................................................................................................................41
Trailer Comment Edit Menu ........................................................................................................................................43

430
Index
5 July, 1999
Element
code
description.............................................................................................................................................................204
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................186
data for open pit mining
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................189
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................411
extraction....................................................................................................................................................................321
information in Parameters File ...................................................................................................................................204
multiple ......................................................................................................................................................................322
prices
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................187
processing cost, definition..........................................................................................................................................411
quantity
in the ground
spreadsheet codes ............................................................................................................................................258
input to processing
spreadsheet codes ............................................................................................................................................258
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................256
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................248
End pit or bench for a period
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................251
Error messages.................................................................................................................................................................404
Expansion ..................................................................................................................................................See Pit:expansion
Exponential (X) function.................................................................................................................................................287
Expression
code
description.............................................................................................................................................................204
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................187
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................412
description..................................................................................................................................................................204
differences between Opti-Cut and Four-X .................................................................................................................393
editing ..........................................................................................................................................................................42
form of........................................................................................................................................................................284
grade dependent .........................................................................................................................................................284
information in Parameters File..............................................................................................................................204
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................187
reference................................................................................................176, 205, 206, 208, 209, 302, 322, 328, 393
splitting .................................................................................................................................................................291
grade-dependent .........................................................................................................................................................283
positional CAF ...................................................................................................................................................282, 285
reference.....................................................................................................................................................282, 394, 395
Extensions ..............................................................................................................................See Filenames and extensions

431
Index
5 July, 1999
 F
Filenames and extensions ..................................................................................................................................................27
Finish pit or bench for a grand total
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................251
Fixed column layout ........................................................................................................................................................175
Footwall
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................412
Four-D
description..................................................................................................................................................................412
differences from Four-X.............................................................................................................................................394
Framework
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................412
Free format ..............................................................................................................................See Comma delimited format
Function...........................................................................................................................................................................286
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................412
distance ......................................................................................................................................... See Distance function
exponential (X) ................................................................................................................. See Exponential (X) function
integral part of (X) ........................................................................................................ See Integral part of (X) function
Log (X)........................................................................................................................................... See Log (X) function
Log 10 (X)................................................................................................................................. See Log 10 (X) function
maximum (X1,X2,X3…) ....................................................................................See Maximum (X1,X2,X3…) function
minimum (X1,X2,X3…) ..................................................................................... See Minimum (X1,X2,X3…) function
ranges ...............................................................................................................................................See Ranges function
select ..................................................................................................................................................See Select function
square root.................................................................................................................................See Square root function
fx.lng .........................................................................................................................................................See Language file
fx??.ok file.......................................................................................................................................................................281
Fx??.ok file......................................................................................................................................................................267
FXAN ................................................................................................................................................. See Analysis Program
FXED ......................................................................................................................................See Edit Parameters Program
FXMI......................................................................................................................................... See Mining Width Program
FXOP .......................................................................................................................................... See Optimization Program
FXPI ...................................................................................................................................... See Pit Visualisation Program
FXRE............................................................................................................................................ See Re-blocking Program
FXST .........................................................................................................................................See Structure Arcs Program
FXUT .................................................................................................................................................. See Utilities Program

432
Index
5 July, 1999
 G
G&A costs ......................................................................................................................................See Administration costs
General and Administration costs...................................................................................................See Administration costs
General default block tonnage .........................................................................................................................................196
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................184
reference.............................................................................................................................................................215, 216
Generalised Mining Package, definition..........................................................................................................................412
Grade
in place
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................251
in the ground
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................258
in the ground before processing
spreadsheet codes ............................................................................................................................................251
input to processing
spreadsheet codes..........................................................................................................................................251, 258
rejected
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................251
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................256
Grade control costs ..........................................................................................................................................................301
Grade dependent expressions ............................................................................................See Expression: grade dependent
Group “n”/element combination
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................249

H
Haul road
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................412
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................271
Head grade, definition .....................................................................................................................................................412
Hole ............................................................................................................................................................... See Small hole

I
Immovable objects.....................................................................................................................................................94, 318
Initial capital expenditure
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................413
reference.............................................................................................................................................127, 128, 139, 299
spreadsheet code.........................................................................................................................................................244
Initialization file ..............................................................................................................................................................265
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................413
reference.......................................................................................................................................27, 125, 142, 172, 391
Input framework .................................................................................................................................See Model framework
Integral part of (X) function ............................................................................................................................................287
Internal rate of return
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................413
reference.......................................................................................................................................................................14
spreadsheet code.........................................................................................................................................................262
Internal Rate of Return
reference.............................................................................................................................................................140, 143
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................247
Italics, use of......................................................................................................................................................................12
Iteration ...........................................................................................................................................................................269

L
.loa.................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files
.loe.................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files
.lom................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files
.loo.................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files
.lop.................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files
.lor .................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files

433
Index
5 July, 1999
.los .................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files
.lou.................................................................................................................................................................... See Log files
Lag
description..........................................................................................................................................................144, 413
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................124
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................244, 256
Language file ...................................................................................................................................................................267
Language File
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................413
Lerchs-Grossmann algorithm ..........................................................................................................................................382
Lerchs-Grossmann method
reference...............................................................................................................................................................93, 293
License entitlement..........................................................................................................................................................265
Lines per page .................................................................................................................................................................265
Log (X) function..............................................................................................................................................................287
Log file
example ......................................................................................................................................................................275
extensions...................................................................................................................................................................276
reference.......................................................................................................................................................26, 275, 282
Log File
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................413
Log10 (X) function..........................................................................................................................................................287

M
.mod...............................................................................................................................................................See Model File
.msq ............................................................................................................................................. See Mining Sequence File
Marginal cut-off
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................413
reference.............................................................................................................................................................354, 367
Maximum (X1,X2,X3....) function..................................................................................................................................287
example ......................................................................................................................................................................290
Maximum cut-off grade............................................................................................................................. See Cut-off grade
Maximum, spreadsheet codes ..........................................................................................................................................245
Merging element data using the Re-blocking Program......................................................................................................49
Merging Elements from Different Four-D Model Files.............................................................................................46, 399
Method/type
information in the Parameters File
underground mining..............................................................................................................................................211
Milawa Algorithm ........................................................................ See Mining schedules:user specified: Milawa Algorithm
Minima .................... See Cut-off: maximum & Parcel: grade:maximum. See Cut-off: minimum & Parcel: grade:minimum
Minimum (X1,X2,X3....) function ..................................................................................................................................287
Minimum cut-off grade.............................................................................................................................. See Cut-off grade
Minimum, spreadsheet codes...........................................................................................................................................245

434
Index
5 July, 1999
Mining cost adjustment factor ......See Cost adjustment factor:positional mining, Cost adjustment factor:rock-type mining
Mining dilution
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................414
editing ..........................................................................................................................................................................40
factor ..................................................................................................................................................................195, 338
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................184
reference.............................................................................................................................................................195, 327
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................244, 258
Mining limit
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................256
Mining recovery
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................415
factor ..........................................................................................................................................................................196
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................184
reference.............................................................................................................................................................196, 327
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................244, 258
Mining schedules.............................................................................................................................................................123
best case .............................................................................................................................................................123, 131
spreadsheet codes..........................................................................................................................246, 247, 250, 397
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................415
user specified
constant lag ...........................................................................................................................................................124
specifying push-backs......................................................................................................................................144
Milawa Algorithm.................................................................................................................................124, 125, 381
reference................................................................................................................................................................124
spreadsheet codes..........................................................................................................................246, 247, 250, 397
worst case ...........................................................................................................................................................123, 130
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................246, 247, 250, 253, 397
Mining Sequence File
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................415
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................221
reference.........................................................................................................................................................19, 96, 221
Mining sequence, definition ............................................................................................................................................415
Mining tolerance
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................107
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................116
Mining width ...................................................................................................................................................................313
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................415
reference.............................................................................................................................................................106, 117
Mining Width Program....................................................................................................................................................104
Air blocks in the input Results File ............................................................................................................................113
output .........................................................................................................................................................................117
Model File
Block Header Line .....................................................................................................................................................219
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................415
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................218
Parcel Line .................................................................................................................................................................219
reference...............................................................19, 29, 45, 93, 96, 194, 207, 214, 221, 295, 297, 309, 337, 366, 415

435
Index
5 July, 1999
Model framework ..............................................................................................................................................49, 316, 343
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................415
description............................................................................................................................................................45, 415
dimensions
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................180
dimensions of .....................................................................................................................................................180, 193
origin
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................180
origin co-ordinates .....................................................................................................................................180, 193, 424
reference.............................................................................................17, 54, 59, 93, 194, 237, 307, 309, 311, 319, 320
Model, definition.............................................................................................................................................................415
Modelling, definition.......................................................................................................................................................415

N
Naming files ......................................................................................................................................................................28
Nested pits ...............................................................................................................................................................327, 377
Net cash flow
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................262
Net present value .................................................................................................................................................... See NPV
NPV.........................................................................................................................123, 124, 130, 141, 273, 381, 411, 413
Number of blocks that can be held in memory ................................................................................................................402

O
Out of disk space error message ......................................................................................................................................407
Obstructions ..................................................................................................................................... See Immovable objects
Offset
definition ..............................................................................................................................................................45, 418
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................320
Operator
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................416
Opti-Cut...........................................................................................................................................................239, 266, 392
description..................................................................................................................................................................416
files.....................................................................................................................................................................119, 132
creation of .............................................................................................................................................................391
Economics Text File ...............................................................................................................................20, 239, 416
Sequence Text File..........................................................................................................................................20, 239
Sequence Text File................................................................................................................................................416
Optimal outline................................................................................................................................................................270
Optimization Program
reference.........................................23, 29, 30, 32, 52, 90, 105, 106, 194, 195, 293, 309, 316, 328, 335, 366, 379, 420
Ore body, definition ........................................................................................................................................................416
Ore selection
cash flow ............................................................................................................................................................346, 367
definition...............................................................................................................................................................416
description.............................................................................................................................................................196
reference................................................................................................................................................................340
cut-off.................................................................................................................................................................346, 348
definition...............................................................................................................................................................416
description.............................................................................................................................................................196
Ore selection method flag................................................................................................................................................196
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................184
Origin co-ordinates..............................................................................................See Model framework:origin co-ordinates

436
Index
5 July, 1999
 P
.par..........................................................................................................................................................See Parameters File
.pil ................................................................................................................................................................See Pit List File
.pnu..................................................................................................................................................See Profile Number File
.pol.............................................................................................................................................................. See Polygon File
.pra...................................................................................................................................................................See Print files
.prm .................................................................................................................................................................See Print files
.pro ..................................................................................................................................................................See Print files
.prp ..................................................................................................................................................................See Print files
.prr ...................................................................................................................................................................See Print files
.prs...................................................................................................................................................................See Print files
.pru ..................................................................................................................................................................See Print files
Parameters File
example ......................................................................................................................................................................212
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................179
line types ....................................................................................................................................................................180
reference.......................................................17, 20, 36, 45, 93, 105, 178, 225, 237, 295, 331, 333, 334, 338, 344, 415
Parcel
combining.....................................................................................................................................................51, 310, 312
grade
maximum ..............................................................................................................................................211, 370, 375
definition .........................................................................................................................................................414
minimum...............................................................................................................................................210, 370, 375
definition .........................................................................................................................................................414
limit ............................................................................................................................................................307, 308, 309
reference.....................................................................................................................................195, 200, 206, 207, 211
splitting ........................................................................................................................................................................51
Parse, definition...............................................................................................................................................................417
PC, definition ..................................................................................................................................................................417
Percentage of the bench mined, spreadsheet codes..........................................................................................................251
Period
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................417
length.....................................................................................................See Analysis Program: setting the period length
number .................................................................................................................................................................96, 100
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................247
reference.............................................................................................................................138, 139, 140, 222, 241, 393
Pit
expansion
definition...............................................................................................................................................................116
reference........................................................................................................................................................113, 117
hitting the side of the model framework.....................................................................................................................316
life of
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................247
number .................................................................................................................................................................96, 100
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................248
sizes............................................................................................................................................................................136
Pit List File
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................417
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................235
reference.................................................................................................................................21, 45, 104, 117, 235, 415
Pit Visualisation Program..................................................................................................................................................96
diagrams .....................................................................................................................................................................100
reference...........................................................................................................................................30, 31, 94, 218, 316

437
Index
5 July, 1999
Polygon File
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................417
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................237
reference.................................................................................................................................................21, 57, 193, 237
Positional CAF expressions................................................................................................ See Expression: positional CAF
Positional mining factors............................................................................................................ See Cost adjustment factor
Positional processing factors ...................................................................................................... See Cost adjustment factor
price
reference.....................................................................................................................................................187, 204, 379
Price
reference.....................................................................................................................................................137, 200, 205
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................244, 259
Print files
Analysis Program .......................................................................................................................................................146
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................418
Mining Width Program ..............................................................................................................................................117
reference...............................................................................................................................................................24, 405
Utilities Program ................................................................................................................................161, 167, 170, 173
viewing and printing ....................................................................................................................................................25
Print unprocessed mineralisation flag
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................181
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................200
Problem traps...................................................................................................................................................................406
Processing cost .................................................................................................................................. See Cost of processing
Processing cost adjustment factor............................................................. See Cost adjustment factor:positional processing
Processing data
for open pit mining, position in Parameters File ........................................................................................................188
Processing limits
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................259
Processing method
code....................................................................................................................................188, 190, 207, 222, 249, 418
code............................................................................................................................................................................211
multiple ......................................................................................................................................................................360
position in Mining Sequence File ..............................................................................................................................221
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................249
Processing method group
code............................................................................................................................................................................192
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................418
editing ..........................................................................................................................................................................43
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................192
reference.............................................................................................................................................................206, 211
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................249
Processing method/rock-type/element combination
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................249
Processing mill
costs............................................................................................................................................................................299
Processing recovery
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................419
fraction
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................189
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................191
fraction .......................................................................................................................196, 209, 210, 327, 349, 352, 360
Product
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................419
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................261
Production limit
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................261
Profile Number File
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................230
reference...............................................................................................................................................................21, 230
Program names ..................................................................................................................................................................13
Programs
description....................................................................................................................................................................17
Pure text mode, definition ...............................................................................................................................................419
Push-back
438
Index
5 July, 1999
 definition ....................................................................................................................................................................419
reference.............................................................................................................104, 106, 108, 110, 111, 112, 113, 116
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................244, 256

R
.res ................................................................................................................................................................See Results File
Ranges function...............................................................................................................................................................289
example ......................................................................................................................................................................289
Reagent costs...................................................................................................................................................................302
Re-blocking .....................................................................................45, 193, 308, 310, 412. See also Re-blocking Program
Re-blocking Program.........................................................................................................................................................45
reference.........................................................................................30, 32, 104, 193, 238, 282, 308, 309, 312, 316, 320
Recovery.........................................................................................................................See Mining or Processing recovery
percentage
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................245
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................259
threshold
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................245
Redirected input files.......................................................................................................................................................281
Reference Block
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................419
Reference mining cost .....................................................................................................................................................195
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................184
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................244
time cost factored in
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................244
Reference Mining Cost
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................419
Regular block model, definition ......................................................................................................................................419
Rejected
element quantity
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................257
material.......................................................................................................................... See Unprocessed mineralisation
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................257
tonnage
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................257
Replacement capital expenditure
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................420
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................246
Restart
dump ..............................................................................................................................................................93, 94, 195
interval .......................................................................................................................................................................195
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................181
run ................................................................................................................................................................................94
run ................................................................................................................................................................................90

439
Index
5 July, 1999
Results File
Block Header Line .....................................................................................................................................................224
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................420
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................224
reference...............................................................................................................22, 29, 45, 90, 96, 113, 119, 223, 415
subsequent lines .........................................................................................................................................................225
Revenue
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................251, 261
Revenue Factor
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................420
editing ..........................................................................................................................................................................41
infinite ..............................................................................................................................................22, 93, 94, 223, 224
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................185
position in Results File...............................................................................................................................................225
reference.........................................................................................................................93, 94, 210, 211, 309, 327, 379
values .........................................................................................................................................................................200
Rock, definition ...............................................................................................................................................................420
Rock-type ........................................................................................................................................................................421
code
position in Parameters File............................................................................................................................188, 189
reference................................................................................................................................................................218
information in Parameters File ...................................................................................................................................205
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................191
spreadsheet
codes .....................................................................................................................................................................249
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................250
Rock-type/element combination
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................250

S
.slp ...................................................................................................................................................... See Slope Profile File
.ssd...................................................................................See Spreadsheet Definition File. See Spreadsheet Definition File
.sso............................................................................................ See Spreadsheet Output File . See Spreadsheet Output File
.stu .................................................................................................................................................... See Structure Arcs File
.stx .............................................................................................................................See Opti-Cut:files:Sequence Text File
Safety berm
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................421
reference.....................................................................................................................................................................271
Scenario, definition .........................................................................................................................................................421
Select function.................................................................................................................................................................288
example ..............................................................................................................................................................288, 291
Selective mining size, definition......................................................................................................................................421
Sensitivity work
example ......................................................................................................................................................................273
reference.....................................................................................................................................................270, 273, 319
Sharp corner ............................................................................................................................................................112, 116
Slope
bearing and angle
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................183
editing ..........................................................................................................................................................................42
errors ............................................................................................................................................................................88
reference.................................................................................23, 29, 30, 42, 51, 83, 269, 271, 301, 313, 324, 331, 345
usage ..........................................................................................................................................................................202
Slope Profile File
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................228
reference...............................................................................................................................................................22, 228
Small drop cut
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................411
reference.............................................................................................................................................................108, 116
Small hole........................................................................................................................................................................111
Small stump .....................................................................................................................................................................111
Small wall........................................................................................................................................................................110
Spider diagram ................................................................................................................................................................273
Spreadsheet Definition File
440
Index
5 July, 1999
attributes.....................................................................................................................................................244, 245, 250
attributes for derived values
/BM.......................................................................................................................................................................251
/CE* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/CI* .......................................................................................................................................................................251
/CM*.....................................................................................................................................................................251
/CP* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/CR*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/CS* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/CT* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/DE*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/DI*.......................................................................................................................................................................251
/DM*.....................................................................................................................................................................251
/DP* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/DR*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/DS* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/DT*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/EN........................................................................................................................................................................251
/FI 251
/GG*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/GI* .......................................................................................................................................................................251
/GP* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/GR*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/OF ........................................................................................................................................................................251
/OFU .....................................................................................................................................................................251
/ST ........................................................................................................................................................................251
/TG* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/TI*........................................................................................................................................................................251
/TP*.......................................................................................................................................................................251
/TR* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/UG*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/UI*.......................................................................................................................................................................251
/UO*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/UP* ......................................................................................................................................................................251
/UR*......................................................................................................................................................................251
/USE......................................................................................................................................................................251
codes ..................................................................................................................................................................243, 255
codes for derived values .............................................................................................................................................246

441
Index
5 July, 1999
codes for values set by the user ..................................................................................................................................243
<element>/LIMIT...........................................................................................................................................244
<element>/PRICE...........................................................................................................................................244
<element>/TIME_CS......................................................................................................................................244
<element>/UNIT_CS......................................................................................................................................244
<GR_n>/LIMIT..................................................................................................................................................244
<method>.<type>.<element>/.................................................................................................................245
<method>.<type>.<element>/MAX! .......................................................................................................245
<method>.<type>.<element>/MIN! .......................................................................................................245
<method>.<type>/TIME_CP........................................................................................................................244
<method>.<type>/UNIT_CP! .....................................................................................................................244
<method>/LIMIT .............................................................................................................................................244
<type>/CAF ......................................................................................................................................................245
<type>/THRFACT .............................................................................................................................................245
<type>/TIME_CM .............................................................................................................................................245
<type>/UNIT_CM .............................................................................................................................................245
<type>/UNIT_CR .............................................................................................................................................245
CAPEXINI ...........................................................................................................................................................244
DISCOUNT ..........................................................................................................................................................244
LAG ......................................................................................................................................................................244
MINDIL ................................................................................................................................................................244
MINREC ................................................................................................................................................................244
PUSH<n>..............................................................................................................................................................244
ROCK/LIMIT ......................................................................................................................................................244
UNDEF/TIME_CM ...............................................................................................................................................244
UNDEF/UNIT_CM ...............................................................................................................................................244
definition ............................................................................................................................................................421, 422
example ......................................................................................................................................................................254

442
Index
5 July, 1999
 keywords ............................................................................................................................................................244, 245
keywords for derived values
<element>.........................................................................................................................................................248
<GR_n> ................................................................................................................................................................249
<GR_n>.<element> ........................................................................................................................................249
<method> ...........................................................................................................................................................249
<method>.<element>....................................................................................................................................249
<method>.<type>...........................................................................................................................................249
<method>.<type>.<element> ...................................................................................................................249
<type> ................................................................................................................................................................250
<type>.<element> ........................................................................................................................................250
AVMINCAF ...........................................................................................................................................................246
AVPROCAF ...........................................................................................................................................................246
BENCH ..................................................................................................................................................................246
BLANK ..................................................................................................................................................................246
CAPEXREP ...........................................................................................................................................................246
CASE.....................................................................................................................................................................247
COVALUE..............................................................................................................................................................247
INTERNAL ...........................................................................................................................................................247
LIFE.....................................................................................................................................................................247
OPVALUE..............................................................................................................................................................247
OUTSIDE..............................................................................................................................................................247
OUTSIDE.<element>......................................................................................................................................247
PERIOD ................................................................................................................................................................247
PIT .......................................................................................................................................................................248
ROCK.....................................................................................................................................................................248
STRIP ..................................................................................................................................................................248
TIMECOST ...........................................................................................................................................................248
UGVALUE..............................................................................................................................................................248
WASTE ..................................................................................................................................................................248
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................242
line types
GRA......................................................................................................................................................................242
PER.......................................................................................................................................................................242
reference.......................................................................................................................................22, 119, 145, 241, 263
Spreadsheet Output File
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................422
example ..............................................................................................................................................................146, 264
format .........................................................................................................................................................................264
layout..........................................................................................................................................................................263
reference...............................................................................................23, 119, 122, 126, 145, 150, 154, 176, 241, 263
Square root (X) function..................................................................................................................................................287
Start pit or bench for a period
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................251
Stripping ratio
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................422
negative ......................................................................................................................................................................195
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................256
Structure arcs...................................................................... 23, 83, 93, 194, 345, 383. See also Benches for arc generation
definition ......................................................................................................................................................................83
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................422
Structure Arcs File
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................422
reference.........................................................................................................23, 29, 30, 32, 84, 93, 104, 112, 194, 336
Structure Arcs Program .....................................................................................................................................................83
reference...........................................................................................................29, 30, 32, 194, 203, 232, 316, 330, 331
Stump ..........................................................................................................................................................See Small stump
Sub-region .......................................................................................................................................................................344
block limits
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................182
reference................................................................................................................................................................344
default block tonnage ........................................................................................... See Default block tonnage:sub-region
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................422
information in Parameters File ...................................................................................................................................201
443
Index
5 July, 1999
 number
position in Parameters File....................................................................................................................................181
number of slope angles position in Parameters File ...................................................................................................182
Support cable bolts costs .................................................................................................................................................301
System error messages.....................................................................................................................................................407

T
Text file, definition..........................................................................................................................................................422
Three-D, description........................................................................................................................................................422
Throughput factor..............................................................................................................See Processing throughput factor
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................423
position in Parameters File.........................................................................................................................................188
spreadsheet codes ...............................................................................................................................................245, 259
Throughput limit
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................423
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................244
Tonnes
in place
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................251
in the ground
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................258
in the ground before processing
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................251
input to processing
spreadsheet codes..........................................................................................................................................251, 258
rejected
spreadsheet codes..................................................................................................................................................251
spreadsheet codes .......................................................................................................................................................256
Trucks costs.....................................................................................................................................................................300

U
Unable to open file error message ...................................................................................................................................407
Unable to write file error message ...................................................................................................................................407
Undefined blocks.............................................................................................................................. See also Defined waste
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................423
reference.............................................................................................................................................................206, 417
Underground mining
element
data, position in Parameters File ...........................................................................................................................191
processing data, position in Parameters File ..............................................................................................................190
reference.............................................................................................................................................................211, 326
Underlining, use of ............................................................................................................................................................13
Unit cost
element processing, spreadsheet codes.......................................................................................................................259
mining waste, spreadsheet codes ................................................................................................................................256
processing, spreadsheet codes ....................................................................................................................................259

444
Index
5 July, 1999
Units
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................424
Units of an element
in place, spreadsheet codes.........................................................................................................................................251
in the ground before processing, spreadsheet codes...................................................................................................251
input to processing, spreadsheet codes.......................................................................................................................251
output from processing, spreadsheet codes ................................................................................................................251
rejected, spreadsheet codes.........................................................................................................................................251
UNIX, definition .............................................................................................................................................................424
Unprocessed mineralisation..................................................................200. See also Print unprocessed mineralisation flag
User specified mining schedule .................................................................................. See Mining schedules: user specified
Using the package
minimum required ........................................................................................................................................................29
recommended approach................................................................................................................................................30
Utilities Program .............................................................................................................................................................149
reference...............................................................................................................................................................30, 366
Showing Block Value Calculations mode..................................................................................................................164
Showing Cut-off Variation with Processing CAF mode ............................................................................................168
Showing Four-X System Limits mode .......................................................................................................................171
Summarising a Data File mode ..................................................................................................................................150

V
Value types in text files ...................................................................................................................................................176
Variable, definition..........................................................................................................................................................424
Variables..........................................................................................................................................................................284
Virtual memory
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................424
reference...............................................................................................................................................................93, 402

W
.wrk................................................................................................................................................................. See Work File
Wall ............................................................................................................................................................... See Small wall
Waste
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................424
total tonnage spreadsheet codes .................................................................................................................................257
Work File
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................424
reference...........................................................................................................................................24, 92, 93, 195, 420
Workstation
definition ....................................................................................................................................................................424
Worst case mining schedule .............................................................................................See Mining schedules: worst case

Z
Zone number .............................................................................................................................................96, 100, 218, 225
position in Model File ................................................................................................................................................219

445
Index
5 July, 1999